Home

User Manual PDF

1. er Figure 143 Attachments Hyperlink Figure 144 Attachments List Window s Dues namens Co Diar fena Figure 145 Add Attachment Window You can attach files or web site addresses URLs to your items You can creale as many attachments as you like for any item To add a file lt in the file path where the file is located If you are sure of the exact location of the file click the Browse button In the Browse window navigate to the file you want to attach Click on the file and then click the Open button at the bottom of the Browse window The Display field will show the file name You can edit this display name if you like Doing wil not change the name of the file itself just the Display Name in the Attachments window Click Save to add the item to your attachment list for the assignment Toadd another file just click on Add Attachment and repeat the procedure To add a URL website address Click on the URL radio button in the URL You can also choose to copy and paste the web address from your web browser Highlight the web address and copy it to your clipboard using ctrl c Then click into the URL field of the Attachment window and use ctrl v to paste the address Click or tab into the Display field The root of the web add
2. Figure 116 LP Schedule Display Depending on your screen size and the number of items in your Schedule you may not be able to view all items at once The Schedule grid will display arrows in the time panel to indicate that more information exists on the Schedule you are viewing than can be shown in the current window Scroll down to see the rest of the items Depending on your screen size and the number of items in your Schedule you may not be able to view all the details of a particular item al once If space considerations dictate that part of an item is concealed roll your mouse over the to view the full details of that item e On the left vertical column the time of day is displayed in 15 minute increments The hour wil display 8 00 followed by three gray lines which represent the quarter hour 9 15 9 30 9 45 If you create items that start at a time that is not quarter hour designation the actual start and end times will show in the display before the item details of subject course etc Adding a Schedule name Homeschool Tracker Plus comes loaded with one LP Schedule Name called Default You can add as many different LP Schedule Names as you like An LP Schedule Name can be the name of a Resource Unit Study Student School Year etc Option 1 i Click on the Maintenance tab then the Other tab and choose LP Schedule Names from the drop down list 2 Click Add Figure 1
3. Time box or simply edit the exiting start end times for the SSS selected assignments Remember whatever choices you make here wil be assigned to allihe 128 Weekly Planner items you have highlighted 9 Click Save to keep your changes click Cancel to exit without saving 2 Copying Weekly Planner Items You can copy any one or more existing Weekly Planner items from one student to another Click on the Teacher tab then on the Weekly Planner tab Choose a Student or All Students from the drop down list Select a single or use Shift click or Clr click to select multiple items Right click over the selection and choose Copy Check the names of Students you want to copy to If you check the name of the student are copying from he will receive duplicate copies of the items marked To create an All Student item existing item either edit the original and choose Students or use the Use as New feature to create a new for All Students 6 Click the Submit button to make the copies click Cancel to exit with copying Duplicating a Weekly Planner Item Select the item you wish to duplicate Right click over the item and choose Use As New 8 Click OK on the Use as New message A duplicate of the original will appear in an Add Edit Plan Item window 4 Change any information as needed You may assign this copy to a different Student by choosing new Student from the dro
4. database You will have an opportunity to confirm your selection before Figure 115 Lesson Plan deletion occurs Deleted items cannot be retrieved Right Click Menu lt Use As New is only available for single item selections This option creates a duplicate of the selected record You may then change the record as you wish and save it 1o the grid or use the Copy button in the Add Edit Lesson window to make a multiple copies Irom the new record Change Sequence Numbers allows you to change the sequence numbers of multiple items at one time lt Mark as Used allows you to change the status of one or more Lesson Plan to Used Today s date will be automatically entered as the Used On date Mark as Un Used allows you to change the status of one or more Lesson Plan Items to Un Used The Used On date will be removed Submit to Assignment Grid is the menu item used to create Assignments from the selected Lesson Plan Items You can use this right click menu item or the Submit button at the top of the Lesson Plan grid The LP Schedule Supplemental video available on this topic The LP Schedule or Lesson Plan Schedule allows you to create a pattern for Homeschool Tracker Plus to follow each time you submit items from a Lesson Plan to the Assignment grid This schedule has effect on assignments already created Changing an LP Schedule does not affect existing assignments The sole purpose of this tool is
5. Reset All Grids This option allows you to reset the column width and column order for all Homeschool Tracker Plus screens There are customize and column reset icons on the individual grid headers Using those reset icons will only affect the screen you are viewing that time Switch School Year Switch from one school year to another by choosing a different year from the list The chosen year will become the new Active School Year along with its associated terms You switch back and forth between years at any time from any screen Timer Opens a Timer window See Assignment Timer Database Menu Figure 359 Database Menu Backup The very important backup process begins here See Securing Your Data with Backups Utilities Choose to create new empty database or point Homeschool Tracker Plus to a different database from the one you are currently using Help Menu Getting Stated Check For Updates Technical Support About Figure 360 Help Menu Index brings up the Help File You can also access this via the F1 key Getting Started opens a Welcome to Homeschool Tracker Plus window with some getting started tips lt Check for Updates use this feature to update your program to the latest version You ll need to know your download code and download email This requires an open and available internet connection Technical Support takes you to the Support page of the Homeschool Tracker
6. Figure 104 Lesson Plan Resetting Used Status 1 Use Shift click or Ctri click to select the items you want to change status for 2 Right click over the selection and choose an action from the context menu Mark as Enters a check in the Used box and Today s Date in the On column Mark as Un Used Removes the check from the Used box and the date from the On column 3 You may reset the status of Lesson Plan items at any time Changing Sequence Numbers Supplemental video avallable on this topic sequence number represents a day of school work The items that you want to accomplish on the first day you use a Lesson Plan will all get a sequence number of 1 the items to be done on the second day that you use the plan will get a sequence number of 2 It does not matter if the actual dates on which the work is done are sequential or not Days 1 and 2 could be Monday and Tuesday in the same week or September 1 and October 1 whatever meets your needs for the area of study Tae oe Sometimes you may find it helpful to resequence the items in a Lesson Plan you ve created or imported Homeschool Tracker Plus gives you an easy way to accomplish this task Perhaps you decided to omit certain items from your original Lesson Plan After you delete them you can use this feature to reorder the items that come after to remove any sequence number gaps This is not required but for those of us who like thi
7. Choose All Dates click on a single date or click and drag over a range dates Anatomy ofa Journal Entry SIC NT Ar Figure 262 Student Journal Entry Window 21 Meet enki imet 1 Figure 263 Teacher Jour il Entry Window Entry Date Required The date on which the entry was created Student Teacher Required For a Student Journal entry select the name of the student to attribute to the item In the Teacher journal the word Teacher will appear Category Required A category is a user defined label forthe type of entry These can be anything you like A default category is pre loaded You can edit or delete this item after creating at least one other category Journal Categories are managed in the Maintenance Other area of the program Title Required Use this field to further specify the journal entry Attachments Optional You may attach a reference to a document image or website to any Journal entry When an attachment exists an asterisk will appear in the field in grid view See the Attachments section for detailed information See Attachments Creating a Journal Category There are two ways to create a new category Click on the Maintenance tab Click the Other tab 3 Choose Journal Categories fram the drop down list 4 Click the ADD button 5 in the name of your new category and click SAVE Figure 26
8. Figure 40 Set Subject Order French subject wil be placed below the C mma e Gp Sene ner highlighted subject you drag it ue RT over Use the Alpha button in the Change Order window to reset your Subjects into alphabetical ft order Be sure to click SAVE to keep the changes that you ve made to your subject order As you create Courses they will appear alphabetically in the grid nested underneath their associated Subject Subject Courses Grid Filter The Filter drop down list controls which items are displayed in the grid The options are Active Archive Only and Both The default setting is Active displaying all the Subjects and Courses that are currently available for use The Archive Only setting shows those items you have chosen to Archive The Both setting shows all Subjects and Courses whether they are Active or Archived Coll pse Expand Use the blue up down arrow icons to collapse or expand all the groupings on this grid ay You can collapse expand individual groupings by clicking the buttons on the grouping headers Settings are not retained when you leave this screen learn LANGUA Core The English Lan T Figure 41 Collase Expand Options Subjects Adi ig a Subject You can create as many different subjects as you like Subjects should be broad descriptions of the work assigned Math
9. left side Set your preference in Tools Options General Hie New Duns Hep E amare Fie ep cori AW Soe ve Toda Figure S6 Assignment Grid Panel Collapse Expand Icons Ry Use the blue up down arrow icons to collapse or expand all the groupings on this grid You can colapse expand individual groupings by clicking the buttons on the grouping headers Homeschool Tracker Plus wil not retain your settings when you leave this screen cons Choose Columns and Reset Icons 1 Clickthe Choose Columns icon 2 Check the columns to include uncheck the columns to exclude Column selections will not be Visible for features which you have elected to disable in Tools Options Assignments Figure 58 3 Click Save lo retain your selections click Cancel to exit without changing your column view 4 Things to remember You can change your selections at any time Excluding a column from view does not remove the data stored in that field You can reset columns column widths and column order to their original settings by click the Reset Columns icon in the Assignment Grid header Figure 59 Reset The Drop Down List Student Choose whether to view items for All Students or one particular student Subject Choose All Subjects or one particular subject e
10. 5 Use Check Al Uncheck All buttons or check individual items to be changed Choose a replacement item from the drop down list 7 Cliek the Reclassify button A confirmation window will appear You need to confirm your selection by typing yes in the notification box You cannot disable this notification Click Cancel to exit without making the changes 8 All the selected items checked wil be changed to have the new selection 9 When you click OK or Cancel you wil be returned to the updated Used By window Repeat the process as needed for each different table of items The Reclassify Feature Figure 346 Reclassity Confirmation window Reclassily allows you to change the Subject Course Activity Resource Resource Type Assignment Location Resource Location Journal Category Lesson Plan Name Library Items and or Chore for all the items itis attached to at once For instance let s say you want to delete the Activity called In Class You can choose Reclassily from the Activity right click menu and in one simple step change all items that have In Class as an activity to a different activity and then delete In Class Without Reclassify you would need to go in and Group Edit individual table and make your change which can be a lot more time consuming i Goto the Maintenance list you want to work with and right click over the item you wish to change and or delete 2 Choose Re
11. Allow Reschedule At times you may need to change the original Date Due of an assignment If you moving a number of assignments you might wish to use the Reschedule feature If you uncheck this box Assignments created from this Weekly Planner item will not be affected by the Reschedule process and will remain on their originally scheduled Date Due Directions Optional Enter any directions you want the student to have when completing the assignment Notes Optional The Notes field does not appear on any of the Student Assignment reports I s a place to put information for you the teacher The Weekly Planner Grid Access the Weekly Planner grid by clicking on the Teacher tab and then the Weekly Planner tab Figure 125 Weekly Planner Grid Panel The Weekly Planner Control Panel The panel with icons and drop down lists can be displayed horizontally across the top of the grid or vertically on the left side of the grid You can set this preference in Tools Options General The control panel settings will be the same across the Student Assignment Teacher Lesson Plans and Teacher Weekly Planner grids Collapse Expand Icons ay Use the blue up down arrow icons collapse or expand all the groupings on this grid You can ag collapse expand individual groupings by clicking the buttons on the grouping headers Homeschool Tracker Plus wil not retain your settings when you leave this scree
12. Course Choose All Courses or one particular course Filter There are five options Assignments will show all the assignments that meet the criteria of the other drop downs and the date range selected Due will show you all incomplete assignments with a Date Due prior to the date range selected as well as incomplete assignments within the selected date range c Incomplete will show incomplete assignments within the date range Complete will show assignments that have been marked as complete within the date range Custom ignores the drop down filters on the assignment grid header and instead follows the parameters you set in the special Assignment Grid Filler menu See below for details Date Options There are two ways to set your date parameters Dates This will display items for all dates within the Active School Year Selected Dates This option enables the monthly calendar You can click and drag over any date range you like Use the left and right arrows at the top of the calendar to move from one month to the next Clicking on the Month name will reveal all months in the Active School Year Click on the month you want to move to Clicking the Today link at the bottom of the calendar will take you to a view of assignments for the current date View By Use this drop down to determine which field will be used to display your items There are three options c Date Due items will be displayed if their due
13. Figure 36 Relationship of Lesson Plan Weekly Planner and Direct Entry to Student Assignments area TE Lesson Plan The Lesson Plan is a feature for those who like to see everything planned out in detail at the beginning of the year or term in one or more areas of study Creating a Lesson Plan allows you to figure out all the details of the work you wish to assign explicit directions combinations of assignments that go together Such as a Unit Study and the specific pages lessons or chapters to be assigned You can create as many different Lesson Plans as you like You can make large scale changes to Lesson Plan items using the Group Edit feature Sequence numbers determine the order of tasks to be assigned Tasks which are to be assigned together are given the same sequence number See Sequence Numbers There are two primary benefits to using a Lesson Plan 1 Lesson Plans are not tied to a particular student so you can use them over and over again through your homeschooling career as needed 2 You can plan out the work you will be assigning without committing to any particular dates This means that you can submit the work to the assignment grid just before you re ready to assign whether that s a day week or month at a time I s up to you That way when things take more or less lime that you expected you don t have to waste a lot of time rescheduling things back and forth Lesson Plan items are not assignments themselve
14. Using the Maintenance Area Click on the Maintenance tab and then the Years Terms tab Right click over any School year name and choose Edit In the Add Edit window check the box to Make this the Active School Year Click Save to keep your change Click Cancel to exit without saving The name of the Active School Year will appear in the Homeschool Tracker Plus title bar Students Supplemental video available on this topic You need to create a record for each child in your family who is being homeschooled Some users like to add themselves as a student as well to track appointments or chores There is a placeholder student called Default already loaded You may edit the Default student to change it to one of your children you may delete the Default student after you have entered at least other student or you may choose to keep the Default student and use it to test features of Homeschool Tracker Plus The filter at the top of the Maintenance Student grid has three settings Active Archive Only and Both The default setting shows the Active students Adding a Student Click on the Maintenance tab and then on the Students tab Click the Add button 3 Enter a first name for your student You may use a nickname if you like This name will appear on all reports for that student 4 Allother fields are optional Enter them or not as you choose 16 5 The Initials field can hold any 1 3 alphanumeric characte
15. View Linked Items You can use the right click menu of the Goals Progress grid to view the Assignments Field Trips Reading Log and Memorization items to which the Goals are tied While in this special view of those grids the usual fiters will be disabled Field Trips will be displayed on the Assignments grid view 1 Click on the Student tab and then the Goals Progress tab 2 Set the Student drop down to All Students or choose one particular student If you choose All Students when you view items you will see them for all students who have been assigned that Goal 218 3 Right click over a Goal or use shift click or ctrl click to select multiple items and right click over the selection 4 Choose which items you want to view from the right click menu View Assignments View Reading Log Items View Memorization items 5 You wil be taken to a special view of the selected grid 6 associated with the selected goals will be displayed You can edit or delete these items as needed 7 Click the Return butlon to go back to the Goals progress grid This will release the special view of the viewing grid Deleting from the Goals Progress Grid You cannot directly remove any item from the Student Goals Progress grid If you wish to remove a Goal from this view you must View the linked items and unlink the goal from that view See the View Linked Items section above The Student Goals Progress Right Click Men
16. lt To create a new Lesson Plan name you can click the pencil icon button and then Add New and enter the name of your new plan The new name will appear in the Figure 75 Assignment Assignment lo Lessons window Copy to Lesson Plan Alternatively you can create a new Lesson Plan Name by typing directly into the field When you press Enter Homeschool Tracker Plus will prompt you to save the new name Check the box if you d like all associated attachments to be copied to the new lesson plan items as well Click Copy to proceed click Cancel to exit the process without copying items to the Lesson Plan When the process is finished you will see the Copy Complete message Click OK You can now go to the Teacher Lesson Plan grid to organize the items you just copied lt The items you have copied will be maintained in the same order by their original Date Due These items will be assigned sequence numbers starting at 10 000 so they will not interfere with any pre existing items in the Lesson Plan lt with the same original Dale Due will be assigned the same sequence number lt You can edit any or all of the sequence numbers as needed Entries in the Order field of the original assignment will be copied over to the new Lesson Plan items You may edit those values as needed TE Copy to Weekly Planner You can create a Weekly Planner item by copying an existing Assignment from the grid You should
17. the Add Edit Location fom Inthe Home Away style of the Time Spent Sessions report only Home or Away is displayed not the individual names created here These names will appear in the Assignment Location drop down field T Mike HOME mmm Figure 338 Assignment Location Add Edit Window 59 Chores When entering a chore you can also enter directions for that chore which can be displayed on the Daily Task List report The Directions can be as involved as you like and in whatever format works for you paragraph list outline etc Figure 339 Chore Add Edit Window Grading Scales i In addition to creating a grading scale you ll want to add the particulars of your scale 2 See Grades Grading Scales and Weighted Grading Lesson Plan Names Lesson Plan Names are the key to your lesson Plans If you want to archive a Lesson Plan you ll actually archive the Plan Name in the Maintenance Other lists Along with a plan name you can attach goals to the plan as well as set up your plan objectives These two areas are optional Figure 240 Lesson Plan Name Add Edit Window m Editing Maintenance Other Items 1 Double click on the item to be edited or right click over it and choose Edit 2 Make whatever changes you like 3 Click Save to keep your changes click the Cancel button to exit without saving Deleting Maintenance Other Items Y
18. 3 Set Start and End Copy on Dates these are the first and last dates you want the Appointment Chore to appear 4 Day Options Choose to Skip Scheduled Holidays days or not those days you have marked as Holiday Vacation Other days in the Attendance Calendar Choose to Skip Absent Days or not If one student is going to out of the classroom but school is still held you may choose to mark those days as Absent for that student in advance and have those days skipped during the Copy process See Attendance Choose to Skip Non School Days or not A non school day is any day not checked off in Maintenance School Info 203 Choose to for Selected Days 2 Wk or for Every Other Day lt If you choose Selected Days check off the days of the week as needed Non school days will be disabled if Skip Non School Days is checked If you choose 2Wk the second set of days will be enabled Check off the two week patter you would like to follow perhaps T W the first week TH F the next etc Ifyou choose the Every Other Day option Homeschool Tracker Plus will automatically count every other calendar day from your Start On date to your End on date but will only place assignments on Other days that meet your Holiday Absent and Non school day parameters as well Type of copy Date options Single copy 9 Repeat over date range Start Copy On Choose students to recelve new items End Copy
19. DELETING LESSON PLANS AND THEIR CONTENTS Deleting an item from a Lesson Plan Deleting Multiple Items from a Lesson Plan Deleting a Lesson Plan ARCHIVING A LESSON PLAN Un ARCHNING A LESSON PLAN PRINTING LESSON PLANS Lesson PLAN RIGHT CLICK MENU THE LP SCHEDULE SETTING THE START TIME FOR SCHEDULE Tet LP SCHEDULE DISPLAY ADDING A SCHEDULE NAME ADDING AN ENTRY TO THE SCHEDULE EDITING A SCHEDULE Irem COPYING AN ENTRY FROM ONE SCHEDULE TO ANOTHER DUPLICATING AN LP SCHEDULE DELETING AN LP SCHEDULE ENTRY SSSRESSRRRERERERERSSS 101 101 101 101 102 102 102 102 103 104 104 105 106 107 107 108 108 DELETING AN LP SCHEDULE ARCHIVING AN LP SCHEDULE UUn ARcHIVING AN LP SCHEDULE PRINTING AN LP SCHEDULE THE LP SCHEDULE RIGHT CLICK Menu THE LP SCHEDULE NAME RIGHT CLICK MENU WEEKLY PLANNER ANATOMY OF A WEEKLY PLANNER ITEM Te WEEKLY PLANNER GRID The Weekly Planner Control Panel Collopse Expand Icons Choose Columns and Reset Icons The Drop Down lists The Search Field Grouping and Sorting ADDING WEEKLY PLANNER ITEMS Tet PAGE LESSON CHAPTER Text Options Same Page Lesson Chapter for each Auto Increment Page Lesson Chapter Creating one level increment Creating two level increment Creating a three level increment Window and Grid Display CHEATING WEEKLY PLANNER ITEMS FROM EXISTING ASSIGNMENTS Eyring WEEKLY PLANNER ITEMS Editing in the Grid Editing a Single
20. Enter a name for the Activity Achievement 6 The date fields are optional If you do not want to include dates for either or both of these fields click the down arrow next to the date field and choose the None label at the bottom of the calendar 7 Choose whether to have this item appear on the Transcript 8 In the Notes field use the standard Windows keyboard shortcuts to copy ctrl c paste ctrl v or cut ctrl x text Right clicking in this area will enable the spell check feature 9 You can use the icons above the Notes area to adjust the font as desired 10 Click Save to add the entry Click Cancel to exit without saving Adding Time to Activities and Achievements If desired you use the Add Time button to track the number of hours spent on each activity You can create one entry to show total time or you can create individual entries for specific dates The total number of hours will be displayed in the Transcript or Student Activities Achievements reports Time entered in Activities and Achievements is not included in the Time Spent report Figure 27 Activitios amp Achievements Add Time To add Activity Hours you must fist create and save the item Then you can edit the item and click Add Time to enter the information you want to track Entering Standardized Tests Use this area to enter optional information for standardized tests your student has taken While you ente
21. Grading Indicators The grading options you ve selected are displayed at the top of the grid regarding calculation type and rounding options Set these options in Tools Options Assignments Viewing Your Student s Progress i Click on the Student tab and then the Overview tab 2 Select a Student from the drop down list 3 Select a Term to view The default will be the current Term What does the Overview show me The student s work is grouped by activity within the Subject Course Weighted courses will list all activities lied to that course so if a grade seems low you can immediately see what is missing Non weighted courses show only those activities with completed assignments Grades and total Sessions or Time Spent are calculated for assignments within an activity that have been marked as complete within the Term selected Overview Rows Subject heading Full subject name and subject code Course heading Full course name and course code If no Course is designated the Subject name and code will be repeated on this line Activities Weighted courses shows all activities attributed to that course and the weight assigned to the activity c Non Weighted courses shows only those activities that have completed assignments Total Line a total of the grade and Time Spent Sessions Overview Columns The total of all points possible for the completed assignments in the activity The to
22. In addition to selecting the calculation method you can also choose how percentage grades will be rounded to a whole number 0 to one decimal place 0 0 or to two decimal places 0 00 Grade Calcula n Method Averages default This method grades each assignment Those grades are then averaged together for an overall Term grade Then the Term grades are averaged for a Yearly grade as reported on the Report Card Transcript Individual Assignments 1 Grades are only calculated for Assignments marked as complete 2 To create a Grade for a completed Assignment you must enter Points Possible and Points Earned 3 Homeschool Tracker Plus calculates the grade for the assignment by dividing the points earned for the Assignment by the points possible for the Assignment 4 Aletter grade is appears in the Assignments add edit window based on the Grading Scale you have selected The percentage appears in the Grade column the Assignment grid For more details on this please see Grading Scales below Term Grades 5 For Courses without weighting or if you are not using Courses the Term grade is calculated by taking an average of the grades that have been calculated for each individual Assignment in that Course adding up all the calculated percentage grades for assignments in that Course and dividing by the number of graded assignments for the Course f For Courses with weighting the Term grade i
23. Page Options Enter a title for your report The default title is Assignment Calendar You can leave this field blank if you prefer no title on the report Items to Include Check one or both boxes Incomplete Items These are assignments with a Date Due that fall within the From To dates you enter for the Report Dates and which are not yet marked as completed Complete Items These assignments have been marked as Complete Items will appear on the date they were originally due even if Ine Date Complete is different 2 Fields to Include You may choose to include check or exclude un check any of the columns listed If you have disabled featuresifields those options will not be available here Figure 284 Assignment Calendar Report Options Column Layout Days There will be seven columns one for each day of the week Sunday through Saturday or Monday through Sunday School Days Only Only columns for those days you have indicated as School Days in Maintenance School Info wil be displayed Assignments wil only appear based on the date range you select Filter Select the Students Subjects Courses Activities and or Resources to include in this report Assignments Assignments The Assignment report is a means of getting a list of things to do in front of your student The Assignment Report of completed items is appropriate for inclusion in a portfolio Assignment Report Optio
24. p Choose the sof econ of ary DATE tea he ned n at 9 e em Figure 311 Resources by Student Report Options Report Style Choose the style you prefer single column or full page width Include Items in completed assignments items appearing in Assignments that have been marked as complete will be listed in the report Items in incomplete assignments items appearing in incomplete Assignments will be listed in the report Items marked as Additional Resource items that have the Student s name checked in the Additional Resources column will be listed in the report If you select this option you will then also be able to choose whether to include Active Archived or both check both boxes Additional Resource items Filter Choose which Students Subjects Courses Activities and or Resources to include in the report For Subjects the All Subjects option wil only display those items which are attributed to the Subjects selection in the Subject drop down list Courses the All Courses option will only display those items which are attributed to the All Courses selection in the Course drop down list Sort Direction If you have selected a date type field for Grouping 1 Grouping 2 or Additional Sort you can use this area to choose whether to display those items in ascending oldest to newest or descending newest to oldest orde
25. 13 Click Save to keep your changes click Cancel to exit without saving ps Edi ing Course Click on the Maintenance tab and then the Subjects Courses tab Double click on the Course you wish to edit or right click over your selected Course and choose Edit 3 Editany of the existing information Ifyou change the Course Title this will be changed in all drop down lists and in any Assignment Field Trip Lesson Plan LP Schedule or Weekly Planner items to which itis linked lt Ifyou change the weighting or disable or enable weighting that change will be reflected in all Report Cards and Transcripts for all school years 4 Toarchive the Course check the Archive box Archiving a course retains its connection to Assignment selection in the drop down lists For more information see the section on Archiving a Course below 5 Click Save to keep your changes Click Cancel to exit without saving eld Trips etc but removes it from Group Edit of Courses You can edit certain fields in any two or more Courses at one time using the Homeschool Tracker Plus Group Edit feature 1 Use shift click or ctrl click to select the Courses you wish to edit 2 Right click over the selection and choose Edit The Group Edit Courses window will appear 3 Puta check next to each field you want to change lor the selected group of items As you check them the fields will become enabled 4 Make new selection for each
26. 196 196 196 197 197 197 197 198 198 199 199 199 201 201 201 201 202 203 203 203 204 204 205 205 205 205 205 206 206 206 207 207 207 VIEWING Your STUDENTS PROGRESS WHAT DOES THE OVERVIEW SHOW ME Overview Rows overview Columns View ASSIGNMENTS AU STUDENTS VIEW PRINTING THE OVERVIEW Goats Tet TEACHER Collapse Expand Icons Choose Columns and Reset Icons The Drop Down Lists The Search field Grouping and Sorting ANATOMY OF A GOAL Appine Goals Goals Editing in the Grid Editing a Single Goal Group Edit DUPLICATING A GOAL Goats Gons GROUP EDIT IN OTHER GRIDS DELETING ARCHMNG A Un ARCHIVING A GOAL Tet TEACHER GOALS RIGHT CUCK MENU THE STUDENT GOALS PROGRESS GRID Collopse Expand Icons Choose Columns and Reset Icons The Drop Down lists The Search field Grouping ond Sorting ADDING GOALS INTO THE GOALS PROGRESS GRID EDITING GOALS INTO THE GOALS PROGRESS GRID Editing a Single Item Group Edit View Linken DELETING FROM THE GOALS PROGRESS Tet STUDENT GOALS PROGRESS RIGHT CLICK MENU PRINTING GOALS JOURNAL Tet JOURNAL Guo 207 207 207 207 208 209 209 210 210 210 210 211 211 211 212 212 213 213 213 213 213 214 214 214 214 215 215 215 216 216 216 217 217 217 218 218 218 218 218 219 219 219 219 2
27. 53 Matching Your Homeschooling Style Supplemental video available on this topic Do you like to plan things out before the start of the school year Is your homeschool more go with the flow Do you never really know what you re going to cover on any given day but still need a record of what s been done No matter which profile fits your homeschool or even if you don t fit into any neat label Homeschool Tracker Plus can help you keep your records in the way that works best for you There are three ways you can enter assignments into the program While some users will use only one entry method most will find that some combination of the three options gives the greatest flexibility in maintaining records Assignment Grid Entry If you prefer to enter items after they have been completed if you wish to enter summary assignments that reflect an entire course or semester s worth of work or if you have a more relaxed student led style you may find that entering items directly in the Assignment Grid is best for you You can enter individual assignments or create a series of assignments for one or more students using the Copy Repeat Over Date Range function You can make large scale changes to groups of assignments in the grid using the Group Edit feature See Group Edit Pint Teacher Way Pawar Aspens m aeri 9
28. Choose Columns and Reset Icons The Drop Down List The Custom Filter Option The Search field Grouping and Sorting ADDING AN ASSIGNMENT EDITING AN ASSIGNMENT Editing in the Grid Editing a Single Assignment Previous Next Buttons Group Edit MARK AS COMPLETE To mark a single assignment completed To mark multiple assignments as complete in one process MARK AS INCOMPLETE To mark a single assignment os incomplete To mark multiple assignments as incomplete in one process Rescitbuuva RECALCULATING TIME SPENT COPYING ASSIGNMENTS as 35 39 39 39 41 41 41 41 42 42 42 42 as 588886 50 50 50 51 51 51 51 52 53 53 Bees 55 55 56 Single Copy Copying Multiple Assignments to Another Student Copy Over Date Range Same Page Lesson Chapter for Each Copy Auto Increment Page Lesson Chapter Creating 1 Level Increment Creating 2 Level Increment Creating a 3 Level Increment Completing the Copy Repeat Over Date Range Process Using Copy Over Date Range When Page Lesson Chapter has been Disabled Creating a Duplicate Assignment Copy to Lesson Plan Copy to Weekly Planner MULTI DAY ASSIGNMENTS DELETING ASSIGNMENTS DELETING MULTIPLE ASSIGNMENTS ARCHIVING ASSIGNMENTS PRINTING ASSIGNMENTS Seno 10 REPORT ASSIGNMENT GRID RiGHT CLick MENU ASSIGNMENT TIMER OPENING A TIMER WINDOW Counc UP Counting Down COPYING ELAPSED TIM
29. Monthly Progress Report Options Figure 304 Monthly Progress Report Options Page Options Enter a title for your report You can leave this field blank if you prefer Choose Month This report can be created for one month at a time Choose a month year from the drop down list All the months in your Active School Year will be available Show Choose whether to display Time Spent or Sessions These options will be limited by your settings in Tools Options Assignments Items to Include for Time Spent Sessions Choose whether or you want your Reading Log Add Time entries to be included in the Time Spent Session totals for each day If you include this information the time will be added based on the date of the Add Time entry Columns to Display Choose whether to include the Attendance and Time spent columns Removing these columns does not increase the number of subjects courses displayed Grouping If you summarize Courses into Subjects only the Subject code will be displayed Grades are calculated according to your option settings but no regard is given to Course designations Filter Choose which students subjects courses activities and resources will be included in the report Overview Grades The Overview Report is an exact replica of the Overview screen for the Term selected Like the Overview screen it gives you and your student a good snapshot of how he is doing in his work Overview Report
30. be remembered Assignment Grid Right Click Menu Adi New Copy Copy To Lesson lan You can right click over an individual in the Assignment grid or over multiple items using the Shift Click or Ctr Click to perform various functions the selected items Copy To Westy Planner lt Add New allows you to add a new item to the grid Clicking this option will 5 bring up the Assignment Add Edit window oats Une New c For single item selections choose to make a Single Copy or to Reschedule over Date Range start Timer o For multiple item selections make one copy of each selected item for each student whose name you check in the box provided Copies will be exact duplicates of the items selected The only difference will be the student name assigned lt Copy to Lesson Plan allows you to copy the selected item s into the Lesson Plan screen Items will be copied to the plan you select from the drop down list provided They will be given a sequence numbers beginning with 1000 You will need to go to the Lesson Plan to edit the items further by clicking the Teacher tab and then the Lesson Plans tab Copy to Weekly Planner allows you to copy the selected item s into the Weekly Planner screen will be copied to the Weekly Planner list for the students to whom they are assigned You can Figure 76 Assignment Right Click Menu then go to the Weekly Planner to edit these it
31. lt A Standard entry has the same start end time for each Nem Window occurrence Choose to add the item on All Days School Days or Selected Days and check days as appropriate Choose a start and end time for the entry 36 Er C Seuol Dan Selected den Figure 120 LP Schedule Standard and Custom Options 9 Custom Schedule Wan CES yim mur Ww win Mir OS Wo EE Eine mam so WO TAA 8 I7 Wed Mm WR El Sat lt With a Custom entry you can vary the start end time for each occurrence of the item Check the days you want to use lt Enter a start and end time for each day checked 10 Click Save to add this item to the selected Schedule click Cancel to exit without saving Editing a Schedule Item Choose a Schedule from the drop down list Change the information as necessary Click on the Teacher tab and then the LP Schedules tab appropriate tab and entering the startlend times information 6 Click Save to keep your changes click Cancel to exit without saving Copying an Entry from one Schedule to Another Choose a Schedule from the drop down list Right click over an entry and choose Copy Click on the Teacher tab and then the LP Schedules tab In the Copy Schedule window check the name of any schedule you wish to copy this item to The schedule you currently viewing will not appear on the selection list Click the
32. message Click OK and adjust your weights as necessary If you change Weighting to No all values will be hidden along with the Wt column If you change it back to Yes all previous weightings will be displayed You may then edit those weights if you like You may come back to this screen to edit the weighting at any time Changes you make will affect all the grades of all assignments in all school years tied to this Course Activity combination e e Seale Grading Scale Came E use Det Oue O Pai Pet Figure 49 Add Edit Course Weighted Grading If you wish to alter the weighting for a Course for use in different school year create duplicate course with a different Course Code See Grades Grading Scales and Weighted Grading 12 Students You may choose to make this Course available only to specific students by checking their names s This will limit the Course choices when Students are selected from a drop down list If the student selected is not tied to the Course then that Course will not appear as an option in the Course drop down list When you are copying a single assignment with a course tied to it the only students who will appear in the copy window options are those who are also linked to that course When you are copying multiple assignments with at least one course attached all students will be vis sible
33. 9 Autcdncrement Page Lesson Chapter Example reached end of patam Figure 195 Weekly Planner End of Pattern Display No more Assignments will be created from these items even if selected for the Prepare function To reuse item after the maximum has been reached you will need to edit the Page Lesson Chapter text options for that item Creating Weekly Planner Items from Existing Assignments You can create a Weekly Planner item by copying an existing Assignment from the Assignment grid You should only copy one assignment per Student SubjecUCourse Activity Resource combination or you will end up with duplicates in your Weekly Planner 1 Click on the Student tab then the Assignments tab 2 Use the filters to display the item s you want to copy You can copy items for more than one Student ata time Each you copy will be placed on the Student s Weekly Planner grid 3 Select a single Assignment or use Shift click or Cirl click to select multiple Assignments 4 Right click over the selection and choose Copy to Weekly Planner 119 Click OK on the Copy Complete message Click on the Teacher tab and then the Weekly Planner tab Choose a Student or All Students from the drop down list The following fields of the copied item s wil need to be edited lt Page Lesson Chapter Text Options Selected Days 2 Wk options 9 Click Save amp Close to keep your changes click Cancel to
34. An Additional Resource is any item which is used in your homeschool by one or more Students without being linked to a specific assignment It can also be any Resource you have your student read or use that you do nol wish to create an individual Assignment for While you will assign Resources to Lesson Plan and Weekly Planner items the Resources by Student report is concerned only with Resources and their relation to items in the Assignment Grid Resources by Student Report Options Title Enter tile for your report You can leave this field blank if you prefer Grouping 1 Select a grouping from the drop down list The default selection is Alphabetical Your selection will be maintained until you change it Grouping 2 You may select a secondary grouping you like The default selection is empty Your selection will be maintained until you change it The selection made in Grouping 1 will not be available in Grouping 2 as you cannot group by the same category twice Additional Sort You may choose yet one more category to sort on Selections made in Grouping 1 and Grouping 2 will not be available Fields to Include Choose which fields you d like to display in the report If there is no entry in the Resource record for a selected field it will be ignored If you have selected a category in Grouping 1 Grouping 2 or Additional Sort it will not be available in this selection as that field will already be included in the report
35. Choose whether you would like percentage grades rounded to the nearest whole number 0 one decimal place 0 0 or to two decimal places 0 00 Resources Most users will want to be able to compile a list of resources used throughout the school year The Resource field can also be left blank If you prefer you can disable the Resource field completely This will also disable the Resource tab under the Maintenance area and Resource List and Resources by Student reports Disabling this option wil Hide the Maintenance Resource tab Disable the Resource field in the Assignment Lesson Plan and Weekly Planner forms Hide the Resource column in the Assignment Lesson Plan and Weekly Planner grids Disable the Resources by Student and Resources reports Disable the Greate Resource option in the Library right click menu Disable the Resource filter in the Agenda Reschedule and all Report options windows Sessions Some jurisdictions require that you keep track of the hours spent in school rather than or in addition to the number of school days For most folks who choose Sessions each time class meets equals 1 session You may choose Io activate both the Sessions and Time Spent fields and use different methods for different Subjects Courses if you like If you re not interested in tracking your school time at all you can turn off both Sessions and Time Spent See Using Sessions Disabling this option wil Disable the Sessions field
36. Click on Utilities Choose Create new empty database file Click the Continue button Type in the location where you would like the new database created or click the Choose Folder link to point to a location a From there you can then click the Make New Folder button to create a new folder in the location of your choice b Type in the name of the folder c Click OK 6 The default new file name is HSPlanner You may name it anything you would like Homeschool Tracker Plus will automatically attach the mdb file extension 7 You will not be allowed to create a new file in the same location as your old file with the same name This is a precaution to keep you from accidentally destroying your data file Click the CREATE FILE button 9 Homeschool Tracker Plus wil restart with a clean emply database You will need to re enter your School Info Students Subjects Courses etc 10 Databases cannot be combined 55 Pointing to Your Database Open Homeschool Tracker Plus Click on Database in the menu bar Click on Utilities Click on Point Tracker to an existing database file Click the CONTINUE button Point to the new location Click OPEN The database in use will change to the one you have selected Click OK Sharing Your Database across a Network The License agreement that comes with Homeschool Tracker Plus allows you to install the program on multiple computers in the same household To access th
37. Completed Assignments only Resources in completed assignments for the Course will be Included Any Assignment Resources from both completed and incomplete assignments for the Course will be included Items in the Resources list only items in the Resource grid attributed to the specific Course will be included Students This option is disabled in this version of the report You will select the student whose courses you want to print in the Student area of the general reports window Filter Select the Students Subjects and or Courses to include in this report Other Options Expanded report shows courses with completed assignments within the Active School Year that meet your filer settings Daily Task List Assignments The Daily Task List report is a way to combine multiple types of items in the same report You can choose to display Assignments Appointments Chores Field Trips Memorization Tasks and or Reading Log In this report format long term assignments are designated with and appear on each date between the dale given and date due Daily Task List Report Options Page Options Enter a Title for your report The default is Daily Task List You can leave this field blank if you prefer Choose whether or not you d like a done checkbox to appear on the right of every line Items to Include Assignments You may choose to include assignments or not Ifyou want to display Assignments
38. Copy Click or Cr Click Copy To Student Copy is only an option for Appointments and Chores It allows you to Due make single or multiple copies of the selected item Edit lt to Student allows you to copy a single item or multiple items to another Student Agenda No duplicate check is performed during this Right Click Menu operation Delete removes one or more selected items Edit opens the add edit window of the selected item Overview The Overview screen gives you a snapshot of how your student is progressing in each subject course subdivided by activity for any given Term This information is automatically generated based on completed assignments in each subjecticourse activity combination Values are entered into Term totals based on the Date Completed The Overview Grid Access the Overview grid by clicking on the Student tab and then the Overview tab Figure 238 Student Overview Grid Panel Coll pse Expand Icons Use the blue up down arrow icons collapse or expand all the groupings on this grid You can ggg collapse expand individual groupings by clicking the buttons on the grouping headers Homeschool Tracker Plus will not retain your settings when you leave this screen pss The Drop Down Lists Student Select the student whose records you want to review Term Choose the Term you wish to view Only the Terms for the Active School Year will be available
39. FIGURE 275 REPORT Preview Ficune 276 PAGE SETUP WINDOW FIGURE 277 OTHER Orions WINDOW FIGURE 278 REPORT DATE RANGE SELECTOR FIGURE 279 TO LOAD REPORT PREVIEW FIGURE 280 SECONDARY PRINT PREVIEW TOOLBAR A FIGURE 281 SECONDARY PRINT PREVIEW TOOLBAR B FIGURE 282 NOTHING TO REPORT MESSAGE FIGURE 283 AGENDA REPORT OPTIONS FIGURE 284 ASSIGNMENT CALENDAR REPORT OPTIONS FIGURE 285 ASSIGNMENT REPORT OPTIONS FIGURE 286 COMBINED ASSIGNMENT REPORT OPTIONS FIGURE 287 ATTENDANCE REPORT OPTIONS FIGURE 288 BORROWED ITEMS DUE REPORT OPTIONS FIGURE 289 COURSE LIST REPORT OPTIONS BASIC FIGURE 290 COURSE Lir REPORT OPTIONS EXPANDED FIGURE 291 DALY TASK LIST REPORT OPTIONS FIGURE 292 DETAIL PROGRESS REPORT OPTIONS FIGURE 293 FIELD TRIP REPORT OPTIONS FIGURE 294 Filo TAIP FORM OPTIONS FIGURE 295 GOALS List REPORT OPTIONS FIGURE 296 GOALS PROGRESS REPORT OPTIONS FIGURE 297 GRADE SCALE REPORT OPTIONS FIGURE 298 JOURNAL REPORT OPTIONS FIGURE 299 LESSON PLAN REPORT OPTIONS FIGURE 300 LESSON PLAN NAMES REPORT OPTIONS FIGURE 301 LIBRARY ITEMS REPORT OPTIONS FIGURE 302 LP SCHEDULE REPORT OPTIONS FIGURE 303 MEMORIZATION REPORT OPTIONS FIGURE 304 MONTHLY PROGRESS REPORT OPTIONS FIGURE 305 OVERVIEW REPORT OPTIONS FIGURE 306 READING LOG REPORT OPTIONS FIGURE 307 READING LOG FORM OPTIONS FIGURE 308 READING LOG TIME SPENT REPORT OPTIONS FIGURE
40. Goals List Report Options Gons PROGRESS Progress Report Options Grania Scu Grading Scole Report Options JOURNAL Journal Report Options Lesson PLAN Lesson Plan Report Options Lesson PLAN Names Lesson Plan Names Report Options Luray ITEMS Library Items Report Options 5 LP Schedule Report Options MEMORZATION Memorization Report Options Monty PROGRESS Monthly Progress Report Options Overview Overview Report Options Renoa Loc Reading Log Report Options Renie Loc Form Reading Log Form Options READING Loc Time SPENT Reading Log Time Spent Report Options Report Cano Report Card Options Resources Resource List Report Options RESOURCES av STUDENT Resources by Student Report Options Scope amp SEQUENCE Scope amp sequence Report Options STUDENT AcTIVITIES ACHIEVEMENTS 246 247 247 249 249 250 250 251 251 251 251 252 252 253 253 254 254 254 254 256 256 256 256 258 258 258 258 259 260 261 261 261 261 262 262 263 263 264 264 265 265 267 267 269 269 270 Student Activities Achievements Report Options STUDENT STANDARDIZED TESTS Student standardized Tests Report Options Suscrs Subjects Report Options Suenuss Supplies Report Options Tine SPENT SESSIONS Time Spent Sessions Report Options TRaNscriP Creating a Transcript for Prior Years Transcript Options for Columns Style Transcript Options for Full Page Style
41. Include in Assignment List Put a checkmark in the box if you want this item to appear in the Resource drop down list in Assignment Weekly Planner or Lesson Plan add edit windows If you do not check the box you will not be able to select the Resource when adding Assignments Lesson Plan and Weekly Planner items Subject Required Each resource must be attached to a specific subject or the All Subjects designation By selecting a specific subject you can limit the Resources that you ll have to wade through when picking a resource for your Assignment Lesson Plan or Weekly Planner item for a particular subject Course Optional This field is enabled when you choose a specific Subject in the Subject drop down list All Courses is the default selection If you select a Course this resource will only be available to you for assignments using the selected Subject and Course Attachments Optional You may attach a reference to a document image or website to any Resource When an attachment exists an asterisk will appear in the field in grid view See Attachments pd EASY GRAMMAR PLUS WORKBOOK Lor sae ALBEE A Figure 204 Resource Add Edit Window Resource Notes Optional The Notes field is a free entry area Additional Resource Optional Occasionally you may have a book or other item that the student will use in his studies that will not be ti
42. Please Note The fonts you have selected wil have no effect upon the Agenda report Because of the nature of the report it utilizes pre defined fonts Assignment Calendar Assignments The Assignment Calendar prints in a grid format with Subjects and Courses listed down the left side and days of the week across the top You may create the report for any date range you choose Each page of the report will display one full week If a subject course has an assignment for at least one day of the selected date range that subject caurse will appear in the left hand column You can control the order of items in the following manner Subjects are listed alphabetically in the left column When Courses are in use they will be paired with their subject alphabetically So you ll see English Grammar then English Literature then Math Algebra for example If you have set a different order of Subjects in the Maintenance Subjects Courses list that order of Subjects will be used instead The order of items within a Subject Course are determined by Start End times of the assignments Order field Alphabetical by Activity If Start End times are not in use or they are the same then the Order field will determine which item comes first lt Inthe absence of any value in the Order field of the assignment or if two assignments have the same Order then the items will be listed alphabetically by Activity Assignment Calendar Options
43. Right click over the Default student and choose Delete 4 Click YES in the Are you sure window to remove the Default entry from your database Archiving a Student If a student has completed his homeschooling and you are continuing to use the program for other children in your household you may wish to archive Ihe graduated student Archiving allows you to retain all records associated with that student while removing the student name from the Student drop down lists You can reactivate the student at any time if he returns to your homeschool or to run reports associated wilh that student 1 Clickon the Maintenance tab and then the Students tab 2 Right click over the student you wish to move to the inactive list and choose Archive 3 When you return to the student list or change the filter from Active to Archive Only the record will be removed from view You can archive two or more items at the same time Use shift click or ctrl click to select the items you wish to archive Right click over the selection and choose Archive from the context menu Un Archiving a Student At any time you can choose to move a student from the Archive list and back to the Active list Click on the Maintenance tab and then the Students tab Change the Filler drop down fram Active to Archive Only or Both Right click over the student you wish to move to the active list and click on Unarchive When you return to the Student list
44. See Resources School Info This is where you will name your homeschool and enter contact information that will appear on Report cards and Transcripts It is also here that you will designate which days of the week are school days for your homeschool See Setting up Your School Students You cannot have a school without students You can choose to list your students in this area by alphabetical order or in date of birth order fram oldest to youngest in the Options window See Students 7 Subjects Courses Here you can view the subjects and courses you have set up for your students Subjects appear in alphabetical order with their related courses in alphabetical order under them When you install Homeschool Tracker Plus there a number of Subjects listed You can add edit or delete items in this list to meet your needs See Subjects and Courses Years Terms This grid shows your School Years and their related Terms A checkmark designates which school year is currently active See Adding a School Year using the School Year Calculator Other The Other tab under Maintenance gives you access to additional maintenance lists Activities Assignment Locations Chores Grading Scales Journal Categories Lesson Plan Names LP Schedule Names resource Locations Resource Types Please refer to those sections of this resource for additional information See Maintenance Lists Reports Tie Nen Tools n
45. Set Area Discipline and Goal fields Hidden fields will be included in the search parameters Grouping and Sorting Just as in the Assignment grid you may choose to group and sort the displayed information in the Goals grid according to any column heading See 2 Using the Grids Anatomy of a Goal Goal Set This provides a way of classifying your goals Your Goal Set might be a Student name grade level school year etc Enter anything you like up to 100 characters Area Discipline This can be anything you like up to 100 characters You might choose to classify by Subject or Course Goal This is where you ll ype out the actual goal that your student is working towards Your goals can be as specific or general as you like There is no size limit on this field Adding Goals 1 Access the Goals grid by clicking on the Teacher tab and then the Goals tab 2 Click ADD The Add Edit Goal window will appear See The Anatomy of a Goal above for a description of each field Fil in the fields as appropriate All fields are required 3 Click Save to add the Goal to your list click Cancel to exit without saving 247 Add Goal Window 22 Editing Goals Editing in the Grid 1 You edit the details of any goal by typing directly in the grid Click once in the Goal field Type in your changes 4 To save your changes move on to another field or click the SAVE button at the top of the wi
46. This time we ll again choose to use numbers in the First Part We ll set the Leading Text to Lesson For five lessons well set the Start With field to 1 increment by 1 and set the End With feld to 5 8 Now we ll enter the 2nd part of the pattern For our example we want to create assignments that display Lesson 1 A etc so we will choose to use Letters For the separator we ll use the Dash Please note however that you can choose from the drop down list to use a color comma dot or space or you can choose the custom option to create your own separator even use words in addition such as Section to indicate Lesson 1 Section A Right now we ll just use the Dash In the Start With enter the first letter of the first section A We ll leave the increment at 1 Each of our lessons had 3 sections so we end with C Again we can add Traling Text if needed The Show Ending Page Range has no effect on our cholce this time as we have incremented by 1 The Show Ending Page Range option only affects the range of the last part use in this case the second 9 The Example window at the bottom of the copy options window shows you what the Page Lesson Chapter field will look like for the first assignment created 10 Press OK to set the pattem or Cancel to exit the copy window See Completing the Copy Repeat Over Date Range Process to continue exo Creating a 3 Level Increment A thre
47. WEEKLY PLANNER Weekly Planner Report Options STARTING A NEW SCHOOL YEAR PROGRAM OPTIONS F3 GeneraL Tabs Colors Filter Panel Position Student List Sort Order Start Time for Schedule Enable Spell Check Number of Recent Databases to Remember Default Journal Font ASSIGNMENT OPTIONS Date Complete Default Starting Doy for Plan Submit Subject List Display Format Course List Disploy Format Starting Display for Calendar Optional Fields ATTENDANCE OPTIONS Automatically set present on completed Assignments Automatically set present X day when Time Entry Method Backup OPTIONS Remind Me to Make Backup Days Between Backup Reminders When to Show Reminder Copy to Autoback Folder Every Time You Exit Number of Autoback Files NotiFicarion Notify Me When 270 m an m 271 am 272 272 273 274 275 275 277 am 279 279 280 280 280 281 281 281 281 282 282 282 282 282 282 283 283 283 286 286 286 287 287 287 287 287 287 288 288 288 Ask me are you sure when submitting from preview grids 289 Show list of library due every time you start the program 289 Defoult Library Return Reminder 289 USING THE GRIDS Groven 290 How do I Group 290 How do Group by more than one category 291 How do I switch the hierarchy of my multi category grouping 291 How do Remove a Grouping Designation 291 292 How do SORT 29
48. a naw tem nen tne rl Pe S me p ey 85 Caton Sues race Casy boob ten ascaris Ment Sos Deets ley on ater ret eta Nes aay ony on Aizen Carbine fat mp eme mm Figure 83 Add Edit Lesson Plan Sequence Required The Sequence number sets the order of the items in the Lesson Plans grid It allows you to put Plan items in the order you intend to accomplish them You can have more than item with the same sequence number for items that are to be assigned on the same day Gaps in sequence numbers are ignored when submitting to the assignment grid Order Optional If you have more than one item with the same sequence number in a single Lesson Plan you can enter number in the Order field to indicate which items should come first second etc in the Assignment grid The Order field allows you to specify a specific order for your assignments without having to set startend times for the assignments when created from the Lesson Plan 7 Custom Optional 100 character limit This field is user defined It allows you to create an additional grouping option for the Lesson Plan grid view perhaps the week unit etc This field appears only in the Lesson Plan grid and Lesson Plan add edit window Attachments Optional You may attach a reference to a document image or website to any lesson plan item When an attachmen
49. allows you to bump assignments forward or backward as many days as necessary This alleviates the need to go in and manually change a large number of individual items Assignments can be rescheduled for one or more students and for or more Subjects Courses Activiies Resources at a time Things to keep in mind Assignments which have been marked as Completed will never be moved Only assignments with a check next to Allow Reschedule will be moved This is the default condition of assignments when created Items with an activity of Field Trip will not be moved If you need to change the date for a field trip you must edit the trip entry directly See Field Trips for more information ALWAYS backup your database before rescheduling in case you change your mind Setting Reschedule Options 1 Click on Tools in the menu bar and then click Reschedule to open the Reschedule Options window complete assignments to move New starting date for first assignment Staring Date ue Marh 15 2000 Be Fest New Date Due March 24 2009 gt Ending Date Due March 20 2008 D gt Reschedule method Additional filter options ig tomatic Tracker wil move select tems to the Nent malatie date Al students Al subjects Use LP Schedule Tracker wil flow pattes from m the Schedule you designate for sac student M Manusi Tracker wal move tems using the selected below Al Resources Do you want to skip over
50. lt Hide the Teacher Goals tab Hide the Maintenance Goals tab Disable the Goals link in the Assignment Field Trip Lesson Plan and Weekly Planner forms Hide the Goals field in the Assignment Field Trip Lesson Plan and Weekly Planner grids Disable the Goals and Goals Progress reports I m Done The I m Done field is intended for use by your student to indicate that work has been completed and is ready for your review If your students do not have access to the program then you can disable this feature Disabling this option vil Disable the I m Done field in the Assignment form Hide the Done field in the Assignment grid Page Lesson Chapter The Page Lesson Chapter field allows you to set specific details about the assignment pages to be read chapter to study etc When this field is enabled you can use the auto increment option of the Copy feature to have Tracker automatically increment that information over multiple assignments pages 2 4 pages 5 7 etc Disabling this option will Disable the Page Lesson Chapter field in the Assignment Lesson Plan and Weekly Planner forms Hide the Page Lesson Chapter field in the Assignment Lesson Plan and Weekly Planner grids Disable the Page Lesson Chapter options in the Copy feature of the Assignment Lesson Plan and Weekly Planner forms Points Possible Earned Grades If you do not wish to grade your student s work you can simply turn of
51. the Date Given Date Due or Date Completed must fall within the date range selected for the chosen Grouping category see Grouping below J Columns to Include lt You may choose to include check or exclude un check any of the columns listed If you have disabled any of these fields in Tools Options Assignments those options will not be available here lt Ifyou have enabled the Start End Times option you can choose to suppress this information in the report However the times associated with your assignments will still be used to determine the sort order of assignments on any date in the report Fields to Include You may choose to include check or exclude un check any of the fields listed If you have disabled any of these fields in Tools Options Assignments those options will not be available here Grouping lt Date Given This option is disabled if Date Given is disabled in Tools Options Assignments Date Due This is the default grouping selection Date Completed With this grouping selected only assignments which have been marked as completed in the assignment grid will appear on the report Any selections you have made in Assignments to Include will be ignored Subject The order of Subjects will follow the Maintenance Subject list order Sorting Time Order Subject If you re using Start End times they wil determine the primary order of your items Ifyou are not using Start E
52. 1 Section 2 2 Chapter 1 Section 3 1 Chapter 1 Section 3 2 Chapter 2 Section 1 1 etc 1 To create this type of increment well use the First Second and Third Part sections of the Page Lesson Chapter Text Options window Set the Number of Parts spinner to 3 2 Inthe First Part section wel fil out the fields as we did before choosing to use numbers Well set the Leading Text to a Tha is Lasson 14 Use Letters 1 Use Numbers Chapter For four chapters we ll set the a ec Start With field to 1 increment by 1 and set the End With field 4 eda exc The V Leen LAS 3 Now check the box to enable the status 8 Une bars Second Part in the options window For satum example we want to create assignments that display Chapter 1 Section 1 etc so we will choose to use numbers For the separator we ll use the Custom setting and type in Section Figure 96 Lesson Plan Copy Auto Increment 3 part 4 In the Start With enter the first number of the first section 1 Well leave the increment at 1 Each of our lessons had 3 sections so we end with 3 7 To complete our settings we ll again choose to use Numbers Our separator of choice is a dot and welll start with 1 increment by 1 and end with 2 8 Again we can add Trailing Text if needed 9 The Show Ending Page Range has no effect on our choice this time as we have incremented by 1 10 The Example window at the
53. 309 REPORT CARD OPTIONS FIGURE 310 RESOURCE List REPORT OPTIONS FIGURE 311 RESOURCES BY STUDENT REPORT OPTIONS Figure 312 Scope amp SEQUENCE Report OPTIONS FIGURE 313 ACTIVITES amp ACHIEVEMENTS REPORT OPTIONS FIGURE 314 STANDAROUED TEST REPORT OPTIONS FIGURE 315 Sutiecr REPORT OPTIONS FIGURE 316 SUPPLIES REPORT OPTION Figure 317 Time SPENT SESSIONS REPORT OPTIONS FIGURE 318 TRANSCRIPT COLUMNS REPORT OPTIONS 333 29 230 231 231 232 232 233 233 234 234 237 239 240 242 243 244 245 246 248 250 250 251 251 252 253 254 255 256 257 258 259 260 261 261 262 263 264 266 268 269 270 m m am an E FIGURE 319 TRANSCRIPT FULL PAGE REPORT OPTIONS FIGURE 320 WEEKLY PLANNER REPORT OPTIONS FIGURE 321 PROGRAM OPTIONS GENERAL FIGURE 322 PROGRAM OPTIONS ASSIGNMENT FIGURE 323 PROGRAM OPTIONS ATTENDANCE FIGURE 324 PROGRAM OPTIONS BACKUPS FIGURE 325 PROGRAM OPTIONS NOTIFICATIONS FIGURE 326 GROUPING HEADER FIGURE 327 GROUPED BY DATE DUE FIGURE 328 GROUPING SEPARATOR BAR FIGURE 329 GROUPING BY MORE THAN ONE CATEGORY FIGURE 330 SwitchinG GROUPING HieRARCAY FIGURE 331 SORTING ARROW FIGURE 332 SELECTING A DIFFERENT ITEM IN A DROP DOWN UST FIGURE 333 CHOOSE COLUMNS ICON FIGURE 334 RESET COLUMNS ICON FIGURE 335 COLUMN SEPARATOR BAR FIGURE 336 EXPANDED COLUMN FIGURE 337 MAINTENANCE OTHER LISTS FIGURE 338 ASSIGNMENT LOCATION
54. 92 LESSON PLAN ITEM WINDOW FIGURE 93 LESSON PLAN COPY SAME PLC Text OPTIONS FIGURE 94 LESSON PLAN COPY AUTO INCREMENT 1 PART FIGURE 95 LESSON PLAN COPY AUTO INCREMENT 2 PART FIGURE 96 LESSON PLAN COPY AUTO INCREMENT 3 PART FIGURE 97 LESSON PLAN COPY WINDOW FIGURE 98 LESSON PLAN PREVIEW w SAME PLC TEXT OPTIONS FIGURE 99 LESSON PLAN SAMPLE WORKSHEET Ficun 100 LESSON PLAN Copy EXAMPLE TEXT FIGURE 101 Cory TO LESSON PLAN WINDOW FIGURE 102 LESSON PLAN VIEW OF COPIED ASSIGNMENTS FIGURE 103 LESSON PLAN MOVING TO A NEW PLAN FIGURE 104 Lesson PLAN RESETTING USED STATUS Figure 105 Lesson PLAN CHANGE SEQUENCE NUMBERS WINDOW FIGURE 106 LESSON PLAN SUBMIT TO ASSIGNMENT GRID FIGURE 107 SUBMIT Lessons OPTION WINDOW FIGURE 108 SUBMIT USING LP SCHEDULES FIGURE 109 SUBMIT WITH USE THE FOLLOWING DAYS AND TIMES FIGURE 110 Lesson PLAN SUBMIT PREVIEW WINDOW FIGURE 111 Lesson PLAN SUBMIT DUPLICATE ITEMS FOUND FIGURE 112 Lesson PLAN SUBMIT WITH NO LP SCHEDULE MATCH FIGURE 113 LessoN PLAN oF DAYS FIELD FIGURE 114 LESSON PLAN NEXT DATE GIVEN Figure 115 LESSON PLAN RIGHT CLICK MENU FIGURE 116 LP SCHEDULE DISPLAY Ficure 117 Abb bi LP SCHEDULE NAME FIGURE 118 LP SCHEDULE New Ficune 119 ADD EDIT LP ScHEDULE Winoow FIGURE 120 LP SCHEDULE STANDARD AND CUSTOM OPTIONS FIGURE 121 LP SCHEDULE COPY SCHEDULE ITEM WINDOW FIGURE
55. A STUDENT 21 HOLIDAY VACATION AND OTHER DAYS ADDING A HOLIDAY VACATION OR OTHER DAY 23 Removing A Houpar VACATION OR OTHER DAY 23 THE HOMESCHOOL TRACKER PLUS DATABASE WHEREIS My DATA STORED 24 Finding Your Database Location 24 SECURING Your DATA WITH BACKUPS 24 Setting the Homeschool Tracker Plus Backup Reminder 24 Creating a Backup 25 How Do 1 Know For Sure that my Backup File is There 26 MATCHING YOUR HOMESCHOOLING STYLE ASSIGNMENT GRID ENTRY 27 Lesson PLAN 28 WEEKLY PLANNER 28 HOW IS THE LESSON PLAN DIFFERENT FROM THE WEEKLY PLANNER 28 So AM SUPPOSED ro USE 29 SUBJECTS COURSES AND ACTIVITIES An Overview 29 SUBJECTS AND COURSES 31 The Subjects Courses Grid 3 Subject Courses Grid Filter 32 Collapse Expand 32 Suacrs 32 Adding a Subject 32 Editing a Subject Deleting a Subject 33 Archiving a Subject 33 Un Archiving a Subject Printing a List of Subjects The Subject Right Click Menu Courses Adding a Course Editing a Course Group Edit of Courses Deleting a Course Archiving a Course Un Archiving a Course Printing a List of Courses The Course Right Click Menu Acrvms The Activity Grid Activity Grid Filter Adding on Activity Editing an Activity Deleting an Activity Archiving an Activity Un Archiving an Activity The Activity Right Click Menu ASSIGNMENTS THE ANATOMY OF AN ASSIGNMENT Tet ASSIGNMENT GRID Collopse Expand Icons
56. Active to Archive Only or Both Right click over the LP Schedule Name you wish to move to the active list Choose Unarchive from the context menu The Archive box will be unchecked When you return to the LP Schedule Names list or change the filter from Active to Archive Only the record wil be removed from the Archive Only view You can un archive two or more items at the same time Use shift click or ctrl click to select the items you wish to reactivate Right click over the selection and chose Un Archive from the context menu Printing an LP Schedule The LP Schedule is a visual tool and is not intended to conform to the constraints of an 8 7 x 11 sheet of paper However if you wish there are some printing options See Reports The LP Schedule Right Click Menu You can right click over an individual item in the Schedule grid lt New opens the Add Schedule tem window Cony lt Copy allows you to copy an LP Schedule tem from one Schedule to tat another Edit opens the Edt window for the item selected Delete allows you to permanently remove the selected item s from the schedule You will have an opportunity to confirm your selection before deletion occurs Deleted items cannot be retrieved The LP Schedule Name Right Click Menu You can right click over any individual item in the Maintenance Other LP Schedule Names grid Add New opens the Add Schedule Nam
57. As New You ll see a notice reminding you that you will be working with a copy of the original item Click OK In the Add Edit Goal window change any of the fields as you like Click Save to add the new item to your Goal list 2 Linking Goals 1 Double click on the Assignment Field Trip Lesson Plan item Memorization Task Reading Log entry Weekly Planner item you wish to link to Goal or right click over the item and choose Edit Click on the Choose Goals link The Choose Goals window will appear You may use this opportunity to add a new Goal to the list Click the ADD NEW GOAL button Add a new item and click SAVE 5 You may select any goals to link to the item you have chosen If you check the Goal Set name the entire goal set will be linked If you check the Area Discipline name all goals under that area discipline will be linked If you check an individual goal that item will be linked Linked items will be highlighted in yellow for easy identification 6 Click Save to keep your changes click Cancel to exit without saving Un Linl g Goals 1 Double click on the Assignment Field Trip Lesson Plan item Memorization Task Reading Log entry Weekly Planner item you wish to link to a Goal or right click over the item and choose Edit Click on Edit Goals The Choose Goals window will appear with linked goals highlighted in yellow Uncheck those items you wish to un link from this ite
58. Assignment grid area They can also be created by submitting from a Lesson Plan or Weekly Planner items Assignments can be displayed in the Student Agenda view See Agenda Assignments will be used to create the majority of the reports in Homeschool Tracker Plus The Anatomy of an Assignment All Assignments must have a student a subject an activity and a date due All other information is optional View the Assignment input screen by pressing the F5 key or by clicking on the Student tab then the Assignments tab and then click the Add button Student Required Assignments are attached to specific students Completed assignments will be used to generate reports for attendance grades courses resources time spent sessions topics covered and goals achieved for that student Goals Optional You may elect to attribute goals to any assignment or group of assignments When goals are attached an asterisk will appear in the field in grid view See Goals Subject Required Select a Subject from the drop down list Course Optional Select a Course from the drop down list You may choose the blank line If you do not wish to attach a Course to this ilem Activity Required Select an Activity from the drop down list Resource Optional Select a Resource from the drop down list You may choose the blank line if you not wish to attach a Resource to this item Location Optional The Location field allows you to
59. Display Format Choose how you want Subjects to be displayed in the subject drop down lists If you have subjects with exactly the same you must select the Code or Code Title option to be able to select a Subject properly 22 Course List Display Format Choose how you want Courses to be displayed in the Course drop down lists If you have courses with the exact same name you must select the Code or Code Title option to be able to select a Course properly Starting Display for Calendar Set your preference for the calendar on the Student Assignment grid to display either as Current Week or Current Day This setting only affects the date selection when you start the program each day Optional Fields There are a number of features in Homeschool Tracker Plus which you may choose to disable by unchecking the box for that field in this section of the Options window Disabling a field does not affect data stored in that field Assignment Location The Assignment Location field allows you to note where the learning look place This feature was specifically created for homeschoolers in Missouri who are required to report the number of hours of work done in the home vs other locations Disabling this field will lt Disable the Location field in the Assignment Lesson Plan and Weekly Planner forms Hide the Location field in the Assignment Lesson Plan and Weekly Planner grids Disab
60. English or Language Arts History Science etc Create Courses within your subjects to provide more specific information about what are of the Subject is being studied i To view the Subjects grid click on the Maintenance tab and then the Subjects Courses tab 2 Click the ADD SUBJECT button to open the Add New Subject window 3 Enter the name of your Subject up to 100 characters 4 Enter a unique 1 7 character Subject Code This is just an abbreviation of the full Subject name It can be anything you like lt Reports will show the full Subject name You have the option of displaying the name code on the grids 5 Set the Status of the Subject Your options are Core or Elective The default status is Core In most report options you have the opportunity to include just Core Subjects so using the status to categorize your subjects can prove helpful Figure 42 Add New Subject key 6 Enter an optional description for the Subject 7 Click Save to keep the new Subject click Cancel to exit without saving Edi ing a Subject To view the Subjects grid click on the Maintenance tab and then the Subjects Courses tab 2 Double click on the item you wish to edit or right click and choose Edit from the context menu to bring up the Edit Subject window 3 Change the Subject name code and or status Ifyou change the name of an existing subject that will be changed in all Assignments Field
61. LIBRARY ANATOMY OF A LERARY ITEM Tet Leroy GRID Collopse Expand Icons Choose Columns and Reset Icons The Drop Down lists The Search field Grouping and Sorting ADDING A LIBRARY ADDING A LIBRARY ITEM VIA ISBN Adding Your Own Thumbnail Eyring LinARY EM Editing in the Grid Editing a Single Library Item Group Edit DUPLICATING A LIBRARY ITEM CHEATING RESOURCES OR READING LOG ITEMS FROM THE LIBRARY 148 148 149 150 150 151 152 152 152 153 153 153 153 154 154 154 154 155 156 156 156 156 157 157 157 157 157 158 158 160 160 160 160 160 160 160 161 162 163 163 163 164 164 165 Create Resource Create Resource Multiple Item Selection Create Reading Log Item Create Reading Log Item Multiple tem Selection DELETING A LiaraRy Ire ARCHIVING A LIBRARY ITEM UN ARCHNING A LIBRARY ITEM PRINTING LIBRARY IEMs Custom Library Report Tet LIBRARY RIGHT CLICK MENU THE RESOURCE TYPE amp RESOURCE LOCATION Tet RESOURCE TYPE GRO The Drop Down Lists Tet RESOURCE LOCATIONS GRiD The Drop Down lists RESOURCE TYPE amp LOCATION RIGHT CLICK MENU READING LOG ANATOMY OF A READING LOG ITEM THE READING LOG GRID Collopse Expand Icons Choose Columns and Reset Icons The Drop Down lists The Search field Grouping and Sorting WHAT ITEMS APPEAR IN THE READING LOG GRID ADDING A READING LOG ENTRY Manually Adding a Reading Lot Item Adding Reading Log Item
62. Lesson Plan the Date option is disabled as there are no dates associated with Lesson Plan items Page break options Student new page will start each time a new student is reached This is the default option Student and Subject Course a new page will start each lime a new Subject Course combination ora new Student is encountered Sorting Topic Each Topic will appear in alphabetical order below the appropriate Subject Course grouping lt Date Topics will appear in date order under the appropriate Subjec Course grouping based on the Date Completed of the Assignment or Field Trip If the Topic was assigned to more than one date it will appear multiple times If you chose the Lesson Plan option above the Date option here will be disabled Filter Use the Student Subject Course Activity and or Resource filters to determine which items are displayed Student Activities Achievements Other This report provides a way to print out the activities your student has been involved in as a separate report rather than as part of the Transcript These items are recorded in the Maintenance Student record under the Activities and Achievements tab The items included in the report will have a checkmark in the Show column See Maintenance Info Ancillary Student Information Student Activities Achievements Report Options Options Enter a title for this report You may leave the field blank if you pr
63. Library item and choose Create Resource 3 The top part of the Add Edit window shows the Library information you ve entered oe Library Info Resource Info Figure 183 Create Resource from Library In the lower half of the window you ll add the information pertinent for the Resource First decide if you want this item to be available in the Resource drop down lists in the Assignment Lesson Plan and Weekly Planner windows A check in the Include box will make the Resource available Unchecking the box will hide the Resource from any drop down list 6 Choose whether to associate the Resource with one particular Subject or to All Subjects If you choose just one Subject the Resource will only appear in drop down lists when that Subject is in use PES ue If you choose Subjects the Resource will appear in the drop down lists no matter what Subject is selected 7 Ifyou choose a specific Subject you may then also choose a specific Course Again this will simply serve to limit the number of Resources you need to sift through when selecting a Resource for your Assignment Lesson Plan or Weekly Planner items It desired you can add Attachments to the Resource See Attachments 9 Add any notes you d like for this Resource These notes will be separate from any notes you made for the Library item itself 10 Add Resource This feature allows you to include resources on the Resources by Student re
64. Lr gt Eu mim Figure 149 Supply List Window 2 Click the Add Item button to open the Add Edit Supply window dem Figure 150 Add Edit Supply Item Window Enter the name of the and if desired enter the number of items needed Click Save to add the item to your supply list To add additional items click the Add Item button again It you add multiple Supplies they will be listed in alphabetical order by Click OK on the Supplies window and then click Save amp Close on the Assignment add edit window pom Editing Supplies Edit the Assignment and click on the View Edit Supplies link Right click over the item you want to change Choose Edit from the context menu Make your changes Click Save in the editing window Click Ok in the Supplies window Click Save amp Clase in the assignment window Deleting a Supply Item Edit the Assignment and click on the View Edit Supplies link Right click over the item you want to remove Choose Delete from the context menu An are you sure message will appear Click YES to delete the selected item Deleting a supply item will only remove it from the assignment lesson plan or weekly planner item you are working with Copying items with Supplies If you copy any Assignment Lesson Plan or Weekly Planner item that has a supplies list those supplies will also appear for the newly copied items Supplies
65. Nome Aliowsble Figure 151 Grading Scales Grid Panel Right click over the Default Grading scale and choose Edit Note that the name of the Default Grading Scale cannot be changed however you can change the name of any other grading scale you create Ging Se liar S Latar Graco tor Faing Jenna E Unm for Pan Comes 80 aie Figure 152 Grading Scales Default Grading Scale Set the letter or symbol you want to use for any failing grade The default is Set the minimum passing percentage for pass fail courses The default is 60 This means that in a Course using the Pass Fail grading option any average grade that falls below 60 will be given the Fall grade any average grade that falls at or above 60 will be given the Pass grade To Edit an existing line You can change the letter grade designation minimum percentage and or grade point for any line of the grading scale Right click over the line you want to change and choose Edit Emer the new information in the correct box and click Save Homeschool Tracker Plus will automatically order your items based on the Minimum Percentage values from highest to lowest You can have more than one item with the same value in any of the three fields If two lines have the same Minimum Percentage Homeschool Tracker Plus wil randomly choose which letter grade to display fo
66. Options Page Options Enter a title for your report You can leave this field blank if you prefer Grouping If you summarize Courses into Subjects only the Subject name will be displayed Grades are calculated according to your option settings but no regard is given to Course designations Filter Choose which Students Subjects Courses and Activities to Include Reading Log Figure 205 Overview Report Options Assignments The Reading Log report provides a printout of items in the Reading Log grid You may choose to include incomplete as well as completed items Two report styles are available a single column report or a paper saving full page width style Reading Log Report Options Title Enter a tile for your report You can leave this field blank if you peter Grouping 1 Select a grouping from arate cde the drop down iist The default selection is Alphabetical Your selection wil be maintained until you P change it Conia tem 72 Additional Sort You may choose one z We ruin more category to sort on This wil determine the order of items within x each grouping Fields to Include Se Aira Sat Choose which fields you d like to display in the report If there is no entry in the Reading Log record for a selected field it will be ignored Otherwise the field Figure 306 Reading Log Report Options name will appear before each ent
67. Right Click Menu The Right Click menu is enabled when there is at least one ilem in the grid You can right click over an individual item in the grid or over multiple items using Shift Click or Ctrl Click lt New brings up a blank Add window Edit is enabled for single item selection only and opens the Edit window for the item selected Delete For single selection Homeschool Tracker Plus will search the database for any items that have been attached to the selected Maintenance Item You can then reclassify those items by choosing Figure 341 Maintenance a different Maintenance item so the original item can be deleted Right Click Mera For multiple item selection only those of the selected Maintenance items which have not been used anywhere with the program will be removed from the list c Deleted items cannot be retrieved Archive allows you to deactivate the selected item This will remove the item from the Active filtered view in the maintenance list and from all appropriate drop down lists while maintaining its relationship with all inked items Unarchive allows you to reactivate previously archived items This wil return the item to the Active filtered view in the maintenance list and to all appropriate drop down lists Reclassify is a special kind of Group Edit that lets you change the Maintenance item selection for linked items See Used By and Reclassity Used By shows you
68. Sessions Partial Credit Full credit hours are awarded if the student has a passing grade for the course and the student has at least the total number of sessions noted Partial credit hours are awarded for sessions less than that noted 1 order for Time Spent or Sessions to be counted towards the total Credit Hours awarded for the Course on the Transcript there must be at least one completed graded assignment per Term for the activity with those hours or sessions In other words if you have a Music course that requires certain number of hours in order to receive full credit and you include the activity Practice within those total hours you must grade at least one Practice assignment even with just 1 point possible and 1 point earned for each semester or those hours will not be included in the total of hours when calculating the Credit Hours for the course as a whole Course Description Use this text area to enter an optional description of the details to be studied in this course The Course Description can be included on the Basic and Expanded versions of the Course List report See Reports Activities By default all Activities in your Maintenance Other Activities list are available for each course If desired you can limit the items that will appear in the Activities drop down list when this 5 n Course is selected For instance if your Math curriculum wil only be using the Lesson and Test activities
69. Submit button 6 The selected item will be copied to the schedule s you selected Homeschool Tracker Plus will check for existing duplicate items in the target schedule s A duplicate is any entry with the same subject course activity combination If there is a duplicate entry you will see the Duplicate ltem message Click OK The item will not be copied to that schedule Double click on the item you wish to edit or right click over the item and choose Edit You can switch from a Standard to a Custom schedule or vice versa if desired by choosing the Figure 121 LP Schedule Copy Schedule ltem Window 07 Duplicating an LP Schedule It you have two students with similar yet not identical schedules you can create new schedule by duplicating an existing one and then tweaking the copy to meet the needs of Student 2 Click on the Teacher tab and then the LP Schedules tab Choose a Schedule from the drop down list Click the Use as New button Enter a new LP Schedule name Click Save The Teacher LP Schedule display will show the new schedule porem Deleting an LP Schedule Entry Deleting an LP Schedule item wil not affect assignments created from that schedule 1 Clickon the Teacher tab and then the LP Schedules tab 2 Choose a Schedule from the drop down list 3 Double click on the item you wish to remove and then click the Delete button or right click over the item and choose Delete fr
70. Transcript Full Page Report Options Body tems Choose whether or not to display credit units letter grades and or percentage grades A Grade Point will stil be displayed even if grades are suppressed Supplementary Items GPA Credit Summary You may choose to display a Credit Unit and GPA summary on the 2nd page of the Transcript The Credit Unit Summary will display each Subject and the number of total credits earned for each of the most recent six years included in the report as well as an overall total credits per subject The GPA Summary will display the GPA for each the most recent six years included in the report as well as an overall average GPA for the years of the Transcript Schools Attended unchecking this option will prevent inclusion of any Schools Attended information even if that information is set for inclusion in the Maintenance Student record Activities and Achievements unchecking this option will prevent inclusion of any Activities and Achievement information even if that information is set for inclusion in the Maintenance Student record If you include Activities amp Achievements you can also include any hours entered for those items Standardized Tests unchecking this option will prevent inclusion of any Standardized Test information even if that information is set for inclusion in the Maintenance Student record 278 Signature Line Choose to include exclude a place to sign the Tr
71. Trip will appear in the Assignment grid for each student attached to the trip The chart below shows how the fields match up The Activity fied in the Assignment Grid columns will always show Field Field Trip Form Assignment Grid Columns Student Student Description Page LessoniGhapier Tip Date Dale Given Dus and Completed Goals Goals Subjecr Subjecr Course Course Tocallon Tocallon Topic Topic Saena Times SiaJEnd Times Time Spent Time Spent Sessions Sessions Noies Direcllons Editing a Field Trip You may edit any part of any Field Trip except Student Some fields can be edited in directly in the grid make a change to a field filled by a drop down list you ll need to double click on the Assignment to open up the Edit window Make your changes and click SAVE The following fields can be edited directly in the Field Trip grid Description Trip Date Topic Time Spent Sessions Notes 1 To edit any of these fields click once in the field 2 Make your changes 3 To keep your changes click the SAVE button in the Assignment grid panel or click on another item in the grid To cancel your changes press the escape key on your keyboard before moving away from the field Edi ing a Single Field Entry 1 Click on the Student tab then on the Field Trips tab 2 Choose a Student or All Students from the drop down list 3 Double click on the it
72. Trips Lesson Plans Resources and Weekly Planners to which the subject is attached 4 archive the Subject check the Archive Archiving a subject retains its connection to assignments field trips etc but removes it from selection in the drop down lists pri 5 Click Save to keep your changes Click Cancel to exit pars oe Deleting a Subject Figure 43 Edit Subject Subjects can only be deleted if they are not tied to any Assignment Field Trip Resource etc When you first begin to use Homeschool Tracker Plus you can change the Subject list by deleting existing subjects or editing them to meet your needs When a Subject is already in use you need to use the Reclassily feature to reassign tied items to a different subject you can choose to archive the Subject instead See The Reclassify Feature 1 To view the Subjects grid click on the Maintenance tab and then the Subjects Courses tab 2 Right click over the subject you want to remove and choose Delete or press the Delete on your keyboard ande al teme at the came Une Ifthe subject is in use the Used By window will appear This will show you where the Subject is being Used throughout the program In order to delete this subject you ll need to make use of the Reclossily feature Resouces Ifthe subject is not in use you wil be asked are you Westy Famer sure 3 Click YES to delete
73. WINDOW FIGURE 34 DATABASE BACKUP OVERWRITE MESSAGE FIGURE 35 DATABASE FILE SIZE COMPARISON FIGURE 36 RELATIONSHIP OF LESSON PLAN WEEKLY PLANNER AND DIRECT ENTRY TO STUDENT ASSIGNMENTS AREA FIGURE 37 SUBJECTS AND COURSES FicuRe COURSES amp ACTIVITES FIGURE 39 SUBECTS COURSES GRID FIGURE 40 Ser SUBIECT ORDER Ficune 41 COLLAPSE EXPAND OPTIONS FIGURE 42 Apo NEW SUBIECT 10 10 ai 14 14 15 15 v 17 18 18 20 20 21 24 24 25 26 26 27 31 31 31 32 32 Fiunt 43 A4 FIGURE 45 46 FIGURE 47 Froure 48 49 50 51 52 53 S4 55 56 S7 SB Rune 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 Assignment COPY SAME PAGE LESSON CHAPTER TEXT OPTIONS 69 Ficun 70 Ficun 68 Rune 71 Ficun 72 Rune 73 74 75 76 Fure 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 BA 85 86 87 Froure 88 kon Suaitcr By Sunsets RIGHT CLICK Abb Eoir Course window CREDIT UNIT CALCULATION OPTIONS SPECIFNING ACTIVITIES FOR A COURSE Apb Eorr Course WEIGHTED GRADING Group EDIT Courses Course
74. You must have a printer selected to utilize the Preview pane The Preview Toolbar VERA G ck tont ipa gei Figure 275 Report Preview Toolbar Customize This button will bring up the Options window for the selected report Printer You may select Ihe printer you d like to use The default selection will be your Windows Default printer Homeschool Tracker Plus will remember your selection You must have a printer driver installed in order to preview or print reports You can use a PDF printer driver if you like Page Setup Most of the Homeschool Tracker Plus reports are designed to print within t inch margins However you may choose to change the margin dimensions if you like You can also use the Page Setup menu to change form Portrait to Landscape orientation When you preview a report a red line running vertically through the indicates that your margins will not allow all the data to fit an one page Click the Page Setup link to change your margins until you find a setting that fits Other Options Choose whether or not you want to use gray shading in the report This option is applied to all reports Choose which if any of the footer details you d like to include in your reports The footer appears on each page of a report Figure 276 Page Setup Window 21 lt You can select the fonts you wish to display in your reports Your selection will
75. a Lesson Plan all worked out for your 5th grader s math class You spent time picking out exactly the assignments you wanted him to do and the order in which to do them You carefully added detailed directions and notes to the Lesson Plan items Your younger child is only in 2nd grade and won t need this information for another few years By archiving the Lesson Plan you can preserve all that hard work you did this year until Junior is ready for it At the same time you won t have to be sorting through those items every time you go to the Lesson Plan screen Example 2 You do your history on a rotating schedule and this year you did a lot of work on Greeks and Romans You have 50 different books atlases videos and other resources entered in the Resource grid In three or four years when you get back around to this subject you ll want to use those resources again For now they re packed in a box to give you shelf space Archiving gives you shelf space in Homeschool Tracker Plus You can archive all hose resources now so they re out of your way Then when you are ready for them again you can reactivate them and not have to reenter them one by one by one ES Example 3 One of your children has graduated You do not need to see his info every time you use the program But by archiving his Student profile you retain the ability to run reports for previous years data as needed at some point in the future Archiving an It
76. a Student name The main information about a Reading Log item is entered in the Library title author etc The Reading Log window allows you to enter additional data When you open the Add Edit window of your Reading Log item you will see the title resource type author publisher ISBN Call Number Date Purchased Grade Level Notes and thumbnail of the original Library item Sins dee Figure 193 Reading Log Add Edit Window Student Required Each Reading Log item must be attributed to a particular student 172 Started Optional Enter a date when the book was begun If no date is entered this item will not appear on the Agenda display To exclude a date click on the calendar drop down and choose None at the bottom of the calendar Completed Optional Check this box when the book has been completed Completed items will not be included in the Reading Log portion of the Daily Task List You can choose to add a date or not Goals Optional You may elect to attribute goals to any Reading Log item When goals are attached an asterisk will appear in the field in grid view See Goals Attachments Optional You may attach a reference to a document image or website to any Reading Log item When an attachment exists an asterisk will appear in the field in grid view See Attachments Notes Optional This is an unlimited free text entry area If you like you ca
77. appear as the row headers o A P indicates a day Present a slash indicates a Y day Days Absent are not included in this report List c This format displays the attendance information for one student per page Itsimply lists the dates each month that the student was Present Present Y day or Absent Totals are displayed in the right column Filter Choose the Students you wish to run the report for Text to Include Put a check next to the fields you want to include to identify your homeschool Borrowed Items Due Other This is a printout of the information you can see by clicking on Tools Borrowed Items Due in the Tracker menu bar will be listed by type Resource or Reading Log It includes the date the ilem is due to be returned is Title and the borrowed from location Borrowed Items Due Report Options Figure 288 Borrowed Due Report Options Options Enter a title for your report The default title is Attendance You can leave this field blank if you prefer Grouping None There are no grouping headers Items will appear in chronological order by date due The tile displayed followed by the Borrowed location Date Due Items are grouped by the date due The Borrowed Location and title are displayed Borrowed Location Items are grouped by the Borrowed location The Date due and Title are displayed Courses Maintenance There are two versions of t
78. appearance of Homeschool Tracker Plus Tabs Initial Tab This drop down list allows you to select which screen will display each time you open the program You may select any ane of the Homeschool Tracker Plus screens You may change this selection at any time Hide Optional Student Tabs You can choose to hide any Student tab except Assignments or Goals Progress The Goals feature can be turned off in the Tools Options Assignments area You can restore any hidden tab at any time Click the hyperlink to select which tabs you want to hide Hiding a tab does not affect any data stored in that area Hide Optional Teacher Tabs You can choose to hide any Teacher tab except Goals The Goals feature can be turned off in the Tools Options Assignments area You can restore any hidden tab at any time Click the hyperlink to select which tabs you want to hide Hiding a tab does not affect any data stored in that area Colors Grid Theme Choose a color scheme for your database There are twelve themes to choose from You may change this selection at any time Enable Custom Student Colors Make your actual color selections in the Maintenance Student area Check this box to enable those color selections Mete Dn Erie Mon rene Figure 321 Program Options General Filter Panel Position Choose the position of the filter panel in the Assignments Lesson Plan and Weekly Planner grids to run down the left side or across the top of thos
79. are designated school days in the Maintenance School Info area Click on any date and all the school days for that week will be displayed lt Week Click on any single date The Sunday to Saturday or Monday to Sunday in which that date falls will be displayed Month Click on any single date Five weeks will be displayed including the date selected You can scroll from month to month using the vertical scroll bar The top left Monday will show you want month you are viewing List This view most closely approximates the Student Assignments view You may find it helpful when working with your appointments and chores Please refer to that section below The Calendars Two diferent calendars service the Agenda area For the Day School Days Week and Month options youl see the first calendar Below the calendar is Today buton This wil automaticaly return to the view to the curent date E uM HIDE When you choose the List view diferent calendar nw is in use You can cick on any date or click and drag any range of dates in this calendar as wel _ E1 Clicking the Today link at the bottom of the calendar Figure 230 Agenda wil take you toa iist view of the curent date You Calendar 1 can check the box to View Entire School Year in the List view This will show all items within the start end dates of the Active School Year Figure 231 Agenda Calendar 2 Choose Items to play
80. are not being used the Default Grading Scale is applied Percentages Only Only the total percentage average for each Subject Course will be displayed Both Letters and Percentages Letters and the percentages that were calculated to derive those letter grades will be displayed Optional Sections Choose which additional items to display Notes You can enter progress notes for your student in the Maintenance Student window under the Grade Level tab lt Terms A chart of the Term start end dates will be displayed Attendance Total days present and absent for each term is displayed Select Terms to Include Choose which Terms to include The heading for all Terms in the Active School Year will always appear on the report printout This option controls which grades will be displayed If there are no completed and graded assignments for a Term you have selected nothing will appear in that column Add Year Column Choose whether or not to include a Year column This will display an average grade for all Term grades displayed in the Report Card Grouping If you summarize Courses into Subjects only the Subject code will be displayed Grades calculated according to your option settings but no regard is given to Course designations Filter Choose the Students Subjects Courses Activities and or Resources to determine the displayed items Resources Maintenance The Resource List allows you to print
81. at the same time See f 1 Used By and Reclassity Used By shows you which Assignments Lesson Plan and Weekly Planner items have the selected Resource assigned to them Borrowed Items You can create a list of items due to be returned x days in advance of their return date The list will show all Library items that have a date due within the number of days you designate from today It will also include items which have not yet been returned that were due in the past It you like you can have Tracker open a Borrowed Items Due window each time you open the program showing which items are due to be returned Setting the Default Number of Days 1 Click Tools and then Options or press 2 Click the Notifications tab 3 Enter the number of days before the due date that you want the item to appear on the Borrowed Items Due list This value will be entered in the Remind Me field of each Resource and Reading Log item You can edit the field to enter any value you d like Setting the Number of Days in a Library Item d As you add a new Library item or edit an existing item you can change the default number of days 2 To activate the reminder area check the Borrowed box Figure 213 Library Item Mark as Borrowed 3 Choose a Borrowed From location from the drop down list or click the pencil icon to add a new location You may leave this field blank if you like Enter a Date Due Check the
82. bottom of the copy options window shows you what the Page Lesson Chapter field will look like for the first assignment created TE 11 Press OK to set the pattem or Cancel to exit the copy window See Setting Sequence Number and Completing Copy Process to continue Setting Sequence Number and Completing Copy Process i Alter setting your Same Page Lesson Chapter or Auto Increment Page Lesson Chapter options you will be returned to the Lesson Plan window 2 Choose the Sequence number you want to start on 8 Set the increment This sets the gap between sequence numbers for your copied items 4 If you have other items already in the Lesson Plan and you do want to double book any of the sequence numbers already in use then check the Do not use box This will create your copies on sequence numbers that are not already in use by items with same Lesson Plan Name Subject Course and Resource 5 If there are attachments on the original lesson plan item that you want to include in all the copies check the last box If you have the attachments option disabled this message will not appear Click Begin 7 The Preview window will appear This preview shows you the newly created items with a yellow background Same Pape Lesson Chapter for Each Copy 1 Page Lessor Chapter Example Pago 1 Sequence Number Start 4 nrement By Do not use se
83. by side view Assignment The Assignment is the central point of record keeping in Homeschool Tracker Plus All of your hours grading and goals reports will be generated from the information you enter in the assignment grid Assignments can be created individually or in groups using the Copy lesson Plan Weekly Planner features You can copy multiple assignments to other students There are a number of customizable options for viewing items in this area Archive Archiving an item in the database allows you to retain all the records associated with that item and yet remove the item itself from all of its related drop down lists For example if you are no longer going to need the Algebra course you have created you may archive that course This means that you will no longer be able to select Algebra from any of the Course drop down lists but all the assignments lesson plan items weekly planner items resources etc that are tied to that Course will be kept in the database If you find that you need the Course again in the future you can reactivate it using the un archive right click menu option Attendance a way to track the number of days your student actually spends doing school work You can enter full or partial days of attendance You can track the number of hours spent in school each day as well Course a subset of a Subject that defines a more specific area of study A student may be working in or more co
84. click menu option See Resources for more information Lay tems selected 9 Leno ead sng he leid bye Miles The of Fable Genes Finding Owr Roots 1 St ofthe Romane Tower Muse rns Rate study you want crestea duplicate Resource wth he same rry tem as gay aang Resource plese go to the Rarere ta end choose Vat Ne em the np ceri Figure 186 Resource Created Exceptions Create Reading Log Item i Click on the Maintenance tab and then the seen re Eccc Library Info 2 Locate the Library item you want to use ES Reading Log Item Right click over the Library item and choose Create as Reading Log 3 The top part of the Add Edit window shows the Library information you ve entered 4 In the lower half of the window you ll add the information pertinent for the Reading Log Item 5 Choose a Student to receive this Reading Log 6 Chose a Start On date or select None at the bottom of the calendar 7 Ifyou like you may also check the Finished box and enter a date 8 Choose any Goals or Attachments to associate with this Reading Log Reading Log Info 9 Add any notes you d like for this Resource These notes will be separate from any notes you Figure 187 Create Reading Log made for the Library item itself 10 Click Save to add it to your Student s Reading Log Create Reading Log Item Multiple Item Select i C
85. copy only one assignment per subject course activity resource combination or you will end up with duplicates in your Weekly Planner i Click on the Student tab then the Assignments tab 2 Use the filters to display the items you are interested in copying You can copy items for more than student at a time Each item you copy will be placed on the Weekly Planner grid of the student from whom you copy 3 Right click over a single Assignment and choose Copy to Weekly Planner or use shift click or ctrl click to select multiple assignments right click over the selection and choose Copy to Weekly Planner 4 When the process is finished you will see the Copy Complete message Click OK 5 To view the item s you ve copied click on the Teacher tab and then the Weekly Planner tab 6 Choose a student or All Students from the drop down lis 7 The following fields of the copied item s will need to be edited Page Lesson Chapter text options 9 Plan Days the days of the week check boxes 10 Any other fields you wish to change 11 See Weekly Planner for more details on creating Weekly Planner templates An Assignment can last any number of days that you would like To create a multi day assignment you will need to enable the Date Given field by checking that field in Tools Options Assignments Then choose a Date Given the date the assignment is to be started and a Date Due the date the assignment is to be c
86. first icon toggles the thumbnail view on and off In a multi page report the Thumbnail view makes it easy to move quickly through the pages by scrolling down and clicking on a different page The second icon is the Print icon Click this button to print the report you are previewing The print menu will give the chance to change the selected printer choose which pages to print and set the number of copies The binoculars represent the Find tool You can use this to search a report for specific text The next three icons let you choose the way to view the pages of the report The first is for single page view This is the default selection The middle is for multi page view The last allows continuous scroll through the pages When this is off you must use the green up down arrows to move from page to page of the report Next come the zoom controls The default is 100 The green arrows and backward forward icons can be used to move through the pages of the report The display shows which page you re currently viewing and the total number of pages in the report Finally this set of reports can be annotated You can click and drag a shape onto a page of the report Then right click on the object and choose Properties to add text change color etc Secondary Print Preview Toolbar Secondary Toolbar B is available for the following reports Agenda Courses Transcript Columns Assignment Calendar LP Schedule Tr
87. from the Library Click on the Maintenance tab and then click on the Library tab Use Shift click or Ctrl lick to select two or more items to work with Right click over the selection and choose Create Resource Create Resource Item window will appear listing of the titles selected gt Tesouros ANY ONLY checkbox fou NOT be using is Came Flin Race Hodwen aw acters Figure 210 Create Resource Window Choose a Subject from the drop down list Enter whatever other information you would like to be the same for all the selected titles Click Save Go to the Maintenance Resources tab to make additional changes or to copy any or all of these items to another student Editing a Resource Editing in the Grid You can edit the Notes field by typing directly into that field in the grid All other changes to a Resource require that you open the Add Edit window by double clicking on the item or right clicking over the item and choosing Edit from the menu Editinga Single Resource To view the Resource grid click on the Maintenance tab then the Resources tab 2 Double click on the item you wish to edit or right click over your selected item and choose Edit 3 Change any of the existing information or enter new information for this Resource If you change the Resource Title it will be changed in all drop down lists and in any Assignment Lesson Plan or Week
88. from the Library Adding Multiple Reading Log Items from the Library EDITING A READING Loc ITEM Editing in the Grid Editing a Single Reading Log Item Adding Time to a Reading Log Item Group Edit Mark as Compuere MARK as INCOMPLETE COPYING a READING Loc ITEM DELETING A READING Loc ITEM PRINTING READING Loss Te READING LOG RIGHT CUCK MENU RESOURCES ANATOMY OF A RESOURCE Tet Resource 165 166 167 180 182 Collopse Expand Icons Choose Columns and Reset Icons The Drop Down lists The Search field Grouping and Sorting ADDING A RESOURCE Adding a Resource in an Assignment Lesson Plan or Weekly Planner Item Adding a Resource from the Library Adding Multiple Resources from the Library EDITING a RESOURCE Editing in the Grid Editing a Single Resource Group Edit Use As New DELETING A RESOURCE Deleting a Single Resource Deleting Multiple Resources ARCHIVING RESOURCES UN ARCHIVING RESOURCES PRINTING RESOURCES RESOURCE RIGHT CUCK MENU BORROWED ITEMS SETTING THE DEFAULT NUMBER OF DAYS SETTING THE NUMBER OF DAYS IN A LIBRARY ITEM ENABLING THE BORROWED ITEMS DUE REMINDER CREATING THE BORROWED ITEMS DUE Ls WORKING WITH THE BORROWED ITEMS DUE us PRINTING THE BORROWED ITEMS Due LST MEMORIZATION ITEMS ANATOMY OF A MEMORIZATON ITEM THE MEMORIZATION GRID Collopse Expand Icons Choose Columns and Reset Icons The Drop Down Lists The Search field Grouping and Sortin
89. from the context menu Figure 202 Reading Lo 3 The Use As New window will display all the titles displayed in the order in which they were selected 4 Inthe lower portion of the window select the students who are to receive these Reading Log items If you choose a student who already has this book in his log a duplicate entry will be created 5 Click Save to enter the items in the selected Reading Logs Deleting a Reading Log Item 1 Click on a single item or select multiple items using Shift click or Ctl click 2 Right click over the selection and choose Delete 3 Click OK to delete the selected record s click Cancel to quit without deleting Deleted items cannot be retrieved Printing Reading Logs You can create a printout of all or part of a Reading Log for any selected students You can print a detail report of the Reading Log Add Time entries See Reports The Reading Log Right Click Menu You can right click over an individual item in the Reading Log grid or over multiple items using the Shif Click or Ctr Click procedures outlined above Add New allows you to add a new ilem to the grid Edit For single item selection This will open the Add Edit window for that item For multiple item selections This will bring up the Group Edit window 7 from which you may choose to globally edit fields for the selected items x Delete allows you to permanently remove the selected item
90. grid Editing an Assignment You may edit any part of any Assignment Some fields can be edited in directly in the grid To make a change to a field filled by a drop down list you ll need to double click on the Assignment to open up the Edit window Make your changes and click the SAVE amp CLOSE button Editing in the Grid A number of fields can be edited directly in the grid These include Date Given Date Due Date Completed Page Lesson Chapter Topic Order Directions Notes Poss points possible Earn points earned Time Spent Sess Sessions I m Done and Done Date Fields can only be edited in the grid i there is already a date showing i To edit any of these fields click once in the field 2 Make your changes 8 To keep your changes click the SAVE button in the Assignment grid panel or click on another tem in the grid 4 To cancel your changes press the escape key on your keyboard before moving away from the field Edi ing a Single Assignment You can open the Edit window for any Assignment to edit part of the information it contains 4 Double click on the item you wish to edit or right click over Ihe item and select Edit from the context menu 2 Make any changes you wish Changes will be made to this Assignment only 3 Click Save amp Close to apply your changes click Cancel to exit without saving Previous Next Buttons I you ve elected to open the Edit window to make changes to an
91. grid by clicking on the Student tab and then the Field Trips tab Te Ner Dane Hep epe pese mdi c in RB BM Suse Figure 164 Field Trip Grid Panel Collapse Expand Icons ay Use the blue upidown arrow icons to collapse or expand all the groupings on this grid You ean gy colapse expand individual groupings by clicking the buttons on the grouping headers Homeschool Tracker Plus wil not retain your setings when you leave this screen Choose Columns and Reset Icons i Click the Choose Columns icon 2 Check the columns to include uncheck the columns to exclude Column selections will not be Figure 166 visible for features which you have elected to disable in Tools Options Assignments Choose Columns Icon 2 3 Click Save to retain your selections click Cancel to exit without changing your column view 4 Things to remember Figure 167 You can change your selections at any time Reset lt Excluding a column from view does not remove the data stored in that feld Columns lt You can reset columns column widths and column order to their original settings by click the Reset Columns icon in the Assignment Grid header The Drop Down Lists Student Choose whether to view items for All Students or one particular student The Search field You can search among your field trips within the parameters of your drop d
92. grid with a pink background 18 The OK field will be unchecked 20 You may Check OK to include these items in the submit process 21 This is your chance to make any last minute changes to the Assignments or exclude them from posting You can edit the information in the Order Page Lesson Chapter Topic Date Given Date Due Point Possible Time Spent Sessions Directions and or Notes for any of the items displayed 22 Uncheck the OK box for any item you do not wish to add to the Assignment grid You can use the Check All Uncheck All buttons to make mass changes to this field 93 28 Click the SUBMIT button to enter these items into the Assignment grid click Cancel to exit without entering the items The Page Lesson Chapter field for the items used will be updated accordingly in the Weekly Planner grid What if no assignments appear for one of my selections If you do not see Assignments in the Prepare window there are three things you can check Make sure that your Weekly Planner item has at least one day of the week checked in the Selected Days 2 Week area Make sure that you have a valid setting in the Page Lesson Chapter Text options If the item has reached the end of pattern no assignments will be created Check the values in the First Use On Last Use On fields to make sure that they don t exclude the selected date range in the Create Assignments window View Assignments The View Assignments feature allows y
93. in the Assignment Field Trip Lesson Plan Reading Log Add Time and Weekly Planner forms lt Hide the Sessions option in the Time Entry Method drop down in Tools Options Attendance Hide the Sessions column in the Assignment Field Trip Lesson Plan and Weekly Planner forms Ifboth this and the Time Spent items are disabled the Time Spent Sessions report and the Reading Log Time Spent report are disabled Start End Times This feature lets you assign specific times frames when you want your student to complete an assignment Checking this box enables the Has Time field in the Assignment Field Trip and Weekly Planner add edit windows as well as in the Lesson Plan Submit window Turning this option does not require you to add start end times to all items created You can always uncheck the Has Time field Disabling this option wil Disable the Has Time Star End times in the Assignment Field Trip and Weekly Planner forms Hide the Start and End time columns in the Assignment Field Trip and Weekly Planner grids Disable the Auto Calculate Time Spent option Supplies This feature allows you to create lists of supplies needed to complete the assignment For instance for a Science lab it may contain the list of items needed to conduct the experiment The list of supplies can be printed out in report format for taking to the store Disabling this option wil Disable the Supplies link in the Assignment Lesson Plan a
94. lessons welll set the Start With field to 1 7 18 E increment by 1 and set the End With field to 5 3 Now we ll enter the 2nd part of the pattern For our example we want to create assignments that display Lesson 1 A etc so we will choose to use Letters For the separator we ll use the Dash Please note however that you can choose from the drop down list to use a color comma dot or space or you can choose the custom option to create your own separator or even use words in addition such as Section to indicate Lesson 1 Section A Right now we l just use the Dash In the Start With enter the first letter of the first section A We ll leave the increment at 1 Each of our lessons had 3 sections so we end with C Again we can add Trailing Text if needed The Show Ending Page Range has no effect on our cholce this time as we have incremented by 1 The Show Ending Page Range option only affects the range of the last part use in this case the second 9 The Example window at the bottom of the copy options window shows you what the Page Lesson Chapter field will look like for the first assignment created 10 Press OK to set the pattem or Cancel to exit the copy window See Setting Sequence Number and Completing Copy Process to continue Creating a 3 Level Auto Increment AHevel auto increment might be Chapter 1 Section 1 1 Chapter 1 Section 1 2 Chapter 1 Section 2 1 Chapter
95. lume can be cen y turing hhe Tools Options window There may be features you wish to use but you don t need want to see those columns in Figure 333 the grid To remove those columns click the Choose Columns icon at the top of that gr Choose Uncheck the box next to the column you wish to hide Recheck the box to display the column again Tochange the order of fields in the grid simply click and drag the columns where you want them Tracker will remember the order you have set until you change it again To change the size of a field click and drag on the column separator on the right side of the column name Move the bar left or right to collapse or expand the column to the size you want Your column resizing will be remembered until you change it again or until you click the Reset Columns button at the top of the grid to reset the default values Ifyou make a mess of your columns you can click the Reset Columns icon at the top of the grid to reset the columns so that all columns are displayed and in their default order and at their default size To reset all grids throughout the program at one time click on Tools in the menu bar and then Figure 334 click on Reset All Grids This will return each grid to its factory settings All columns will be Reset Columns displayed unless that feature was turned off in Tools Options Each column will appear in the default order and at the default size You can the
96. on the Student lab and then the Memorization tab Te New Tool Deer Help Tomber Mantenenco Anoncanoe Fiala Tipe Goals Progresa Jounal Werten overi Rea eg R EY Figure 217 Memorization Grid Panel Coll pse Expand Icons Ry Use the blue up down arrow icons collapse or expand all the groupings on this grid You can collapse expand individual groupings by clicking the buttons on the grouping headers Homeschool Tracker Plus wil not retain your settings when you leave this screen eons Choose Columns and Reset Icons 1 Click the Choose Columns icon 2 Check the columns to include uncheck the columns to exclude Column selections will not be visible for features which you have elected to disable in Tools Options Assignments Figure 219 3 Click Save to retain your selections click Cancel to exit without changing your column view Choose 4 Things to remember Columns icon You can change your selections at any time 1 Excluding a column from view does not remove the data stored in that el 5 You can reset columns column widths and column order to hir original setings by ciek the Reset Columns icon in he Assignment Gr header Figure z2 F Columns Icon The Drop Down Lists Student Choose whether to view items for All Students or one particular student The Search field You can search among your Memorizati
97. one day or more between the Date Given and the Date Due LP Schedule this feature exists solely to assist you when submitting Lesson Plan items to the Assignment grid If you have a regular schedule to your day you can enter that pattern here so that you do not have to enter it each time you perform the submit process You may create as many different LP Schedules as you would like Memorization place to track items you have your student memorize poems spelling lists Bible verses etc Memorization items are not graded Notes the Notes field in the Assignment form is a space where you can list information for your own benefit The Notes field will not print on any of the assignment list reports except for the Combined version of the Assignments report The Notes field is also hidden from view when a Student is signed in under the Security Login feature Other day see Holiday above Overview this tabbed area under the Student tab provides a snapshot of the student s progress by term for each area of study Here you can see the grade achieved to date along with the breakdown of how that grade was determined by activity If you are using Weighted Grading this is the first place to if the grade appearing on a Report Card or Transcript is different than what you expected Reading Log a listing of books read by the student outside of the regular assigned reading 325 Resource any book workbook textbook
98. ones you d like to view In the monthly view all the information for each selected student will be shown in each date but you won t be able to distinguish which items belong to which student so it is of limited value in this case When the View Multiple Students option is checked these selections override your selection in the student drop down list When you uncheck View Multiple Students again the drop down selection will be in effect Ad nal Filters Use the Subjects Courses Activities and or Resources filters to limit the assignments and field trips which are displayed These values are carried over from the same filler selections in the Reports and Reschedule options windows Appointments and Chores You can add appointments or chores to your student s schedule These items can be included in the Daily Task List report along with Assignments Field Trips Reading Log and Memorization Tasks Ad ig Appointments Click on the Student tab and then the Agenda tab Click the ADD button to bring up the Add Edit Appointment window 3 To add an Appointment Type the name or type of appointment in the What field If desired enter something in the Where field Set the start date As most appointments begin and end on the same day the End date will default to the same as your start date Set the start and end times If there are no specific times to be assigned check the All Day Event box 4 Cli
99. open the Group Edit window pm Figure 201 Group Edit Reading Log Window 4 Puta check next to each field you want to change for the selected group of items As you check them the fields will become enabled 5 Make your new selections for each checked field Remember whatever choices you make here will be assigned to all the items you have highlighted Click Save to keep your changes click Cancel to exit without saving Mark as Complete 1 Right click over a single item or use Shift click or Ctri click to select multiple items and right cli the selection 2 Choose Mark Complete from the context menu 3 You have two options for your completion date The default selection is to enter a Finished Date equal to the Start Date Alternatively you may select a date from the calendar to use as the Finished Date If you choose the first option and no Start date exists the item will be marked as complete but no Finished date will be added 4 Click OK over Mark as Incomplete 1 Right click over a single item or use Shift click Ctri click to select multiple items 2 Choose Mark Incomplete from the context menu 178 3 The checkmark will be removed from the Done column and the date will be removed from the End column Copying a Reading Log Item Rightlick on an item or use Shift click or to select two or more items to be copied and right click over the selection 2 Choose Use As New
100. or more items to be copied Right click over the selection and choose Use as New Choose one or more students to copy these items to Click Save to keep the new record otherwise click Cancel The original record will not be changed in any way Deleting a Memorization Item 1 Select an item by clicking on it or select multiple items using Shitt click or Ctri click 2 Right click over the selection and choose Delete from the menu 3 Click YES to delete click NO to retain the record s Deleted items cannot be retrieved Printing Memorization Items Memorization items can be included in the Daily Task List report or in the Memorization report See Reports The Memorization Right Click Menu You can right click over an individual item in the Memorization grid or over multiple items using Shift Click or Ctrl Click lt Add New allows you to add a new item to the grid Clicking this option will bring up the Assignment Add Edit window Edit c For single item selection This will open the Add Edit Assignment window for that item Edit c For multiple item selections This will bring up the Group Edit window Delete from which you may choose to globally edit fields for the selected Use As New items Delete allows you to permanently remove the selected item s from the Mark Complete database You will have an opportunity to confirm your selection before deletion occurs Deleted items cannot be retrieve
101. possible for of those completed assignments A letter grade is attributed based the Grading Scale you have selected See Grading Scales below 8 For Courses with weighting the Term grade is calculated by adding all the points earned for all completed assignments within an Activity for the Term This value is divided by the total points possible for all of those completed assignments This result is multiplied by the weight assigned to that Activity Then all weighted values are added together to get the final grade See Weighted Grading below for mare information Yearly Grades Yearly averages are taken by creating a simple average of the Term grades that have already been calculated Examples for Non weighted grading using Sum Earned Possible Assignments Term 1 Wath Algebra 1 Test 50 35 Algebra i Test 100 32 Math Algebra i Test 100 80 Mah Algebra i Test 100 78 Math Algebra 1 Homework 35 34 Math Algebra i Homework 10 g Wath Algebra 1 Homework 10 g Math Algebra i Homework 10 g Ma Algebra i Homework 10 10 f 135 t Mat Algebra i Homework 50 38 Math Algebra 1 Homework 25 24 Total 500 318 Term 1 Math Algebra 1 418 500 80 01 Assignments Term 2 Subject Course J Actviy Pis Poss Pis Eamed Math Algebra i Test 50 25 Wath Algebra 1 Test 100 55 Ma
102. report This creates a document that may be suitable for submission to your umbrella school school district or other reporting authority Goals t Report Options Page Options Enter a title for your report You can leave this field blank if you prefer Sets and Topics Click on Choose Goals The Choose Goals window will appear You may select any goals to include in the report lt Ifyou check the Goal Set name the entire goal set will be Included lt If you check the Area Discipline name all goals under that area discipline will be included If you check an individual goal that item will be included Figure 295 Goals List Report Options 251 to be included wil be highlighted in yellow Page Break Options None The report will just keep moving page to page as more room is needed Goal Set Each time a new goal set is reached a new page will be started Goal Set and Area Discipline new page will be started for each new Area Discipline encountered Goals Progress Other The Goals Progress report allows you to print out a list of goals your student is working on or has met to your satisfaction You can choose to include just those goals that are in progress complete or both In addition to the Goals themselves you can choose to include any notes you ve entered and the supporting Assignments Memorization Task andlor Reading Log items Goals Progress Report Op
103. s from the den database You will have an opportunity to confirm your selection before deletion occurs Deleted items cannot be retrieved Use As New wil copy the selected item s to the Reading Log of the student s you designate Mark Complete allows you to enter a checkmark in the Done box and a date of completion for one or more items at once Figure 203 Reading Log Mark Incomplete allows you to remove the checkmark and completion date Right Click Menu from all selected record s Print Form generates a Reading Log form with header information based on the Reading Log item selected You can print a generic Reading Log Form from the Reports tab of Homeschool Tracker Plus Mark Complete Mask Incomplete Print Fom Resources Resource is any ilem used as part of your curriculum It can be included in an assignment or it provide additional reference to a student or students Resources are created from Ihe items you enter into the Library section of the program See Library Anatomy ofa Resource The main information about a Resource is entered in the Library tile author etc The Resource window allows you to enter additional data to designate how the item will be used within your assignments When you open the Add Edit window of your Resource you will see the tile resource type author publisher ISBN Call Number Date Purchased Grade Level Item Notes and thumbnal of the original Library item
104. school days This allows you to mark more than one week at a time without including weekends Holiday Vacation Other days are not skipped Olek Present or Present Ye day 7 Enter the Total Hours for those days in the Hours and Minutes boxes provided Choose whether to overide anything thal akeady exists on erem these days in the calendar 9 Click OK to mark the calendars as noted Click Cancel or close the window to quit without making changes to Ihe Attendance Calendar g Sessions or Time Spent on the Attendance Calendar Homeschool Tracker Plus will automatically enter the Sessions or Time Spent values for all completed assignments for a given date The total will be displayed in parentheses after the word Present Marking Attendance Auto Attendance uses the existence of completed assignments to automatically mark a day as Present on the attendance calendar It uses the Date Completed field to determine which day to mark as Present When Auto Attendance is in use a day recorded as Present will automatically change to blankigray when all previously completed assignments for that day are marked as incomplete and or all completion dates for assignments on that day are changed to another date If there is a completed assignment on a date previously marked Absent the notation will change to Present If you choose to use the Auto Attendance feature
105. shift click or ctrl click to highlight the items you want to remove from the plan Right click over the selection and choose Delete from the context menu Click YES to complete the deletion Deleted items cannot be retrieved Deleting a Lesson Plan To delete an entire lesson plan you need to first delete all the items in the plan using the Deleting Multiple Items instructions above Then you need to delete the Lesson Plan Name from the Maintenance 1 Option t Follow the directions above to delete all the items from the Lesson Plan you want to remove Click on the Maintenance tab and then click on the Other tab Choose Lesson Plan Names from the Select Table to Edit drop down selector Right click over the Lesson Plan Name you wish to delete and choose Delete from the context menu Click YES to complete the deletion Deleted items cannot be retrieved neona Option 2 i Click on the Maintenance tab and then click on the Other tab 2 Choose Lesson Plan Names from the Select Table to Edit drop down selector 3 Right click over the Lesson Plan Name you wish to delete and choose Delete from the context menu 4 1 there are items in the Lesson Plan you wil see the Used By window 10 Double click on the View link to see the plan items Click the Check All button to select all the items in the Lesson Plan Click the Delete button in the lower right corner of the window to remove these items Type in YES in the confirm wind
106. special days V skip Schedules Hoktars V Ship absent Days V Skip Non School oars Figure 349 Reschedule Options Seta starting and ending date range This will begin the selection for which items you wish to move The Starting Date Due will default to the current date the Ending Date Due will default to the end of your active school year In addition to the date range you can further refine your selection of items to be moved using the Students Subjects Courses Activities and Resources filters Use these to select specific items in any one of the filter areas Choose to have the reschedule process skip scheduled Holiday Vacation Other days Absent days and or Non School days The default settings will cause these dates to be skipped during the Reschedule process and no assignments wil be placed on those days New starting date for first assignment Choose the date you want to begin moving items to This will be the new Date DUE for the first assignment moved The Reschedule process does not change the Date Given unless you are moving assignments into the past in which case the Date Given is changed as necessary so that the Date Due will never precede the Date Given As you make your selections the bottom of the window will display the number of assignments which will be included in the move Reschedule method Choose how you would like Homeschool Tracker Plus to perform the reschedule process Autom
107. tabs Creating a Transcript for Prior Years To create data from previous years prior to your using Homeschool Tracker Plus to be included in a Transcript you only need to create one completed and graded assignment for each subject course for each term the class was taken You can also follow these steps to enter summary grades for any year of homeschooling 1 Goto Maintenance Years Terms and create the first year needed Make it the Active School year for now 2 Create the Terms needed For a transcript you need at least 2 terms per year one assigned to 51 semester 1 and the other lo S2 semester 2 You may have more than two terms if desired Go to the Assignment grid Choose a date from the calendar which falls within one of the terms you created Click Add Enter information for an assignment for one subject course combination You can add subjects and courses as you go along by clicking the pencil icon button next to the respective fields and adding the info to Homeschool Tracker Plus as you go 7 Enter a value for points possible and points earned that will generate a percentage equivalent to the final grade attained in that subject course combination 8 Be sure to mark the item as complete and be sure that the Date Complete is equal to the Date Due 9 Repeat steps 3 through 8 as many times as necessary until you have one completed graded assignment for each subjecticourse per term for the year 10 Repeat step
108. the item click NO to cancel the delete process eum Archiving a Subject Figure 44 Used By Subjects If you will not be using a Subject for the Active School Year but that subject i tied to existing assignments or lesson plans or if the Subject may be used again at a future date you may wish to Archive rather than Delete the Subject Archiving allows you to retain all records associated with that Subject while removing the Subject from the related drop down lists Archiving a Subject effectively archives all Courses associated with that Subject You can reactivate the Subject at any time Click on the Maintenance tab and then on the Subjects Courses tab 2 Right click over the Subject you wish to move to the inactive list and choose Archive from the context menu The Archive box will be checked lt You can archive two or more items at the same time Use shift click or ctrl click to select the items you wish to archive Right click over the selection and chose Archive from the context menu 3 When you return to the Subject list or change the filler from Active to Archive Only the record will be removed from the Active view Un Archiving a Subject AL any time you can choose to move a Subject from the Archive lst back to the Active list 1 Click on the Maintenance tab and then on the Subjects Courses tab 2 Change the Filter drop down from Active to Archive Only or Both 3 Right click over the Subject you wish
109. this field will appear in the Assignments created from this Lesson Plan item Notes Optional The Notes field does not appear on any of the Student Assignment reports I s place to put information for you the teacher Information entered in this feld will appear in the Assignments crealed from this Lesson Plan item The Lesson Plan Grid Access the Lesson Plan grid by clicking on the Teacher tab and then the Lesson Plans tab Fle New Too Figure 84 Lesson Plan Grid Panel The Lesson Plan Control Panel The panel with icons and drop down lists can be displayed horizontally across the top of the grid or vertically on the left side of the grid You can set this preference in Tools Options General The control panel settings will be the same across the Student Assignment Teacher Lesson Plans and Teacher Weekly Planner grids Collapse Expand Icons ay Use the blue up down arrow icons collapse or expand all the groupings on this grid You can collapse expand individual groupings by clicking the buttons on the grouping headers Homeschool Tracker Plus will not retain your settings when you leave this screen pes Choose Columns and Reset Icons 4 Click the Choose Columns icon 2 Check the columns to include uncheck the columns to exclude Column selections will nat be visible for features which you have elected to disable in Tools Options Assignments Figure 66 3 Click Save to retain yo
110. time can be copied into your clipboard and pasted anywhere you like inlo Homeschool Tracker text field a Word document or anyplace else where you can paste text SS ean m p CA OEE 9 Text button will show exact measure of MERE rere tenentes 3 minutes 27 seconds Figure 81 Assignment Timer Copying Elapsed Time Click the COPY TEXT button A pop up window will show you what has been copied to your clipboard You can now use to paste that text anywhere you like When using the Count Up option the elapsed time and copied time will be the same When using the Count Down option the copied time will be the difference between the allotted time and the time remaining Starting the Timer from an Assignment You can start a Timer from the Assignment right click menu When you start the Timer in this way the tile bar of the Timer window will display the Student Subject Activity and Page Lesson Chapter of the selected assignment You can use shift click or ctrl click to select two or more assignments and then right click over the selection and choose Start Timer The Timer window title bar will show the information for the first assignment selected When you ve started a timer from one or more assignments and the click the Stop button the Update Assignment button will be enabled Clicking the Update Assignments button the elapsed time information will be past
111. to any column heading For full details please see the Using the Grids section Adding Weekly Planner Items There are two ways to bring up the Add Edit Lesson window Click Add button at the top of the Weekly Planner grid Right click in the grid and choose Add New See Anatomy of a Weekly Planner Item above for a description of each field Fill in each field as desired The only required fields are Student Subject Activity Page Lesson Chapter text options and Plan Days Click SAVE amp CLOSE to add the Weekly Planner Item to the grid The Page Lesson Chapter Text Options Supplemental video available on this topic There are two options for the Page Lesson Chapter PLC field in each of your items The Example field Page Lesson Chapter Text Options will show you what the PLC field in the first copied Same Page Lesson Chapter fr Each Copy item will look like Autodncrement Page Lesson Chapter Bemple Figure 129 Weekly Planner Page Lesson Text Options Same Page Lesson Chapter for each copy Whatever you enter in the text box will be in the Page Lesson Chapter field of each and every Assignment created from this item If you want the Page Lesson Chapter field to be blank select this option and leave the Text field blank Click OK to save your entry and continue with the Add Weekly Planner item process click Cancel to exit this window without saving your entry Figure 130 Weekl
112. to the Assignment grid as you are ready for it Lesson Plan is also great for those who like to see everything worked out for the year ahead of time The advantage of Lesson Plan to them is that it allows them to work out the whole year s worth of assignments without atlaching dates to anything In this way when life gets in the way of school or something takes longer to cover than expected nothing needs to be rescheduled because you have yet committed anything to a particular date Weekly Planner can still be used on its own for those who prefer it Even if you use Lesson Plan there are some things which may be better served by the Weekly Planner than the Lesson Plan For example in our house we tried to do something at least 3 times per week But we didn t really use a particular resource nor were these assignments following any real progression We chose to enter this in Weekly Planner as a Mon Wed Fri item and just book it each week as we went along Music and Safety are other things we booked through Weekly Planner They were not things we did every day but we wanted to make sure our non musical children had some appreciation for it and our former home state required that we cover Safely as a subject throughout the year By adding these items to the Weekly Planner we could easily keep track of the last time they were assigned And when we wanted to create assignments from these items all the info was there and ready fo
113. track where each assignment was given If you are not required to track this information you can simply leave the default Home location as is and ignore this field Dacre may Amm gt pw Wem xim gt tan Tne E Parts ees 2e Tre Sore 9 0 E mome V Mon Boorse Figure 55 Add Assignment window Page Lesson Chapter Optional 100 character limit In this field enter the actual work to be done Pages 6 10 Lesson 12 A Chapter 4 etc Homeschool Tracker Plus has a number of options for auto generating multiple assignments with incremented page lesson chapter information Topic Optional 100 character limit You may enter a brief description of the assignment basic facts covered etc 23 Order Optional 7 digit limit You may enter a number in this field to indicate the order in which assignments are to be completed on any given date Attachments Optional You may attach a reference to a document image or website to any assignment When an attachment exists an asterisk will appear in the field in grid view See Attachments Supplies Optional You may create a list of supplies needed to complete the assignment When supplies have been added an asterisk will appear in the field in grid view See Supplies Directions Optional Enter any directions you want the student to have when completing the assignment You may choose to include these direc
114. until pattern is exhausted will create exactly as many items as specified in the Page Lesson Chapter text options you have set the number of copies you selected using the Same Page Lesson Chapter option or as many items as necessary to complete the copy pattern you set using Auto Increment The 2nd selection Continue until end date is reached means that Tracker will make a copy for each student on each valid date between your start date and your end date even if that is less than the number specified using the Same Page Lesson Chapter or does not complete the Auto Increment pattern you have sel The 3rd option Spread Evenly between start and end date will use both the number of copies and the date range to create your items It will make the specified number of copies but will double up or spread them out to fit evenly between the start and end date you have specified Click Preview to see the pattern you ve created Use this opportunity to double check the assignments you re about to create You can group and or sort the grid to change the view of items Figure 73 Assignment Copy Repeat Over Date Range Preview Window You can deselect any item and prevent it from being added to the Assignment grid by unchecking the OK box Click the Submit button to send these items to the Assignment grid or click Cancel to exit without creating the assignments g Copy Over Date Range When Page Lesson Chapter
115. use the Used By window will appear Please refer to the Reclassily section for information Ifthe Activity is not in use you wil be asked are you sure Click YES to delete the item click NO to cancel the delete process Archiving a Chore Double click any row to view the selected items Cick the Reclaselly Al button te change all tems at the same bme view Table Figure 226 Chore Used By Window If you wil not be using a Chore for the Active School Year but that Chore has been used for one or more students in previous years or if the Chore may be used again at a future date you may wish to Archive rather than delete the Chore You can reactivate the Activity at any time Click on the Maintenance tab and then on the Other tab Choose Chores from the drop down list Right click over the Chore you wish to move to the inactive list Choose Archive from the context menu The Archive box wil be checked When you return to the Chore list or change the filler from Active to Archive Only the record will be removed from the Active view You can archive two or more items at the same time Use shift click or ctrl click to select the items you wish to archive Right click over the selection and chose Archive from the context menu Un Archiving a Chore At any time you can choose to move Chore from the Archive list back to the Active list 1 2 Click on the Maintenance tab and then on the Ot
116. website This requires open and available internet connection lt About Shows you the version of Homeschool Tracker Plus you re running t The Help File You can access the help by pressing the F1 key from anywhere in the program or by selecting Help Index from the menu bar Contents Contents list is sorted alphabetically and has one topic heading for each feature of the program Click on the plus sign next to a topic heading to expand the topic and read individual sections You also move through the topics by clicking the left and right arrow keys in the top right of the Help screen The entire topic will be one single file and can be printed as such using the print button at the top of the Help window Ifyou want to print out all topics at the same lime we recommend you download the User Manual from our web site hito www homeschooltracker com support aspx gem Contents Figure 361 Help File Contents Search You can use the search feature inside the Help File to list all topics containing the word or phrase you enter in the search box As with all text searches the usefulness of this search depends on the quality of the phrase you enter If you are too specific such as where am supposed to enter grades you may get no results If you are too general such as grade you may get results that have nothing to do with wha
117. where the selected Maintenance item is being used within the program Archiving Maintenance Items As you move from year to year or maybe even from semester to semester there will be items that you entered into Homeschool Tracker Plus that you may no longer need In order to preserve data integrity you are not permitted to delete items which are linked to Assignments Field Trips Courses Lesson Plan or Weekly Planner items When attempting to delete items the Used By window will indicate all linked items including those from previous school years This can make it difficult to easily find all the related items Archiving provides a solution to removing items no longer needed without compromising data integrity You may choose to archive Activities Assignment Locations Chores Courses Goals Grading Scales Journal Categories Lesson Plan Names Library items Resources Resource Locations Resource Types Students Subjects and or Weekly Planner items Archiving items accomplishes the following e your maintenance lists manageable lt Itremoves the items from the appropriate drop down lists Itretains the link between the archived items and the Assignment Course Field Trip Lesson Plan Resource and Weekly Planner items allowing you to continue to run reports at some time in the future It leaves you the option to unarchive the item for future access What does Archiving really mean Example 1 You have
118. will now appear in the Schedule drop down list field It will also appear in the Maintenance Other LP Schedule Names list and it will be available in all other Schedule name drop down lists co Adding an Entry to the Schedule Click on the Teacher tab and then the LP Schedules tab Choose a Schedule Narne from the drop down lis Click ADD or right click over the schedule area to bring up the Add Edit Schedule Hem window The Schedule field wil display the name of the schedule currently in view You can select a different Schedule J here if you wish 5 Click SET COLOR to choose a border color for this item A sample of the selected color appears to the right of the Sel Color button 6 Enter the details of your Lesson item Tu an ony ha one araci maton of Suscorndet Aoi one E Chomes Suet hed dow i pencil icon to add new Subject or to edit the Subject Choose a Course fom e drop down Ist or keep the Any Course default listing Click the pencil icon to add a new Course or to edit the Course displayed lt Specify an Activity or keep the Any Activity default listing 7 Choose to create a Standard or Custom Schedule by IL licking on the appropriate tab You may assign multiple items to the same days and times if you wish 8 Standard Schedule Figure 119 Add Edit LP Schedule
119. window See f 1 15 12 Window and Grid Display to continue Creating a two level increment A two level increment might be Lesson 1 A Lesson 1 i To create this type of increment we ll use the First Part and Second Part sections of the Page Lesson Chapter Text Options window Set the Number of Parts spinner to 2 3 Inthe First Part section we ll fll out the fields as we did for the one level increment i Lesson 1 C Lesson 2 A Lesson 2 8 etc Seon Part xe The A n Lesson 1A tasang tos This ime we l again choose to use numbers in the First Part Wel set he Leading Text to Lesson For fve lessons a we ll set the Start With field to 1 increment by 1 and set he End With eld lo S Now we l enter the 2nd part of the pattem For our example we want to create assignments tat display Lesson 1 A ele o we wil choose to use Letters For the Separator we l use the Dash Please note however that you can choose from the drop down ist to use a color comma dot or Space or you can choose the custom option to create your own separator or even use words in actor such as Section to indicate Lesson 1 section A Right now wel just use the Dash Inthe Start With enter the frst letter of he frst section A Well leave the increment at 1 Each of our lessons had 3 sections we end with C Again we can add Traling Text i needed The Show Ending Page Range has
120. window choose a date range The default date range is the Active School Year 3 Click the Students hyperlink and check the names for the students whose Attendance Calendar you wish to update 3 Click Recalculate Enna Date Completed 30 2000 g 5 Homeschool Tracker Plus will audit your database for completed assignments and insure that each date with a completed assignment is marked as present in the Attendance Calendar If you are using auto attendance and have set parameters for Present Ye day your days willbe Figure 161 Attendance Recalculate Present marked accordingly This will override any days marked absent that have a completed assignment on that date There is no regard given to non school days absent days or Holiday Vacation Other days The existence of an assignment with a completion date will cause that day to be marked as present on the Attendance Calendar View Assignments from the Attendance Calendar You can right click on any date in the Attendance calendar to view assignments on that date assignments shown will be in accordance with your Student drop down selection If you have selected All Students you will see the assignments for all students on that date If you have selected a particular student you will see the assignments for just that student 9 Click on the Student tab and then on the Attendance lab Chose All Students or any one parti
121. you can use this are to select just those Activities for your Course and when you go to add Assignments or Lesson Plan items for that Course the Activity drop down will only show those two options lt To create a limited list of Activities click on any activity and the click the right arrow gt You may use shift click or ctrl click to select multiple activities and then click the right arrow 3 Jena piena Daun Goer eh en Bagan Dag Figure 48 Specifying Activities for a Course Ifyou add an Activity in error you can click itin the Course Activity list and then on the left arrow to return it to the general Activity list Again you may use shift click or ctrl click to select multiple activities and then click the left arrow You can add a new Activity or Edit an existing one by clicking on the Add Edit Activity button Grading Options You can set different grading options for each Course you create This area is where youll determine whether to use letter grades pass fail which grading scale to use and whether or not to apply weighted grading to this course Scale Select a scale from the drop down list To create a new scale go to Maintenance Other Grading Scales Any course can have any grading scale that you choose The default selection is the Default Grading Scale For more information on Grading Scales please see the Grades Gradi
122. 122 LP SCHEDULE RIGHT CUCK MENU FIGURE 123 LP SCHEDULE NAME RIGHT CLICK MENU FIGURE 124 WEEKLY PLANNER ADD EDIT WINDOW FIGURE 125 WEEKLY PLANNER GRID PANEL FIGURE 126 COLLAPSE EXPAND ICONS FIGURE 127 CHoosE COLUMNS ICON FIGURE 128 RESET COLUMNS ICON 129 WEEKLY PLANNER Pace LESSON Text OPTIONS FIGURE 130 WEEKLY PLANNER SAME PLC Text FIGURE 131 WEEKLY PLANNER AUTO INCREMENT PLC 1 PART FIGURE 132 WEEKLY PLANNER AUTO INCREMENT PLC 2 PART FIGURE 133 WEEKLY PLANNER AUTO INCREMENT PLC 3 PART FIGURE 134 WEEKLY PLANNER PLC WINDOW DISPLAY 75 al a E E 85 as E E 228885 96 E E 100 103 104 105 106 106 107 107 109 109 110 112 112 112 113 113 114 114 116 117 119 FIGURE 135 WEEKLY PLANNER ENO OF PATTERN DISPLAY FIGURE 136 WEEKLY PLANNER PREVIOUS NEXT ICONS FIGURE 137 GROUP EDIT WEEKLY PLANNER WINDOW FIGURE 138 WEEKLY PLANNER CHOOSE STUDENTS WINDOW FIGURE 139 WEEKLY PLANNER CREATE ASSIGNMENTS WINDOW FIGURE 140 WEEKLY PLANNER CREATE ASSIGNMENTS PREVIEW WINDOW FIGURE 141 WEEKLY PLANNER VIEW ASSIGNMENTS WINDOW FIGURE 142 WEEKLY PLANNER RIGHT CUCK MENU FIGURE 143 ATTACHMENTS HYPERLINK FIGURE 144 ATTACHMENTS LIST WINDOW FIGURE 145 ADD ATTACHMENT WINDOW FIGURE 146 ATTACHMENT RIGHT CLICK MENU FIGURE 147 ATTACHMENT COPY MESSAGE FIGURE 148 SUPPLIES HYPERLINK FIGURE 149 SupPLY List WINDOW Figure 1
123. 17 Add Edit LP Schedule Name 3 Enter the Schedule name and click Save or click Cancel to exit without saving 4 Repeat as necessary These items wil now be available to you in the Schedule drop down list on the LP Schedule grid Option 2 1 Clickon the Teacher tab and then the LP Schedules tab Tab or click into the Schedule drop down list in the Schedule grid header area This will highlight the displayed Schedule name Type in your new Schedule name Press Tab Homeschool Tracker Plus will ask you if you wish to add the new item Click YES to accept the new Schedule Name click NO to decine If you click NO you will need to select an existing Schedule name or add a new one before Homeschool Tracker Plus will allow you to leave the field 7 If saved the new Schedule name will now appear in the Schedule drop down list field It will also appear in the Maintenance Other LP Schedule Names list and it will be available In all other Schedule name drop down lists Option 3 1 Click on the Teacher tab and then the LP Schedules tab 2 Click the button with the pencil icon to the right of the Schedule drop down field and choose Add New 105 IEEE Figure 118 LP Schedule Add New 3 femen Enter the name of the new Schedule name in the Activity Add Edit window Click Save to keep your changes click Cancel to exit without saving If saved the new Schedule name
124. 19 Collopse Expand Icons Choose Columns and Reset Icons The Drop Down Lists Calendar ANATOMY OF A JOURNAL ENTRY CREATING A JOURNAL CATEGORY Creating a New Category in the Maintenance Other Journal Categories Grid Creating a New Category in the Journal Entry window ADDING A JOURNAL ENTRY EDITING A JOURNAL ENTRY Editing a Student Journal Entry Editing a Teacher Journal Entry Previous Next Icons DELETING A JOURNAL ENTRY PRINTING JOURNAL ENTRIES JOURNAL RIGHT Cuck MENU THE IMPORT EXPORT TOOL IMPORTING A LESSON PLAN IMPORTING GOALS LIBRARY ITEMS OR HOUDAYS EXPORTING LESSON PLANS GOALS UBRARY ITEMS OR HOUDAYS REPORTS PREVIEW PANE OPTIONS The Preview Toolbar Secondary Toolbars GENERATING A REPORT Choosing a Report Setting Options Previewing a Report PDF PRINTERS amp E MAILNG REPORTS How do install POF Printer Driver How Do I Create a PDF file of a Report AGENDA Agenda Report Options ASSIGNMENT CALENDAR Assignment Colendar Options ASSIGNMENTS Assignment Report Options The Combined format of the Assignments report ATTENDANCE Attendance Report Options BORROWED ITEMS Due Borrowed Items Due Report Options Courses Courses Basic Report Options Courses Expanded Report Options DALY Task Lr Daily Task Lit Report Options DETAIL PROGRESS Detail Progress Report Options Fio Tas Feld Trip Report Options Fi TRP Form Field Trip Form Options Gons
125. 2 How do I SORT by more than one category 292 How do remove sorting 292 SELECTING A DIFFERENT ITEM IN A DROP DOWN LST 293 COLUMN ORDER AND SE 293 Keyboard shortcuts 294 ctrl click 295 Shift Click 295 MAINTENANCE LISTS The MAINTENANCE OTHER LISTS 295 SELECTING A UST 295 ADDING MAINTENANCE OTHER ITEMS 296 Tet EXCEPTIONS 296 Assignment Locations 296 Chores 297 Grading Scoles 297 Lesson Plan Nomes 297 EDITING MAINTENANCE OTHER ITEMS 298 DELETING MAINTENANCE OTHER ITEMS 298 MAINTENANCE OTHER RIGHT CLICK MENU 299 ARCHIVING MAINTENANCE ITEMS 300 Archiving items accomplishes the following 300 What does Archiving really mean 300 Archiving an Item 301 Archiving while Editing 301 Un archiving an 301 SPELL CHECK 301 To TURN ON THE SPELL CHECK FEATURE 301 To Use Speu CHECK 302 USED BY AND RECLASSIFY Tet USED BY FEATURE 304 Tet RECLASSIFY FEATURE 305 RESCHEDULING SETTING RESCHEDULE OPTIONS Make It Fit On or Before The Confirm Rescheduled Assignments Window RESCHEDULUNG FROM THE STUDENT ASSIGNMENT GRID TOPICS SECURITY ENABLING THE SECURITY FEATURE USING THE SECURITY FEATURES SECURITY LEVEL MASTER PASSWORD Setting the Master Password SECURITY LEVEL ALLOW STUDENT LOGIN Allowing Student Login Students who have access can Students who have access cannot Removing Student Login SECURITY LEVEL STUDENT PASSWORDS Setting Student Passwords SECURITY LEV
126. 2 The Assignment grid will open The usual fiters and the calendar will be disabled The filters will be set to match the Student Subject Course Activity selection you made in the Overview screen The note over the filter area reminds you of this Your column customization is retained 3 All completed assignments for the Term will be shown lt You can edit any one or all of the items lt You may choose to add an assignment for this or any other subject course activity combination You can delete any item in view 4 When you have finished viewing ediling the items click RETURN to go back to the Overview screen When you click on the Assignment tab again you ll see the normal view of that screen 593 Te HE Pace I F subiect Art TAAT oral Res GO TET Lr 200 000 Engh LANGA Curse 8 LITERAT Figure 241 Overview View Assignments RYDE mac pret Pot karte Figure 242 View Assignments Assignment Grid The Students view The All Students option is included in the Overview Student drop down list so that your drop down list selection doesn t change as you move from screen to screen However there is no way to display all the information for all students in one screen Therefore if you choose the All Students option in the Overview screen you will see a message stating th
127. 3 26 In our standard grading by Sum Earned Possible example above the Yearly Math grade came to 81 15 The most significant difference in weighted vs non weighted grades will appear when there are a large number of assignments in particular activity as well as more graded assignments overall Weighted Activities with no Completed Graded Assignments If an activity has a weight but no completed graded assignments within the grading period the overall grade for the Course will be skewed accordingly as the percentage of the grade represented for that Activity will be missing Here are three options to remedy this situation Option 1 Delete the Activity If you have found that you are not going to be using the missing activity at all for the Course simply edit the course to delete the activity and redistribute the weighting You can also change the weighting for that activity to zero rather than removing it Remember Changes you make to the weighting of a Course will affect all assignments attributed to that course even in past or future years Option 2 Enter One Completed Assignment If you need the activity for future grading periods or for other students taking the Course you can add one completed assignment for that activity with a points possible value of 1 and a points earned value of 1 This will also skew the grade slightly but in the student s favor This will give the activity its full weight in the overall
128. 4 Add Journal Category Window Creating a New Category in the Journal Entry window In the Journal Add Edit window click the pencil icon next to the Category drop down field Click Add New Type in the name of your new category and click SAVE The new category will appear in the drop down field Adding a Journal Entry Click on the Student or Teacher tab then on the Journal tab Click the Add button at the top of the Journal grid See The Anatomy of a Journal Entry above for a description of each field You can type into the general text field as much information as you like The text box allows for rich text formatting which means you can use bold underline and italics choose other fonts and even other font colors To change your text highlight it with the cursor then click the icon for the changes you want Your changes will be displayed in the text box and in the Journal report lt The Journal text box also has Spell Check capabilities You can read more about this in the Other Features Spell Check section of this User Manual Editing a Journal Entry You may edit any part of any Journal entry The date and field can be edited directly in the grid Editing a Student Journal Entry Click on the Student tab then on the Journal tab Choose a Student or All Students from the drop down list Choose a Category or All Categories from the drop down list Choose Dates click on a single date or click and dra
129. 5 146 148 149 149 150 151 152 152 152 153 153 155 156 157 158 160 160 160 160 161 161 162 162 FIGURE 181 LIBRARY EDIT THUMBNAIL WINDOW FIGURE 182 GROUP EDIT LIBRARY ITEM WINDOW FIGURE 183 CREATE RESOURCE FROM LIBRARY FIGURE 184 CREATE RESOURCE ITEM MULTIPLE SELECTIONS FIGURE 185 RESOURCE ITEMS CREATED FIGURE 186 RESOURCE ITEMS CREATED EXCEPTIONS FIGURE 187 CREATE READING Log ITEM FIGURE 188 CREATE MULTIPLE READING LOG ITEMS FROM LIBRARY FIGURE 189 LIBRARY RIGHT CLICK MENU FicuR 190 RESOURCE TYPE GRID PANEL FIGURE 191 RESOURCE LOCATION GRI PANEL FIGURE 192 RESOURCE TYPE amp RESOURCE LOCATION RIGHT CUCK MENU FIGURE 193 READING LoG ADD EDIT WINDOW FIGURE 194 READING LOG GRID PANEL FIGURE 195 COLLAPSE EXPAND ICONS FIGURE 196 CHOOSE COLUMNS ICON FIGURE 197 RESET COLUMNS ICON FIGURE 198 CREATE READING LOG ITEM WINDOW FIGURE 199 READING Los ADD TIME ENTRY WINDOW FIGURE 200 READING Loc ADD TIME FIGURE 201 GROUP EDIT READING LOG WINDOW FIGURE 202 READING LOG USE AS New WINDOW FIGURE 203 READING LOG RIGHT CUCX MENU FIGURE 204 Resource Aoo Eorr WINDOW FIGURE 205 RESOURCE GRID PANEL FIGURE 206 CoLLAPst ExPAND ICONS FIGURE 207 COLUMNS FIGURE 208 RESET COLUMNS ICON FIGURE 209 RESOURCE DROP DOWN ST PENCIL ICON FIGURE 210 CREATE RESOURCE ITEM WINDOW 211 GROUP EDIT Resource WINDOW FIGURE 212 RES
130. 50 ADD EDIT Supe Irew Winoow FIGURE 151 GRADING SCALES GRID PANEL FIGURE 152 GRADING SCALES DEFAULT GRADING SCALE FIGURE 153 GRADING SCALES NEW GRADING SCALE FIGURE 154 GRADING SCALES GRADING SCALE WINDOW FIGURE 155 GRADING ASSIGNING A GRADING SCALE TO A COURSE FIGURE 156 TURNING WEIGHTED GRADING ON FOR A COURSE FIGURE 157 ATTENDANCE ALL STUDENTS VIEW FIGURE 158 ATTENDANCE MANUAL HOURS ENTRY FIGURE 159 ATTENDANCE MANUALLY MARKING PRESENT FIGURE 160 ATTENDANCE ACTIVATE RECALCULATE PRESENT FIGURE 161 ATTENDANCE RECALCULATE PRESENT FIGURE 162 ATTENDANCE VIEW ASSIGNMENTS FicuRe 163 Fiep Taip ADo EDIT WINDOW FicuRe 164 FieLD GRID PANEL 165 Couapse Expano Icons FicuRe 166 Choose COLUMNS Icon FIGURE 167 RESET COLUMNS ICON FIGURE 168 FIELD TRIP CHOOSE STUDENTS Ficure 169 Tu Eorr Winoow 170 GROUP EDIT Fio TRIPS WINDOW FIGURE 171 FELD RIGHT CLICK MENU FIGURE 172 Laman Aob Eorr WINDOW FIGURE 173 LIBRARY GRID PANEL Figure 174 Couapst ExoaNo Icons FIGURE 175 COLUMNS FIGURE 176 RESET COLUMNS ICON FIGURE 177 ISBN DOWNLOAD ENTRY WINDOW FIGURE 178 ISBN UNABLE TO CONNECT MESSAGE FIGURE 179 ISBN No MATCHES FOUND MESSAGE FIGURE 180 ISBN CONFIRM FIELDS TO UPDATE 119 120 ain an 122 123 124 125 127 127 127 128 128 130 130 130 137 137 138 139 140 140 14
131. 6 Each of our lessons had 3 sections so we end with 3 7 To complete our settings we ll again choose to use Numbers Our separator of choice is a dot and welll start with 1 increment by 1 and end with 2 3 Again we can add Trailing Text if needed 9 The Show Ending Page Range has no effect on our choice this time as we have incremented by 1 The Show Ending Page Range option only affects the range of the last part in use in this case the second part 10 The Example window at the bottom of the copy options window shows you what the Page Lesson Chapter field wil look like for the first assignment created 11 Press OK to set the pattern or Cancel to exit the copy window See Completing the Repeat Over Date Range Process to continue Completing the Copy Repeat Over Date Range Process d Now that you have set your Page Lesson Chapter Text Options the right hand side of the Copy window will be enabled Day options 2 By default Homeschool Tracker Plus wil skip over Vi sched kane scheduled holidays absent days and non school days Sto absent ys but you have the option of changing these selections by Wishes thes Dare unchecking the appropriate box TERRE 3 Establish a day of the week pattern for the new Gu wer FF assignments you are creating With the Selected Days option you can choose the days of the week where your copied assignments will Pete options D
132. ACHER GOALS GRID PANEL FIGURE 244 COLLAPSE EXPAND ICONS FIGURE 245 CHOOSE COLUMNS ICON FIGURE 246 RESET COLUMNS ICON FIGURE 247 ADD WINDOW FIGURE 248 EDIT GOAL WINDOW Ficure 249 GROUP EDIT GOALS FIGURE 250 TEACHER GOALS RIGHT CUCK MENU FIGURE 251 STUDENT GOALS PROGRESS GRID PANEL 252 Couapse Expano Icons FicuR 253 CHoose COLUMNS ICON FIGURE 254 RESET COLUMNS ICON FIGURE 255 GROUP EDIT GOAL STATUS WINDOW FIGURE 256 GOALS PROGRESS RIGHT CLICK MENU FIGURE 257 STUDENT JOURNAL GRID FIGURE 258 TEACHER JOURNAL GRID PANEL 259 Couapse Expano Icons FicuR 260 CHoose Conus Icon FIGURE 261 RESET COLUMNS ICON FIGURE 262 STUDENT JOURNAL ENTRY WINDOW FIGURE 263 TEACHER JOURNAL ENTRY WINDOW FIGURE 264 ADD JOURNAL CATEGORY WINDOW FIGURE 265 JOURNAL Prev Next Icons FIGURE 266 JOURNAL RIGHT CUCK MENU Ficune 267 IMPORT EXPORT Toot FIGURE 268 CHOOSE Fe TO IMPORT FIGURE 269 CHOOSE ITEMS TO IMPORT FIGURE 270 IMPORT LESSON PLAN PLAN TAB FIGURE 271 IMPORT LESSON PLAN SUBJECTS COURSES FIGURE 272 IMPORTING GOALS LIBRARY ITEMS OR HOLIDAYS f 198 199 199 200 200 200 202 202 203 204 206 206 207 208 209 209 210 210 210 210 212 213 213 216 216 216 216 216 218 219 20 20 21 21 221 21 22 22 24 24 25 25 26 27 227 229 t 1 s2 FIGURE 273 EXPORTING rues Ficune 274 RePoRTs List
133. ADD EDIT WINDOW Figure 339 Chone Winoow FIGURE 340 LESSON PLAN NAME ADD EDIT WINDOW FIGURE 341 MAINTENANCE RIGHT CLICK MENU FIGURE 342 SPELL CHECK OPTION FIGURE 343 SPELL CHECKIN ACTION FIGURE 344 Useo By Winow Ficunz 345 Uso BY RECLASSFY SELECTIONS FIGURE 346 RECLASSIFY CONFIRMATION WINDOW FIGURE 347 RECLASSIFY WINDOW FIGURE 348 RECLASSIFY CONFIRMATION WINDOW FIGURE 349 RescHeDULE OPTIONS FIGURE 350 CONFIRM RESCHEDULED ASSIGNMENTS WINDOW FIGURE 351 SECURITY OPTIONS Ficune 352 Sccunr Loc IN FIGURE 353 CHANGE MASTER PASSWORD FIGURE 354 EDIT SECURITY Patvusaes FIGURE 355 Aurosack OPTION SETTINGS 356 Fue MENU Ficune 357 New Menu Ficune 358 Toots Menu FIGURE 359 DATABASE MENU Ficunt 360 HEP Menu 361 Fite Contents FIGURE 362 HEL Fite SEARCH Fioure 363 Hew Fite FAVORITES 334 am am 281 282 286 287 288 290 290 291 291 291 292 293 293 293 294 294 296 296 297 297 299 302 303 304 305 305 306 306 307 309 311 312 312 313 317 318 319 319 320 320 321 322 323
134. Dro You can choose to display ten different types of items on the Agenda Each item displays in LL nee Menton tens a different color for easier identification To make your selections click the Choose Agenda ems link and check those things you emote ads ag tere wish to see Once you ve made your selections Ine dates on the monthly calendar will be bolded for those dates which contain one more of the types of items selected I oma you are using the Student Colors option each item displayed in the time portion of the Day School Days and rigure 232 Choose Agenda Items Window Week formats wil show the student s assigned color on the let side of the item IT dde Nei he Daya Teme E rele emotion tors Ig douma tom IF Carlito Raadna Log hone 23 Assignments Memorization tasks and Reading Log items that span more than one day will be displayed in the top section of the date area from the date given through the date due without specific start end times will also appear in the top section of the date area View Multiple Students Use the Student drop down list to select a specific student or the all students view To view two or but less than all students at a time you can check the View Multiple Students box which causes the Student fiter to appear p 7 Ves Mite drt Vew Mite dert Click the Students link and choose the
135. E STARTING THE TIMER FROM AN ASSIGNMENT THE ORDER FIELD LESSON PLANS ANATOMY OF A LESSON PLAN ITEM Tet LESSON PLAN GRID The Lesson Plan Control Panel Collopse Expand Icons Choose Columns and Reset Icons The Drop Down Lists The Search Field The Used and On Columns Grouping and Sorting Sequence NUMBERS CHEATING A LESSON PLAN The Lesson Plan Name Adding Lesson Plon Name Adding Lesson Plon Item EDITING LESSON PLAN ITEMS Editing in the Grid 56 57 Brel 60 61 62 63 63 65 65 66 66 66 66 67 67 Editing a Single Lesson Plan Item Previous Next Buttons Group Edit CREATING MULTIPLE LESSON PLAN ITEMS Creating Lesson Plan Items with the Copy Function Same Page Lesson Chapter for Each Copy Auto Increment Page Lesson Chapter Creating 1 Level increment Creating 2 Level Increment Creating 3 Level Auto Increment Setting Sequence Number and Completing Copy Process Duplicating a Single Lesson Plan Item Lesson Plans with Tests at Regular Intervals Copy from Assignments Won WITH A LESSON PLAN Copying to a New Plan Moving to a New Plon Resetting Used status CHANGING SEQUENCE NUMBERS Increase Sequence Numbers Decrease Sequence Numbers Reset Sequence Numbers Make it fit SUBMITTING LESSON PLAN ITEMS TO THE ASSIGNMENT GRID Method 1 Use LP Schedules Method 2 Use the following days and times The Preview Window LESSON PLAN ITEMS USING or DAYS FIELD
136. EL CHANGE ANY ASSIGNMENT FIELD SECURITY LEVEL CHANGE DATES SECURITY LEVEL CHANGE POINTS SECURITY LEVEL CHANGE TIME SPENT SESSIONS SECURITY LEVEL CHANGE LIBRARY ITEMS MORE INFORMATION ABOUT YOUR DATABASE RESTORING YOUR DATABASE The Process STARTING OVER WITH A FRESH DATABASE POINTING To YOUR DATABASE SHARING YOUR DATABASE ACROSS A NETWORK ZIPPING COMPRESSING YOUR DATABASE How do Zip my Database REINSTALLING HOMESCHOOL TRACKER PLUS AUTOMATIC BACKUPS To change the number of automatic backup copies Identifying Autoback Files To Restore Your Database Using an Autoback File THE HOMESCHOOL TRACKER PLUS MENU BAR Fue Menu New Menu Toots Menu DATABASE Menu Menu 307 307 309 309 310 310 an an 312 312 313 313 313 313 313 314 314 m 314 314 314 314 as 315 315 315 316 316 316 316 317 317 317 317 318 318 319 319 320 320 THE HELP FILE Contents Sennen Favores How DO Ger ADDITIONAL ASSISTANCE GLOSSARY OF HOMESCHOOL TRACKER TERMS INDEX OF FIGURES m 321 321 322 323 324 327 Introduction Congratulations You ve taken an important first step to make your homeschool record keeping easier Homeschool Tracker Plus is planning and organizing software designed to adapt to your particular homeschooling style in a simple yet sophisticated way You can use Homeschool Tracker Plus to assist in meeting
137. Edit window Make your changes and click the Save button Editing in the Grid i A number of fields can be edited directly in the grid These include Sequence Order Custom Topic Page Lesson Chapter Points Possible Time Spent Sessions Directions Notes Used On and Days Please note The On Date Field can only be edited in the grid if there is already a date showing To edit any of these fields click once in the field Make your changes 4 Tokeep your changes click the SAVE button in the Lesson Plan grid filter panel or click on another in the grid 5 To cancel your changes press the escape key on your keyboard before moving away from the field Editing Single Lesson Plan Item You can open the Edit window for any Lesson Plan to edit part of the information it contains 1 Double click on the item you wish to edit or right click over the item and select Edit from the context menu 2 any changes you wish This will change this Lesson Plan only It will not change assignments that have already been created from this Lesson Plan entry 3 Click Save amp Close to apply your changes click Cancel to exit without saving Previous Next Buttons If you ve elected to open the Edit window to make changes to a Lesson Plan item you can move to the next or previous item displayed in the grid using the Previous and Next icons in the top right of the window Pre
138. Figure 208 F Columns Icon The Drop Down Lists Filler Choose whether to view Active lems Archived items or Both The Search field You can search among your Resources Search text will compare against the Tille Notes Author and Publisher fields Hidden fields will be included in the search parameters Grouping and Sorting Just as in the Assignment grid you may choose to group and sort the displayed information in the Library grid according to any column heading For full details please see the Using the Grids section Adding a Resource You can open the Add Edit Resource window in three ways From Maintenance Resources screen click Add te From anywhere in Homeschool Tracker Plus press F12 Click on New in the menu bar then Resource See The Anatomy of a Resource above for a description of each field Ad Resource in an Assignment Lesson Plan or Weekly Planner Item You can add a new Resource as you are entering an Assignment Lesson Plan Schedule or Weekly Planner item Option f 1 Inthe Assignment Lesson Plan or Weekly Planner Add window click the pencil icon to the right of the Resource field and choose Add New form the menu This will open the Library Add Edit window for the visible item m EI F Res m c Pagelesnep 00000000 Sessions Figure 209 Resource drop down list pencil icon 2 Enter the i
139. For a Subject of Language Arts your Courses might be Reading Composition Spelling Literature etc Courses can be linked to Assignments Field Trips Lesson Plan Schedule and Weekly Planner items Courses are required for Weighted Grading and creating Transcripts Subjects Courses Reading Composition Spelling Literature Figure 37 Subjects and Courses Depending on your curriculum and how you organize your homeschool not every student will take every Course You may use some courses one year and then choose to Archive them until a younger child is ready for them You also might choose not to use Courses at all until your children are at a junior or senior high level It is entirely up to you For each of your Courses you can assign Credit Units enter a course description assign specific Activities with or without Weighted Grading select a grading scale and whether you want to assign letter grades pass fail or just percentage designations to graded assignments within the course Finally you choose to limit the students associated with the Course Activities are brief descriptions of the actual type of work to be done in an assignment class discussion workbook test etc You may create as many Activities as you d like If you prefer you can limit your Activity list to just one item called school work or whatever else you choose and delete all other entries If you wish to use weighted g
140. Has Time box or simply edit the exiting start end times for the selected field trips Remember whatever choices you make here will be assigned to all the items you have highlighted 9 Click Save to keep your changes click Cancel to exit without saving acer Figure 170 Group Edit Field Trips Window The Field Trip and Assignment Group Edit When you are in the Assignment grid view you can select a group of Assignments and edit certain fields lor the entire group at once If you happen to include a Field Trip in your selection none of the changes you make in the Group Edit window will be applied to the Field Trip Duplicating a Field Trip 1 Select the you wish to copy 2 Right click over the item and choose Use As New 8 Click OK on the Use as New message A duplicate of the original item will appear in an Add Edit Lesson window 4 Change any information as needed 5 Click Save to add the item to select students and add Ihe item s to the Field Trip grid click Cancel to exit without saving Marking a Field Trip as Complete Homeschool Tracker Plus will automatically mark your Field Trips as complete on the day alter the date of the trip No action is required on your part Deleting a Field Trip Field trips can be deleted from any of the three views in which they appear 3 Deleting from the Field Trip grid 1 Right click on any single entry or use shift click or ctrl clic
141. Homeschool zezZTracker Plus A TGHomeSoft User Manual Version 6 2 Created and distributed by TGHomeSoft www homeschooliracker com For additional help email us at support homeschooltracker com Copyright c 2003 2011 TGHomeSoft LLC Table of Contents INTRODUCTION GETTING STARTED NAVIGATING THE PROGRAM MENU Tas STUDENT Tass Agendo Assignments Attendance Field Trips Goals Progress Journal Memorization Overview Reading Log TEACHER Tass Goals Journal Lesson Plans LP Schedules Weekly Planner MAINTENANCE Taas Library Resources School info Students Subjects Courses Years Terms other Reports SETTING UP YOUR SCHOO NANG Your HOMESCHOOL DesiciTiNG School Days E CREATE A SCHOOL YEAR AND TERMS ADDING A SCHOOL YEAR USING THE SCHOOL YEAR CALCULATOR 10 EDITING A SCHOOL YEAR USING THE SCHOOL YEAR CALCULATOR 14 EDITING A SCHOOL YEAR MANUALLY 14 ADDINGATERM MANUALLY 15 EDITING A TERM MANUALLY 15 DELETING A SCHOOL YEAR 15 DELETING A TERM 15 DESIGNATING THE ACTIVE SCHOOL YEAR 16 Using the Tools Menu 16 Using the Maintenance Area 16 STUDENTS ADDING A STUDENT 16 EDITING A STUDENT 17 ENTERING GRADE LEVELS 18 ENTERING SCHOOLS ATTENDED 19 ENTERING ACTIVITIES AND ACHIEVEMENTS 19 ADDING TIME TO ACTIVITES AND ACHIEVEMENTS 20 ENTERING STANDARDUED Tests 20 DELETING THE DEFAULT STUDENT 21 ARCHING A STUDENT 21 UN ARCHMING
142. OURCE RIGHT CLICK MENU FIGURE 213 LIBRARY ITEM MARK AS BORROWED FIGURE 214 TOOLS BORROWED ITEMS DUE 215 BORROWED ITEMS DUE WINDOW FIGURE 216 MEMORIZATION ADD EDIT WINDOW FIGURE 217 MEMORIZATION GRID PANEL Figure 218 Couapse Exoano Icons Ficure 219 Choose COLUMNS ICON FIGURE 220 RESET COLUMNS ICON FIGURE 221 MEMORIZATION CHOOSE STUDENTS WINDOW FIGURE 222 GROUP EDIT MEMORIZATION ITEMS FIGURE 223 MEMORIZATION RIGHT CUCK MENU FIGURE 224 MAINTENANCE OTHER CHORES GRID PANEL Ficue 225 ADD EDIT Cone Winoow FIGURE 226 CHORE USED Bv WINDOW f o9 163 164 165 166 166 167 167 168 169 n n n 172 173 173 173 173 176 17 17 178 179 180 181 182 182 182 182 183 184 185 187 188 190 190 191 192 192 192 192 193 194 195 196 196 197 FIGURE 227 RIGHT CLICK FIGURE 228 ITEMS VIEWABLE IN STUDENT AGENDA FIGURE 229 AGENDA GRID PANEL FIGURE 230 AGENDA CALENDAR 1 FIGURE 231 AGENDA CALENDAR 2 FIGURE 232 CHOOSE AGENDA WINDOW FIGURE 233 ADD EDIT APPOINTMENT Ficune 234 ADD EDIT Cone Winoow FIGURE 235 GROUP EDIT APPOINTMENT CHORE FIGURE 236 Cory CALENDAR ITEM FIGURE 237 AGENDA RIGHT CLICK MENU FIGURE 238 STUDENT OVERVIEW GRID PANEL FIGURE 239 CoLLaPst ExPAND ICONS FIGURE 240 OVERVIEW EXPLAINED FIGURE 241 OVERVIEW VIEW ASSIGNMENTS FIGURE 242 VIEW ASSIGNMENTS ASSIGNMENT GRI FIGURE 243 TE
143. Original Date Due or to Mark with the Following Date f you choose the second option a calendar will appear and you can click on the date you want to use as the completion date 4 Click OK to mark the assignment complete To mark multiple assignments as complete in one process Use the Assignment grid filters or the Custom Filler to display the items you wish to mark Use Shift click or Ctri click to select the items you wish to mark Right click over the selection and choose Mark as Complete from the context menu Choose whether to Mark all Items with Original Date Due or to Mark with the Following Date If you choose the second option a calendar will appear and you can click on the date you want to use as the completion date for all the selected items 5 Click OK to mark the selected assignments complete 5 Mark as Incomplete It you mark an assignment as incomplete the grade time spent sessions topic and other information will longer be available in the various Tracker reports requiring Completed Assignments To mark a single assignment as incomplete Option 1 1 Double click on the assignment 2 Uncheck the Completed box The Date Completed will be removed 3 Click the Save amp Close button or click the Save button and then the Previous or Next icon to move to the next item to be marked Option 2 4 Inthe Assignment grid view click in the DONE box to remove the checkmark 2 Cli
144. Plan Names you can whe choose the plan you want to view from the Plan drop down lst ES ij stra tate 3 Click Add or press F10 to open the AddEdit Lesson window cia ws tncereusantone or cick on an existing item E 4 Ifyou entera Topic here it wil be copied to items created from this entry If your Topic wil vary per lesson leave this field blank You will be able to edit the Topic field directly in 23 Figure 92 Lesson Plan Copy ltem Window the Plan grid or via the Group Edit feature Leave the Sequence Number field blank 6 If you enter Directions and or Notes they wil be copied to all items created from this entry You will be able to edit these fields directly in the Plan grid Click COPY The Copy Lesson Plan window will appear Choose what type of copies you wish to make 9 Same Page Lesson Chapter for this option you can have the same text or no text all appear in the Page Lesson Chapter field of each copy created 10 Auto Increment Page Lesson Chapter using this option allows you to have Tracker automatically increase the Page Lesson or Chapter information for each successive copy created You create a 1 level Pages 3 5 Pages 6 8 elc 2 level Lesson 1 Part A Lesson 1 B etc or 3 level Chapter 1 Section 1 1 Chapter 1 Section 1 2 etc increment Same Page Lesson Chapter for Each Copy 1 When you select this option you will be show
145. Plan or Weekly Planner item will be permanently and irretrievably removed from the Resource list Archiving Resources 1 To view the Resource grid click on the Maintenance tab and then the Resources tab 2 Click on a single ilem or use Shift Click or Ctr Click to select the items you wish to archive 3 Right click over the selection 4 Choose Archive from the menu 5 Acheckmark will appear in the Archive box for each item selected 6 The items wil not be moved from the Active fitered view until you change the filter or leave the Resource grid and return to it Un Archiving Resources To view the Resource grid click on the Maintenance tab and then the Resources tab Change the Resource filler to Archive Only or Both Click on a single item or use Shift Click or Ctri Click to select the items you wish to archive Right click over the selection Choose Unarchive from the menu The checkmark will be removed from the Archive box for each item selected The items will not be moved to the Active fitered view until you change the filter or leave the Resource grid and return to it Printing Resources You can print any or of the Resources used by your students See Reports The Resource Right Click Menu You can right click over a single item or over multiple items using Shift Click or Ctri Click Ada New New allows you to add a new item to the grid Edit Uses New o For single ite
146. RIGHT CLICK MENU Activity GRID PANEL Activity Winoow Activity RIGHT CLICK MENU ASSIGNMENT WINDOW ASSIGNMENT GRID PANEL Couapse Expann cons Choose COLUMNS con Reser COLUMNS Icon ASSIGNMENTS CUSTOM FILTER OPTIONS ASSIGNMENTS CUSTOM FILTER EFFECTS ASSIGNMENTS Prev Next ICONS GROUP EDIT ASSIGNMENTS RECALCULATE TIME SPENT ASSIGNMENT SINGLE COPY ASSIGNMENT COPY PREVIEW ASSIGNMENT COPY REPEAT OVER DATE RANGE ASSIGNMENT COPY AUTO INCREMENT PART ASSIGNMENT COPY AUTO INCREMENT 2 PART ASSIGNMENT COPY AUTO INCREMENT 3 PART ASSIGNMENT COPY REPEAT OVER DATE RANGE DAY AND DATE OPTIONS ASSIGNMENT COPY REPEAT OVER DATE RANGE PREVIEW WINDOW ASSIGNMENT Ust AS NEW ASSIGNMENT COPY TO LESSON PLAN ASSIGNMENT RIGHT CLICK MENU ASSIGNMENT TIMER ASSIGNMENT TIMER SHOWING ASSIGNMENT DETAILS ASSIGNMENT TIMER COUNTING UP ASSIGNMENT TIMER COUNTING Down ASSIGNMENT TIMER COPYING ELAPSED TIME ASSIGNMENT TIMER MULTIPLE ASSIGNMENTS Abb Eorr LESSON Pran LESSON PLAN GRID PANEL Couapse Expann Icons CHOOSE COLUMNS Reser COLUMNS Icon LESSON PLAN NAMES MAINTENANCE 33 33 as 37 39 al 42 a2 45 46 48 50 50 52 52 55 56 56 58 59 E 62 Fssssgres n 74 76 76 76 76 78 FIGURE 89 Abo LESSON PLAN NAME Figure 90 EDIT Lesson PLAN PREVIOUSNEXT BUTTONS FIGURE 91 GROUP EDIT Lesson PLAN ITEMS WINDOW FIGURE
147. Reading Log items came from lt to whom you ve loaned your Resources or Reading Log items where the item is located in your home library The Homeschool Tracker Plus default database contains a single Resource Location of Library You may edit this name to one that meets your needs and or add additional Resource Locations as needed For full directions on adding editing deleting and archiving Resource Locations please refer to the Maintenance Info section of this User Manual The Resource Type Grid Access the Resource Type grid by clicking on the Maintenance tab then the Other tab and then selecting Resource Types from the Select Table drop down list f 17 Figure 190 Resource Type Grid Panel The Drop Down Lists Select Table to Edit This allows you to select which Maintenance grid you wish to view Filter Choose whether to view Active items Archived items or Both The Resource Locations Grid Access the Resource Locations grid by clicking on the Maintenance tab then the Other tab and then selecting Resource Locations from the Select Table drop down list Figure 191 Resource Location Grid Panel The Drop Down Lists Select Table to Edit This allows you to select which Maintenance grid you wish to view Filter Choose whether to view Active tems Archived items or Both Resource Type amp Location Right click Menu You can right click over an individual i
148. Remind Me field and edit the default number of days if you wish Continue to add or edit the item Click SAVE Enabling the Borrowed Items Due Reminder 1 Click on Tools and the Options or press 2 Click the Notifications tab 3 Check the box to Show list of library items due every time you start the program 4 Click Save to keep your changes 09 Creating the Borrowed Items Due List 1 Click Tools in the menu 2 Click Borrowed Items Due 3 The list will appear on your screen EEE Options A Security School Vear Calculator 212009 Zalo Bke MA 1835 Recalculate Time Spent Rese A Gide Suite Schoot vear gt Figure 214 Tools Borrowed Items Due Figure 215 Borrowed Items Due Window 4 Each time you generate the list it will be created based on today s date the number of days you asked to be reminded in advance and the Date Due of your Reading Log and Resource items 5 You can print the list from this window by clicking the Print button Working with the Borrowed Items Due List You may double click on any item in the list to open the Edit window for that item 2 Ifyou edit the Date Due so that it no longer meets the criteria of the list it will no longer appear on the list after you save your changes 3 You can dismiss items from the list as they are returned 4 Use shift click or ctrl click to
149. S icon 2 Check the columns to include uncheck the columns to exclude Column selections will not be visible for features which you have elected to disable in Tools Options Assignments Figure 253 3 Click Save to retain your selections click Cancel to exit without changing your column view 4 Things lo remember You can change your selections at any time Reset Excluding a column from view does not remove the data stored in that feld Columns leon You can reset columns column widths and column order to their original settings by click the RESET icon in the Assignment Grid header 2 The Drop Down Lists Student Choose to view items for All Students or select a specific student Filter Choose whether to view All items Completed items or In Progress items The Search field Use the Search field to quickly find the Goal s you are looking for Search text will compare against the Set Area Discipline and Goal fields Hidden fields will be included in the search parameters Grouping and Sorting Just as in the Assignment grid you may choose to group and sort the displayed information in the Goals Progress grid according to any column heading See 217 Using the Grids Adding Goals into the Goals Progress Grid Goals will appear in the Student Goals Progress grid as you attach them to Assignments Field Trips Memorization Tasks or Reading Log items in the Active School Year
150. SBN database will include numerical Call Number even for works of fiction Cost Optional The amount you paid for the book Purchased Optional Enter the date purchased Grade Level Optional 10 character limit Reading Level of the book or the grade level the child was when the book was read Pages Optional The number of pages in the book Location Optional The location of the book in your house If you have an extensive library you may find it helpful to track where the book is stored when it s not in use You can create a list of locations in Maintenance Other Resource Locations Borrowed Optional Track which items have been borrowed You may also track where they were borrowed from and when they are due to be returned Set the reminder if you want this item to appear in the Borrowed Items Due list a certain number of days before its return date Use the Resource Location list to create entries for Borrowed From Loaned Out Optional You can track which of your items have been loaned out to others You also track who borrowed the item and when Use the Resource Location list to create entries for Loaned Thumbnail Optional an image file of the Resource item If you use the ISBN entry process the image be imported from there If there is no image available you can designate your own image file if you wish Notes Optlonal This is an unlimited free text entry
151. Seq 1 item Lesson 1 has a Date Given of 9 7 and a Date Due of 9 10 signifying four days to work on the assignment Monday Tuesday Wednesday and Thursday which is equal to the of Days value that was entered The Seq 2 Lesson 2 has a Date Given of 9 11 which is the next school day available after the Date Due of the previous item The Date Due for Lesson 2 is Monday 9 14 because it was to be 2 day assignment and Saturday and Sunday are not school days in our example The Seq 3 item Lesson 3 has a Date Given and Date Due of 9 15 The Date Given is determined by the Date Due of the previous item which was 9 14 and the Date Due is the same as the Date Given because the original Lesson Plan item was set up as a 1 day item lt Finally the Seq 4 item Lesson 4 has a Date Given and Date Due of 9 16 because it follows the Seq 3 item and was also set up as a 1 day task Deleting Lesson Plans and Their Contents Deletingan Item from a Lesson Plan Click on the Teacher tab and then click the Lesson Plans tab Choose a Lesson Plan from the Plan drop down seleclor Right click over any single Lesson Plan item you wish to remove Choose Delete from the context menu Click YES to complete the deletion Deleted items cannot be retrieved Deleting Multiple Items from a Lesson Plan Click on the Teacher tab and then click the Lesson Plans tab Choose a Lesson Plan from the Plan drop down selector Use
152. The Goals will be assigned to the appropriate student and be classified as In Progress Goals linked to Assignments and Field trips will appear if the Assignment or Field Trip is part of the Active School year Goals like to Memorization or Reading Log items will appear if the Memorization or Reading Log has Start Due or Completed date that falls within the Active School year or if there are no dates specified or any of the date fields of those items Editing Goals into the Goals Progress Grid Once the Goal appears in this grid you can edit the item or group edit two or more entries to mark them as completed with or without a date or to add Notes about your Student s progress Editing a Single Item Click on the Student tab and then the Goals Progress tab Right click over any item and choose Edit 8 Change the details of the item as needed adding notes changing status from In Progress to completed and adding a completion date if you wish 4 Click Save to keep your changes Group Edit Click on the Student tab and then the Goals Progress tab 2 Use shift click or ctrl click to select the items you wish to edit 3 Right click over the selection and choose Edit to open the Group Edit window Figure 255 Group Edit Goal Status Window 4 Make the changes needed 5 Click Save to keep your changes click Cancel to exit without saving 6 Any changes you make will be applied to all selected items
153. The Student Goals Progress Grid Journal You or your student can use this feature to make any entries you like Each journal entry will have a date student category and tile Journal entries can be viewed by student date and or category See Journal You may use the Memorization grid to track anything your student is to memorize such as Bible verses spelling or vocabulary lists poems etc See Memorization tems Overview The Overview screen gives you a snapshot of how your student is progressing in each subjecticourse for any given term This information is automatically generated based on assignments that have been marked as completed within the term See Overview Reading Log The Reading Log is the area where you can list those books or other materials your child reads outside of the assigned curriculum generally library books and such You can view the log for one student or for all students See Reading Loa Teacher Tabs Figure 4 Teacher Tabs You can disable Teacher tabs for program features you wil not be using Goals Creating Goals allows you to outline what you hope to accomplish in the coming year You can create many different goals as you like The Goals feature and this tab may be disabled in the Tools Options Assignments area See Goals Journal The Journal is a tool for documenting information throughout the school day There is no requirement to use this feature daily or even at al
154. There are five different reports to meet this need each of which comes with a variety of options Here is a brief description of each Agenda report a graphical printout of the Agenda screen which can include assignments field trips reading log items memorization items attendance term start end dates holiday designations appointments and or chores While the Agenda is a great visual tool on your screen the printed report is constrained by the limitations of the dimensions of your paper size You may find that you need to try different formats and or time ranges for this report to get a workable output Assignments report a list of assignments each of which may include subject course resource pagellesson chapter start end times directions points possible and topic Assignment Calendar report a list of assignments in a grid format with days of the week across the top and subjecticourse names down the left column may include activity directions resources pagellessonichapter start end times and topics Daily Task List report a compressed version of the Assignments report this version also allows you to include Chores Memorization Items and unfinished Reading Log entries Combined Assignment List report this version is intended for use by the teacher It is formatting option of the Assignments report It includes the Notes field from the assignment add edit window It also groups duplicate assignm
155. Weekly Planner Item Previous Next Buttons Group Edit COPYING WEEKLY PLANNER ITEMS DUPUICATINGA WEEKLY PLANNER ITEM CREATING ASSIGNMENTS FROM WEEKLY PLANNER ITEMS Whar if no assignments appear for one of my selections View ASSIGNMENTS DELETING WEEKLY PLANNER ITEMS ARCHIVING A WEEKLY PLANNER ITEM UN ARCHNING A WEEKLY PLANNER ITEM PRINTING WEEKLY PLANNER ITEMS THE WEEKLY PLANNER RIGHT CLICK MENU ATTACHMENTS ENABLING ATTACHMENTS CHEATING AN ATTACHMENT VIEWING AN ATTACHMENT EDITING AN ATTACHMENT 108 108 108 109 109 109 110 110 112 112 112 112 113 113 113 113 113 116 117 119 119 120 120 120 120 121 12 12 12 124 124 125 125 125 125 125 126 126 126 128 128 DELETING AN ATTACHMENT 128 COPYING TEMS WITH ATTACHMENTS 128 ATTACHMENTS AND GROUP EDT 129 PRINTING ATTACHMENTS 129 SUPPLIES SuPPUES 129 CREATING A SUPPLIES UST 129 in DELETING A SUPPLY ITEM in COPING ITEMS WITH SUPPUES 131 SUPPLIES AND GROUP EDIT 131 Surpuss 131 TIME SPENT AND SESSIONS 132 USINGTIME SPENT 132 Usma SESSIONS 132 GRADES GRADING SCALES AND WEIGHTED GRADING 132 Grass 133 Grade Calculation Method Averages default 133 Grade Calculation Method Sum of Eorned Possible 135 Seats 136 Editing the Default Grading Scale 136 Adding Grading Scale 138 Copying a Grading Scale 139 Assign
156. acation Other days Term startend dates Homeschool Tracker Plus will remember your selections from the Agenda tab If you have disabled features fields those options will not be available here Use the Student Subjects Courses Activities and or Resources filters to limit what is displayed in the report Time Frame Choose the earliest and latest time you wish to display The time range you select will affect how well the items are displayed on the printed page as items will be compressed to fit a larger time span on the printed page Choose any range you like between 12 00 am and 11 00 pm Your selections will be maintained on exit 2 Dah page per dy Wey 1 Woody 1page hemete Welty 200p Week 2oape torte at ft ve Caer Gore Figure 283 Agenda Report Options Assignment Fields to Include If you wish you can choose to hide the Subject Course Activity Resource andlor Page Lesson Chapter information for the assignments displayed Print Style There are four options to choose form Again the Agenda is intended for on screen viewing not for printing You may want to try different print styles and different fields to include to see what will work best for you If your entries do not start or end on the hour divisions of the report the actual start and end times will be displayed taking up room for other details such as subject page lessonichapter etc The hour d
157. act same name the new Course for the imported Lesson Plan will be added to your Course list with a number tag For instance if you already have a Course called Algebra the Algebra Course from your imported Lesson Plan will be added to the list and given the name Algebra 0 You can use the Reclassily feature to merge the new and existing Courses into one if you wish See The Reclassify Feature Courses will have no weighting they will be assigned to the Default Grading Scale and be attached to all students You can edit the Courses as needed in the Maintenance Subjects Courses list Activities tab You need to select the Activities to be assigned to the items in this Lesson Plan The Import tool will look for an exact match between Activities in the Lesson Plan and your Activities list e 1 exact match is found Homeschool Tracker Plus will suggest using it If there is no match found you will get a choice to Import New Item Whether there is a match or not you may select any Activity from the drop down list a selection for each Activity displayed Library Items tab You need to select the Library Items to be assigned to the items in this Lesson Plan The Import too will look for an exact match between Library items in the Lesson Plan and your Maintenance Library list Only the Title field is compared If an exact match is found Homeschool Tracker Plus will suggest using it if there is no ma
158. ails of your Courses in a Basic or Expanded format The Expanded format is suitable for inclusion along with a Transcript You can use it to include details about the areas your student has studied See Reports The Course Right Click Menu Add New You can right click over an individual Course or use shift click or ctrl click to tdt select wo or more Courses and right click over the selection to perform various functions on the selected item Use As New Add New allows you to add a new item to the grid Clicking this option will bring up the Add Edit Course window Archive Edit opens the Add Edit Course window for that item Unarchive Delete allows you to permanently remove the selected item from the database If the Course is in use Homeschool Tracker Plus will search the database for any items that have been attached to the selected Subject You Used Figure 51 Course Right Click Menu can then reclassify those items by choosing a different Subject item so the original item can be deleted Deleted items cannot be retrieved Use As New create a new Course using the currently selected Course as a Archive allows you to deactivate the selected item This will remove the item from the Active filtered view in the maintenance list and from all appropriate drop down lists while maintaining its relationship with all linked items Unarchive allows you to reactivate previously archived it
159. al The Location field allows you to track where each Field Trip was held II you are not required to track this information you can simply leave the default Home location as is and ignore this field Topic Optional 100 character limit You may enter a brief description of the field trip basic facts covered etc Topics for completed field trips can be printed out in the Scope amp Sequence report You can disable this feature in Tools Options Assignments Attachments Optional You may attach a reference to a document image or website to any field trip When an attachment exists an asterisk will appear in the field in grid view See Attachments Has Time Start End Times Optional Use these fields to set specific starting and ending times for your field trip Time Spent Optional Enter the total number of time in hours and minutes that the student spent on the field trip Sessions Optional Instead of tracking actual hours and minutes some users prefer to track sessions with one session being awarded each time that class is held Notes Optlonal This is an open field for whatever you wish to add You might want to include something about your experience on the trip or whether you would go again The text from this field appears on the Field Trip report In the Assignment grid view of a Field Trip the Notes appear in the Directions field The Field Trip Grid Access the Field Trip
160. amount of time to spend you can use the start end time features to assign a specific time of day for the student in which case the Time Spent value can be automatically generated from the span of time entered or you can manually enter the hours and minutes after the fact You can generate a Time Spent report to show how your student s time is spread out over the course of whatever date range you choose for the different subjects courses being studied Vacation day see Holiday above Weekly Planner a planning area that predates the Lesson Plan feature in Tracker history the Weekly Planner allows you to set up skeleton information for assignments that you will be creating on a regular basis When you need to create the actual assignment items you can use Ihe Weekly Planner ilem to auto populate your Assignment grid for the date range of your choosing with or without incremented page lesson chapter information lesson 1 lesson 2 lesson 3 etc Year your school year can range from one day to many months even covering multiple calendar years it you wish You will create new year for each year that you homeschool Maintenance Years Terms Only one school year may be active at a time and the active year determines which items wil be visible in the Assignment Field Trip Reading Log Memorization Journal and Agenda areas Making a new year active effectively archives items from a previous school year You can Switch back and forth betw
161. an choose to create individual passwords for each student with access If you choose not to do student with access can sign in as any other student with access simply by clicking on that student s name Setting Student Passwords Click on Tools then Security Double click on a student Check the box for Password Required Enter the password of your or the student s choice a Each student security record can have a password or not as you choose b Each student may have a unique password or not as you choose 5 Click OK Security Level Change Any Assignment Field When a student is granted access to Homeschool Tracker Plus he is allowed to mark assignments complete and enter Completion dates With the Change Any Assignment Field privilege turned on he edit any and fields of an Assignment Subject Course Activity Points Dates Completion etc I you grant this privilege the privileges of Change Dates and Change Points are automatically enabled as well Security Level Change Dates You can individually choose to give your student access to the Date Given Date Due and Date Complete fields that they can enter or change those values for an assignment The Date Given option is only enabled if the Date Given field is in use Security Level Change Points This privilege allows the student to enter their own Points Possible and or Points Earned for any assignment Security Level Change Time Spent Ses
162. an option in this version of the report Students Lists the students whose names are checked in the Course Add Edit window Filter Select the Students Subjects and or Courses to include in this report Other Options The Basic report has no date parameters It will simply print all the active Courses that meet your filter settings above Courses Expanded Report Options Fesouce Optone Cones Jesq ente estne tons inthe esce Caledon din I Gain Sentes Figure 290 Course List Report Options Expanded Page Options Enter a title for your report The default title is Courses You can leave this field blank if you prefer no title on the report Report Style Choose the Expanded style Include Activities For weighted courses only activities and their weights will be displayed Course Description Always included as part of the report 228 Credit Units Choose to display the number of credits available to be earned upon successful completion of the Course Calculation Option Choose to display the way in which credit hours are awarded Grading Scales Displays the actual grading scale values letter grades minimum percentages and grade points Resources Displays Resources attached to completed assignments for each course listed Ifyou elect to include Resources you can then use the Resource options on the right side of the options window to choose which resources to include
163. and Group Edit You can use the Group Edit feature of Assignments Lesson Plan and Weekly Planner to edit the supplies for multiple items at one time This can help you to quickly remove supplies from multiple items in one step or to add the same supply s to multiple items at once Use shift click or ctrl click to select your items Right click over the selection and choose Edit to open the Group Edit window Put a check next to the Supplies field Click the View Edit Supplies link Make your changes ONLY those items that are still visible when you are done with your changes will be attached to the selected items Printing Supplies You can print out a list of supplies to take on your shopping trip See Reports Time Spent and Sessions Homeschool Tracker Plus allows you to keep track of how often or how much time your student is spending in each Subject area using the Time Spent or Sessions fields Time Spent allows you to track actual hours and minutes while Sessions lets you track how often each class meets awarding a session for each type of assignment These fields are optional for data entry If you wish to use the Y day Present option in Attendance then you must enable one of these fields in Tools Options Assignments Using Time Spent Enable the Time Spent field in Tools Options Assignments lt As you enter or edit your Assignments Field Trips and Reading Log items you can enter the actual am
164. and add resource notes if you like c For multiple item selection adds each Library item to the Resource grid Will not add duplicates to Resource grid Create Reading Log Item For single item selection adds the Library item to the Reading Log grid for the student of your choice For multiple item selection adds the selected Library items to the Reading Log grid for the student of your choice even as duplicates Archive allows you to remove an item from the active view without having to delete it lt Unarchive allows you to return an archived item to the active view lt Reclassify is a special kind of Group Edit that lets you change the Library item selection for linked items lt Used By shows you where the selected Course is being used within the program Custom Library Report allows you to select specific Library items to be included in a report The Resource Type amp Resource Location The Resource Type provides a basic category description for each of your Library items The Homeschool Tracker Plus default dalabase contains a number of Resource Types already listed You should feel free to delete those you do not intend to use and add others that better meet your needs You can create any Resource Types necessary to meet your needs as general as Book or Video or as specific as Book History WWII or Video PBS National Geographic etc Resource Locations allow you to specify where your borrowed Resources and
165. anscript Full Page Assignments Monthly Progress Weekly Planner Attendance Report Card 5 100 Bm Figure 281 Secondary Print Preview Toolbar B The first icon toggles the thumbnail view on and off In a multi page report the Thumbnail view makes it easy to move quickly through the pages by scrolling down and clicking on a different page The second icon is the Print icon Click this button to print the report you are previewing The print menu will give the chance to change the selected printer and set the number of copies lt Next come the zoom controls The default is 100 The green arrows can be used to move through the pages of the report The display shows which page you re currently viewing and the total number of pages in the report Generating Report You may create any report at any time you like Click on the Reports tab Click on the report you wish to create This wil open the Options window for that report Once you have set the options click OK Click the Preview link and the report will be displayed If there is no information in your database that matches the report parameters you have set you ll see this message There is nothing to report based on your selections Choose different report options and try again er rite reor buson your econ Figure 282 Nothing to Report Message e Choosing a Report Click on any report name to select i from the list Ho
166. anscript certifying it as accurate Removal of the signature line will also remove the Title option below Including a signature line will also generate a line to print the name of the signatory Title Choose to excludelinclude a place to indicate the itle of the signatory Notary Line A generic notary witness line is printed Weekly Planner Planning The Weekly Planner report provides a printout of all items in the Weekly Planner grouped by Student Weekly Planner Report Options Page Options Enter a title for your report You may leave this blank if you prefer Sorting Choose to sort by Subject Course or by First Use Last Use date Filter Choose which Students Subjects Courses Activities andlor Resources to include in the report For Students the AI Students option will only display those items which are attributed to the All Students selection in the Student drop down list Figure 320 Weekly Planner Report Options Other Options There no date options for this report as Weekly Planner items have no dates Starting a New School Year When you are ending one school year and beginning another in Homeschool Tracker Plus there are a few things you l want to do Archive any Resources Maintenance Resources that you will not be using in the new year Archive any Lesson Plans Maintenance Lesson Plan Names that you will not be using in the new year Archive or delete a
167. ant to edit 2 Click a second time to enable editing in the grid The Activity name will be highlighted 3 Make your changes 4 To keep your changes click on the Save button at the top of the grid press the Enter key or click another field in the grid The Activity will be changed in linked Assignments Lesson Plan and Weekly Planner items Deleting an Activity Activities can only be deleted if they are not tied to any Assignment Course Lesson Plan elc When an Activity is already in use you need to use the Reclassily feature to reassign tied items to a different activity or you can choose to Archive the Activity instead See Used By and Reclassity 1 To view the Activity grid click on the Maintenance tab and then the Other tab 2 Right click over the Activity you want to remove and choose Delete or press the Delete key on your keyboard Ifthe Activity is in use the Used By window will appear This will show you where the Activity is being used throughout the program In order to delete this activity you ll need to make use of the Reclassily feature Please refer to that section of this User Manual e Ifthe Activity is not in use you will be asked are you sure 3 Click YES to delete the click NO to cancel the delete process You can delete more than one activity at a time using shift click or ctrl click to select the items to be removed Then right click over the selection and chose Dele
168. ard Monday to Sunday m Next Week will follow your computer s system preferences of Sunday to Saturday US standard Monday to Sunday Your terms There will be one entry per Term you have created for the Active School year in order by Term start date Click here to load report preview once you ve set your options click this link to preview your report If its not what you want click the Customize button and change your options then click this link again to preview the new report pinata SORE Fae san once Tk z me e g Cikke here to airport previne 4 Figure 279 Click to load report preview Secondary Toolbars Due to the complexity of the reports available in Homeschool Tracker Plus two different report engines are in use Each of these offers a different tool bar for working with the report in preview mode Secondary Print Preview Toolbar A This toolbar is in use for the following reports Borrowed Due Lesson Plan Resources Daily Task List Lesson Pan Names Resources by Student Detail Progress Library lems Scope amp Sequence Field Trips Memorization Student Activities Achievements Field Trip Form Overview Students Standardized Tests Goals Reading Log Subjects Goals Progress Reading Log Form Supplies Grading Scale Reading Log Time Spent Time Spent Sessions Joumal Figure 280 Secondary Print Preview Toolbar The
169. area The Library Grid To access the Library click on the Maintenance tab and then click the Library tab Fle New Main Menu Student Te Figure 173 Library Grid Panel Coll pse Expand Icons ay Use the blue up down arrow icons collapse or expand all the groupings on this grid You can collapse expand individual groupings by clicking the buttons on the grouping headers Homeschool Tracker Plus wil not retain your settings when you leave this screen sen Choose Columns and Reset Icons 1 Click the Choose Columns icon 2 Check the columns to include uncheck the columns to exclude Column selections will not be visible for features which you have elected to disable in Tools Options Assignments Figure 175 3 Click Save to retain your selections click Cancel to exit without changing your column view Choose 4 Things to remember Columns Icon You can change your selections at any time eluding a cau tomo does rl remove he daa tena fe 1 You can reset unn wa and calum order to setings by cle the Reset Colm an nie Asmar header Foure 178 Columns Icon The Drop Down Lists Filter Choose whether to view Active Archived items or Both The Search field You can search among your Library items Search text will compare against Title Type Custom Author Publisher ISBN Call Number and Notes fields Hidden fields will be in
170. assignment see above you can move to the next or previous item displayed in the grid using the Previous and Next icons in the top right of the window ans RP go Figure 62 Assignments Prev Next Icons Edit the assignment Click SAVE to commit your changes Then click the Previous or Next icon to move to the next item as displayed in the grid Field Trips cannot be edited in this manner To edita Field Trip go to the Student Field Trips grid Group Edit Supplemental video available on this topic You can edit almost any field in two or more assignments at a lime using the Homeschool Tracker Plus Group Edit feature The only fields you cannot change via Group Edit are Student Page Lesson Chapter Date Given and Date Complete Note Dale Complete can be marked for more items at the same time using the right click Mark as Complete option See below 1 Use the Assignment grid filters or the Custom Filter to display the items you wish to edit 2 Use Shift click or Ctrl click to select the items you wish to edit 3 Right click over the selection and choose Edit The Group Assignment Edit window will appear E ome oe TEAR AE t t t E Soglen en Saten Dt i tert iet meat Figure 63 Group Edit Assignments 4 Puta check next to each field you want to change for the selected group of items As you check them the fiel
171. at the Overview grid cannot be displayed for the All Students view Printing the Overview Use the Overview report to print out a replica of the Overview screen for any Student While the screen view is limited to the Terms of your Active School year the Overview report allows you to select any date range you lke See Reports Goals Setting Goals is an optional feature of Homeschool Tracker Plus Creating goals allows you to outline what you hope to accomplish in the coming year You can create as many different sels of goals as you like either by grade level by student by year etc whatever fits your needs or reporting requirements You can disable this feature in Tools Options Assignments Goals can be linked to Assignments Field Trips Lesson Plans Memorization Tasks Reading Log or Weekly Planner items Linking goals to Lesson Plan or Weekly Planner items will automatically attach them to Assignments created from these items Once a goal has been linked to an Assignment Field Trip Memorization Task or Reading Log item an entry will appear in the Student Goals Progress grid showing that the achievement of that goal is In Progress You can add notes to the Goals Progress items and also mark a date on which they become complete that is when the student has achieved that particular goal to your satisfaction You can export all or any part of your Goals lists to share with other Homeschool Tracker Plus u
172. atic Homeschool Tracker Plus will methodically move items from an old date to a new date starting with the new first date due you ve indicated Holiday Absent and Non School days will be skipped as indicated in the options window However no existing patterns of assignments will be acknowledged or followed For instance if you have Science only on Tuesdays and are rescheduling for less than 7 days in the future Science will not necessarily end up only on Tuesdays in the Rescheduled lst of assignments Tracker wil do its best to keep the same number of days between assignments So if you re rescheduling Friday and Monday items and your new starting date is Tuesday Fridays items will go on Tuesday and Monday s items will be moved to Friday to maintain the same 4 date gap as before Fri Sat Sun Mon becomes Tue Wed Thur Fri Use LP Schedule This option allows you to select a previously created LP Schedule for Tracker to use as a guide when moving tems Beginning with the first date selected Tracker wil follow only the entries on the selected LP Schedule when determining where to place the moved items Assignments without a match on the LP Schedule will appear in the Preview screen with c a blue background a the OK box unchecked and disabled c the new Date Due field blank c To create these items as assignments you ll need to edit your LP Schedule to contain a matching reference or choose a different LP Schedule to use
173. ays 1 Click on Tools in the menu bar and then click on School Year Calculator or click on the Maintenance tab and then the Years Terms tab and click Add Year to open the School Year Calculator re Figure 9 Maintenance Years Terms Add Year Figure 10 Tools School Year Calculator 2 Enter a name description for your school year It can be anything you like up to 100 characters such as 2012 2013 or Jennie s Senior Year The you choose will appear on Report Cards and Transcripts Enter the start date for your school year 4 Enter the minimum number of days you are required to or wish to hold school You can set this to zero if you have no minimum requirement Enter the last date that you want to be in school for the year 6 Check the days of the week when you intend to hold school If you ve already selected days in Maintenance School Info those choices will be reflected here School day choices are a universal setting that affect all school years 7 The gray bar at the bottom of the window will display haw many days over the minimum are included in the date range and days you ve selected This is the number of days for which you can book holidays or vacations time and still meet the minimum number of days you ve entered in step 4 above If you have not included enough days to meet the minimum a negative value will be displayed 10 tc Set up you
174. backup when reminded tracker will remind each time you open or close the program depending on your option settings until a backup is made 7 Now that you ve added a few details to your database make a backup for practice using the directions that follow You will want to master this before adding a lot of inromatoin into your program Figure 32 Database Backup Reminder Creating a Backup Supplemental video available on this topi 1 Plug your backup media external drive flash drive etc into the proper slot mtl rake 2 COPY of your databace th eaten you moat bow 2 Click on Database In the Homeschool Tracker Plus menu bar Felder Bock Rie 3 Click on Backup 4 Inthe Folder for Backup File field enter where you want to place the sfide backed up file After you enter this information the first time the location wil be remembered unti you change it You can click the Choose Folder link to browse for the drive folder you want to use Figure 33 Database Backup Input Window 5 Homeschool Tracker Plus will suggest a name for your backup essentially the name of the file you re already using You can choose another name if you like as long as you retain the mdb file extension 6 Click Create Backup and the copy will be made of your database to the location you have selected This process takes just a moment 7 As you make subsequent backups if you use th
175. base That would cause the database file to grow to astronomical proportions very quickly Instead the link to the image is retained Each time you call up the Library item Tracker will reload the image If the computer you are working on is not connected to the internet at that time the image will not be loaded Figure 180 ISBN Confirm Fields to Update Ad g Your Own Thumbnail This feature can be used if the ISBN lookup does not provide a thumbnail of the book cover image or i you would like to associate a different image for your Library item 1 Inthe Library Add Edit window click the Thumbnail hyperlink This will open the Add Edit Library Item Thumbnail Image window 2 or paste in the URL web address of file path for the image you want to use You can click the Browse button to navigate to an image file if you like 3 For the entire image to be visible in the Thumbnail field the image should be 120 pixels wide by 160 pixels high 4 Click OK to set the image 12 Figure 181 Library Edit Thumbnail Window Editing a Library Item You may edit any part of any a Library item Some fields can be edited in directly in the grid To make a change to a field filled by a drop down list you ll need to double click on the Library item to open up the Edit window Make your changes and click SAVE Editing in the Grid All of the fields of a Library Item can be edited directly in the grid with the ex
176. be displayed in the sample text Some fonts and point sizes will work better than others of course Choose the ones that best suit your needs Click OK to keep your settings Figure 277 Other Options Window Date Range Selector Most reports allow you to set your own date parameters You can do this by selecting a pre defined date range from the Date drop down list or by entering your own From To dates in the fields provided G Te vaw ge Figure 278 Report Date Range Selector Custom Dates choose this option to enter your own From To dates for the report If you choose Custom from the drop down list your manually entered dates will be preserved until you close the program or change the dates School Year uses the Start and End dates of the Active School year for the From To values Year to Date uses the Start date of the Active School year for the From value and your computer s system date for the To value Yesterday a single date range using the value of your computer s system date minus one Today a single date range using the value of your computer s system date Tomorrow a single date range using the value of your computer s system date plus one Last Week will follow your computer s system preferences of Sunday to Saturday US standard or Monday to Sunday This Week will follow your computer s system preferences of Sunday to Saturday US stand
177. ble the corresponding columns tabs and reports in Tools Options Assignments 132 You can create one or more Grading Scales to your needs Each Grading scale has letter grade and Pass Fail options Grading Scales can be attached to Courses with or without weighted grading Homeschool Tracker Plus starts with a Default Grading Scale This scale can edited for content but it cannot be deleted nor can the scale name be changed Grades can be reviewed on the Overview Screen and printed in the Overview Report Report Card and Transcript Grades If you choose to create Report Cards or Transcripts you re going to need to grade some or all of your student s assignments To grade an assignment enter the number of points possible and the points earned When the assignment is marked as complete Homeschool Tracker Plus will calculate the percentage grade by dividing the points earned by the points possible The letter grade awarded will be based on the grading scale you set up The Date Completed that you enter will control the Term and Year the grade will be attributed to Homeschool Tracker Plus allows you to choose how grades are to be calculated for your students You must choose one method for all students You may change your selection at any lime Make your selection in Tools Options Assignments The options are outlined below The examples demonstrate how the different options may affect your student s overall grades
178. bmit button to send the checked items to the Assignment grid click Cancel to exit without adding these items to the Assignment grid Click OK on the Submit Complete message The items from the Lesson Plan you have just submitted will be updated to Used status with a Used On date equal to the Date Due of the assignments created You will be returned to the Un Used view of the Plan grid you have been working with Remember the Lesson Plan items you have submitted have not been removed from the Lesson Plan To view them in the Lesson Plan grid change the Filter drop down to Used or Both e Lesson Plan Items using of Days Field If you have enabled the Date Given field you have the option to create multi day assignments in your Lesson Plan When you use a Lesson Plan with a of Days value greater than one 1 to create an Assignment the Date Given and Date Due values attributed to that Assignment will be different separated by your of Days setting For instance if your of Days is set to 4 and the Date Given is a A A DEAN MM TH 4 days The default value of the of Days field is 1 the Date Given and Date Due of any assignment created from that Lesson Plan item wil be the same the CORREO feu assignment is given and due on the same date Figure 119 Lesson Plan amp of Days Field If you change the of Days value to anything greater than 1 the Dat
179. bra i Homework 10 10 100 00 Malh Algebra T Homework 50 18 96 00 Math Algebra i Homework 25 24 96 00 Homework Total 65914 14 Term 1 Math Test 310 00 77 50 70 5425 Homework 659 14 5416 30 2825 Tem Grade 8250 Assignments Term 2 Subject Course J Activity Pis Poss Pis Eamed Grade Mat Algebra i Test 50 25 50 00 Math Algebra 1 Test 100 95 95 00 Math Algebra i Test 100 72 72 00 Math Algebra 1 Test 100 78 75 00 Math Algebra Test 100 81 00 Test Total 371 00 Mat Algebra i Homework 50 50 100 00 Math Algebra 1 Homework 50 48 6 00 Math Algebra 1 Homework 35 38 54 20 Math Algebra i Homework 10 g 90 00 Math Algebra 1 Homework 10 16 100 00 Math Algebra 1 Homework 10 10 100 00 Homework Total 580 29 Term 2 Math Total Score Average Weighing Weighted Grade Test 37100 7520 70 5194 Homework 580 29 9672 30 29 02 Tem Grade 80 36 Yearly Grade Math Algebra 1 82 50 80 96 2 81 73 In our standard grading by Averages example above the Yearly Math grade came to 87 29 The most significant difference in weighted vs non weighted grades wil appear when there are a large number of assignments in a particular activity as well as more graded assignments overall Examples for Weighted grading using Sum Earned Possibl
180. calculation of the grade for the Course Option 3 Create a new Course one weighted one non weighted 1 Right click on the weighted Course and choose Use as New 2 This will create a duplicate of the original Course 3 Assign a new Course Code the Course Title must remain exactly the same 4 Inthe Grading Options area set Weighting to No Alternatively you can make this a weighted course as well just with different weightings to deal with the missing activity 5 You can now assign this new Course to all Assignments within the Term where you will not be using all the weighted Activities 6 You must now change your Course List Display Format to Code or Code Title in Tools Options Assignments to insure selection of the proper course 7 You can also verify your Course selection via the Overview grid In the Report Card and Transcript Reports you will see one entry for the Course name with each term s grade calculated properly according to whether you have used the weighted or non weighted course Printing Grades Grades can be printed in Report Cards Transcripts Progress Reports and Assignments reports for completed items See Reports Attendance Supplemental video avallable on this topic Many jurisdictions require that you homeschool a certain number of days hours or both within the school year The Homeschool Tracker Plus Atlendance feature allows you to track days along with total hours time spent or se
181. can be anything you like perhaps the name of the poem citation of the verse perhaps the lesson the spelling or vocabulary words are gleaned from etc Goals Optional You may elect to attribute goals to any Memorization task When goals are attached an asterisk will appear in the field in grid view You can enable disable this feature in Tools Options Assignments See Goals Description Text Notes Optional The text entered here will Figure 216 Memorization appear on the Daily Task List report when you choose to display Add Edit Window Memory notes This is an unlimited field Use this area to put the details of what is to be memorized the text of the verse or poem words from the spelling or vocabulary list etc In this way all the information your student needs will be in one place on their assignment sheet Started On Optional The date the item was assigned If you decline to enter a date this item will not appear on any report nor on the Agenda screen If you enter a Started On date but no Date Due the item will appear on the Agenda only on the Started On date Date Due Optional You may choose to assign a due date or not as your needs dictate Completed Optional The date the item was successfully mastered If you never mark the item as finished it will continue to appear on your Daily Task List report in every school year The Memorization Grid Access the Memorization grid by clicking
182. cel to exit without importing Ifyou had created a duplicate Lesson Plan name rather than selecting the name from the drop down list Homeschool Tracker Plus wil inform you of the error and youll be returned to the Plan Name tab to make a different selection 13 Click the Done button 14 Homeschool Tracker Plus wil restart and all your new information properly in place Importing Goals Library Items or Holidays 1 Click on Tools in the menu bar and then click on Import Export 2 Click Continue 3 Choose the file you wish to import by double clicking the LPX file or by clicking once on the file name and What would you like to do then on the Open button 4 The Import Export Preview window will appear Here you have a chance to review what you re about to import before committing changes to your database Use the Check All Uncheck All buttons to quickly select or deselect all items Click on an individual item to include it Use shift click to select multiple items at once lt You can use the grouping and sorting capabilities of the preview grid to arrange the way in which items 9 Import a that someone has shared weh you sport a fle to share with someone are displayed When you ve selected the items you want to import click OK Figure 272 importing Goals Library Items or 5 Homeschool Tracker Plus wil close while the import Holidays process is completed 6 The import confirmation wind
183. ception of Resource Type Location Borrowed From and Loaned To fields 1 To edit any of these fields click once in the field 2 Make your changes 3 To keep your changes click the Save button in the Assignment grid panel or click on another item in the grid To cancel your changes press the escape key on your Keyboard before moving away from the field Editing a Single Library Item Click on the Maintenance tab and then the Library tab Double click on the item you wish to edit or right click over the lem and choose Edit Make any changes you would like Click Save to keep your changes click Cancel to ext without saving Group Edit You can edit almost any field in two or more Library items at the same time using the Homeschool Tracker Plus Group Edit feature The only fields you cannot edit via Group Edit are ISBN and Thumbnail 1 Click on the Maintenance tab and then the Library tab 2 Use Shift click or Cri click to select the items you wish to edit 3 Right click over the selection and choose Edit The Group Edit Field Trips window will appear Figure 182 Group Edit Library Item Window 4 Puta check next to each field you want to change for the selected group of items As you check them the fields will become enabled Make a new selection for each checked field 6 For any drop down list you can type directly in field to create a new item or you can use the pencil icon button next to any drop do
184. ch Students you want to create this report for Each student s listing will start on new page Report Card Grades The Report Card provides a way for you to create periodic progress reports for your students The periods available to you for the Report Card are dictated by the Terms that you create for each School Year The Report Card can display up to six terms at a lime Report Cards can be formatted to show letter grades A F or P F only percentages only or both You control the format of your Report Card header choosing which information to include or exclude The Report Card can include Term start and end dates Attendance information and Notes Grades are displayed on the Report Card based on the Date Complete for your Assignments Report Card Options Figure 309 Report Card Options Page Options Enter a title for your report You can leave this field blank if you prefer Items to Include Choose which data about your homeschool will be displayed on the Report Card This information is pulled from the Maintenance School Info entry field If you choose to include Grade Level Tracker will display the information you ve entered for the Aclive School Year in Maintenance Students under the Grade Level tab Grade Display Letter Grades Only The appropriate letter grade for the average percentage earned will be displayed based on the grading scale attached to the Course If Courses
185. checked field Whatever choices you make here will be attributed to all the items you have highlighted 5 Click Save to keep your changes click Cancel to exit without saving Deleting a Course Figure 50 Group Edit Courses Courses can only be deleted if they are not tied to any Assignment Field Trip Resource etc When a Course is already in use you need to use the Reclassify feature to reassign linked items to a different Course or you can choose to Archive the Course instead See 9 Used By and Reclassity i To view he Subjects Courses grid click on the Maintenance tab and then the Subjects Courses tab 2 Right click over the Course you want to remove and choose Delete or press the Delete key on your keyboard Ifthe Course is in use the Used By window will appear This will show you where the Course is being used throughout the program In order to delete this Course you ll need to make use of the Reclassily feature Ifthe Course is not in use you wil be asked are you sure 3 Click YES to delete the click NO to cancel the delete process 9 Archiving a Course If you will not be using a Course for the Active School Year but that Course is tied to existing Assignments or Lesson Plans or if the Course may be used again at a future date you may wish to Archive rather than delete the Course Archiving allows you to retain all records associated with that Course while removing the Subj
186. choose whether to include Incomplete Past Due and or Completed items c Past Due items are those which are not marked as complete and have a Date Due prior to the selected date range for the report And for each of those Assignments choose which fields you d like to display Subject Course Activity Resource Page Lesson Chapter and or Topic Appointments These items wil be pulled from the Agenda for the student selected Chores These items will be pulled from the Agenda for the student selected Field Trips Any field trip which occurs within the date range selected will be displayed Memorization Tasks You may choose to include Memorization Tasks or not Reading Log Items You may choose to include Reading Log Items or not Figure 291 Daily Task List Report Options Directions and Notes Show Assignment Directions Choose whether or not to show the directions you ve entered for your assignments Show Chore Directions Choose whether you want the Chore directions to be displayed Show Memorization Task Notes Choose whether you want the details of what your student is memorizing to be displayed lt Repeat on each day for identical items a If you ve included Chore or Memorization item Directions Noles above you can choose here whether you want to show those notes just the first time the item appears unchecked or every time the item appears This option will also control whether the directions for Long Te
187. ck Copy or double click on an assignment and then click on the Copy button at the bottom of the Add Edit window 2 The default selection in the Copy Assignments window is Single Copy Most of the window options will be disabled 3 Check the names of the student s you want to copy to If you are using Courses only the students attached to that course attached to the original assignment will appear on the list 4 Click Preview Use this opportunity to verify the assignments about to be created Figure 65 Assignment Copy Preview Les The Copy Results window will show you what assignments will be created listing the Student name date given if using date due and Page Lesson Chapter Information lt You may check or uncheck the OK column for any to include exclude it from submission to the assignment grid Take moment to review the items to make sure that they are correct before clicking the Submit button You can change the grouping and or sorting of the grid column order and size and even exclude certain columns if you like to make it easier for you to review No duplicate copy will be made for the student whose name appears on the original assignment whether you check their name or not Homeschool Tracker Plus will not check for duplicates in this process for the selected students If one of the selected students other than the original student already has this item they will now have two 5 Cl
188. ck Save to add the item to the Agenda click Cancel to exit without saving 0 5 When you click Save you ll be given the chance to select all the students to receive this appointment on their schedule 6 Click Submit Figure 233 Add Edit Appointment Adding Chores i Click on the Student tab and then the Agenda tab 2 Click the ADD button to bring up the Add Edit Appointment window Figure 234 Add Edit Chore Window To add a Chore lt Inthe Add Edit Appointment window click the Chore radio button Choose a Chore from the list You may click on the pencil icon button to add a new Chore from this window or to edit the Chore displayed in the window Set the start date As most chores begin and end on the same day the End date will default to the same as your start date To enter multiple chores see the directions for Copying Appointments or Chores below Set the start and end times If there are no specific times to be assigned check the All Day Event box 202 4 Click Save to add the chore to the Agenda click Cancel to exit without saving 5 When you click Save you ll be given the chance to select the students to receive this chore on their schedule 6 Click Submit Group Edit for Appointment or Chore Start End Times You can use the Group Edit feature in the List view of the Agenda to reset the starting and ending times for any two or more of your Appointment
189. ck the SAVE button at the top of the grid or click on another ilem in the grid The Date Complete will be removed Option 3 In the Assignment grid view right click on the assignment you wish to mark Choose Mark as Incomplete from the context menu confirmation message will appear Click YES to mark the assignment incomplete To mark multiple assignments as incomplete in one process Use the Assignment grid filters or the Custom Filler to display the items you wish to mark Use Shift lick or to select the items you wish to mark Right click over the selection and choose Mark as Incomplete from the context menu confirmation message will appear Click YES to mark the selected assignments incomplete Rescheduling You can use the Homeschool Tracker Plus rescheduling tool to move existing assignments backward or forward in time to accommodate changes to your schedule See Rescheduling from the Student Assignment Grid Recalculating Time Spent If you use Group Edit to add or edit SlarVEnd times for a group of Assignments the Time Spent field not be automatically filed Likewise i you change the start end limes for an assignment by stretching or compressing that tem in the Agenda the Time Spent field wil not be updated If you have been using SlaruEnd times along but decided to switch over from Sessions to Time spent or just to start tracking Time Spent you d have go back and individually ed
190. cker Plus an automatic backup of your database will be placed in a folder called Autoback The folder will be in the same directory where your main database is stored This process must not replace your manual backups as discussed above You choose to turn off this feature Number of Autoback Files Set the number of individual automatic backup files that will be created before the oldest file is overwritten by new one These files will be created in an Autoback folder in the same directory where your database is stored Notification Options Homeschool Tracker Plus can help you keep track certain details using these notification features Figure 325 Program Options Notifications Notify Me When I Choose the Use As New feature Use As New allows you to create new assignment starting with all the details of an existing assignment This notification will alert you that you are creating something new rather than just editing the existing item Create a duplicate assignment A duplicate assignment is one that contains the same student subject course activity resource and pagellesson chapter information If the page lesson chapter field is blank Homeschool Tracker Plus will not check for duplicates The purpose of this reminder is to keep you from accidentally assigning the same work twice The duplication check includes all assignments the database not just the ones in the Active School Year I
191. classity You are redassyng related in the databse that use the folowing activity Cless 4 The item you are changing lek on a row in the grid below to choose the new Rem M pen frished delete In cass AES TRO default setting is to delete the original item after reclassifying Figure 347 Reclassily window The item you re reciassifying is listed at the top of the window The table listing on the right side will show you how many Assignments Courses etc are linked to the item you wish to change n You wil not be able to individually view the connected 759505 items If you wish to view the individual items click the Cancel button and then right click over the Maintenance list again and choose Used By 3 Choose a new from the list The original item will not be an option on this list 4 The default settings will cause the original item to be deleted after the Reclassily process has finished Uncheck Figure 348 Reclassily the box if you want to keep the original Confirmation window 5 Glick Reclassity to make the change as indicated click Cancel to exit without changing anything 6 You must confirm the changes you are about to make by typing yes in the confirm window p Rescheduling Supplemental video avallable on this topic When we homeschool life sometimes takes over our schedule in unexpected ways The Reschedule tool
192. cluded in the search parameters Grouping and Sorting Just as in the Assignment grid you may choose to group and sort the displayed information in the Library grid according to any column heading For full details please see the Using the Grids section Adding a Library Item You can open the Add Library Item window by clicking on the Maintenance tab then the Library tab and the click the Add button J See The Anatomy of a Library Item above for a description of each field 4 Fillin each field as desired The only required fields are Title and Type 2 Click the SAVE button Adding a Library Item via ISBN Homeschool Tracker Plus offers a convenient way to quickly enter the Title Author Publisher and Call Number and Thumbnail of your Library items You must be connected to the Internet to use this feature 1 Open the Add Library Item window by clicking on the Maintenance tab then the Library tab and finally click the Add button 2 Click the ISBN hyperlink to open the ISBN Download window eer 10 or 13 1580 number in the box provided Belew You da net need to enter any spaces or hyphen and the bor below wil automaticaly femore them Figure 177 ISBN Download Entry Window 3 in the 10 or 13 digit ISBN without dashes or spaces 4 Click the Download button which is enabled once there are 10 or 13 digits entered 5 If you are not connected to the internet you ll receive an unable to connec
193. cular student from the drop down list Right click over a date and choose View Assignments the only option View Assignments Homeschool Tracker Plus wil take you to a special view of the Assignment grid and display all assignments completed on that date In this view you can edit or delete any of the displayed items PETIT RET Figure 162 Attendance View Assignments 5 Click Return to go back to the Attendance area and retum the Assignments grid to its normal view Printing Attendance You can create an Attendance report by Student or by Month See Reports Field Trips The Field Trips area allows you to track school related outings You may assign subjects courses start end times and time spent sessions to each Field Trip If you enter Time Spent Sessions information that time will be included in the Attendance Overview and Time Spent Sessions reports for the subject course entered All field trips appear in the same window When adding or editing a Field Trip you can select which students attended Field Trip item will be added for each student selected Field trips will also appear in the Assignment grid and Agenda Field trips appear on the Assignment Combined Assignment List Dally Task List and Agenda reports You can print a separate Field Trip report which includes the date of the trip the destination and any notes you have entered regarding the trip Field Trips are a
194. culator Editing a School Year Manually Click on the Maintenance tab and then on the Years Terms tab Right click over a School year and click Edit 3 You can change the school year name description start end dates and or check or uncheck the box to make this year the Active School Year 4 Click SAVE to keep your changes 5 Adding a Term Manually You can create Terms using the School year Calculator If you want to create than 6 Terms you will need to add the extra terms manually The Report Card can display only six terms at a lime Click on the Maintenance tab and then the Years Terms tab Click the Add Term button Enter a name for your term This can be anything you like up to 50 alphanumeric characters Enter a code abbreviation for the Term from 1 4 characters The Term Code will appear on the Report Card Choose a start date This date must be on or affer the Start Date for the Active School Year amp Choose an end date This date must be on or before the End date for the Active School Year Figure 19 Years Terms Add Term 7 Choose the School Year for this term 8 Designate the Term as falling Semester 1 51 or Semester 2 S2 for Transcript purposes 9 Click Save to add the Term to your School Year Click Cancel to exit this window without saving Figure 20 Add Term Input Window Editing a Term Manually 1 Click on the Maintenance tab and then the Years Terms
195. d Figure 223 Memorization Use As New Right Click Menu c For single item selection This option creates a copy of the selected record You may then change the record as you wish and save it to the grid c For multiple item selections This wil bring up Choose Students window allowing you to copy the selected items to one or more students as selected Mark Complete allows you to enter a checkmark in the Done box and a date of completion for one or items at once Mark Incomplete allows you to remove the checkmark and completion date from any selected record s f 09 Chores Chores are an optional feature of Homeschool Tracker Plus You can assign Chores to your students using the Agenda feature of the program See Agenda In this area you ll find information on creating new chores for your Maintenance Other Chore list The Chores Grid You can access the Chore list by clicking on the Maintenance tab and then the Other tab Chores are listed in alphabetical order You can enter as many Chores as you would like There is no default Chore entered Figure 224 Maintenance Other Chores Grid Panel Filter The Filter drop down controls which items are displayed in the grid The options are Active Archive Only Both The default setting for this fiter is Active displaying all the Chores that are currently available lor use The Archive Only setting shows those items you have chosen to Arch
196. d Items items that have been marked as Borrowed will be listed in the report Loaned Items items that have been marked as Loaned will be listed in the report Neither borrowed nor loaned items that are not designated as Borrowed nor as Loaned will be listed in the report Un used Items items that are not attached to any Assignment Lesson Plan or Weekly Planner item Status Choose whether to include Active items Archived items or both check both boxes Filter Choose which Students Subjects Courses Activities and or Resources to include in the report For Subjects the All Subjects option will only display those items which are attributed to the All Subjects selection in the Subject drop down list For Courses the All Courses option will only display those items which are attributed to the All Courses selection in the Course drop down list Sort Direction If you have selected date type field for Grouping 1 Grouping 2 or Additional Sort you can use this area to choose whether to display those items in ascending oldest to newest or descending newest to oldest order Resources by Student Assignments The Resources by Student report creates a list ofall resources attached to assignments for the student and date range selected You can limit the report to specific Subjects Courses and Activities You may choose to include exclude items classified as Additional Resources
197. d assignments for that date 1 Click the Student tab then Attendance tab 2 Click on any calendar day to bring up the Attendance window 3 Click All Students or click Selected Students and check names as appropriate 47 4 Click on the date you wish to mark or click and drag over a range of dates 5 Choose whether to skip over non school days This allows you to mark more than one week at a time wilhout including weekends Holiday Vacation Other days are not be skipped amp Click Present Ve day or Present 7 If you re entering manual hours enter them at this time in the boxes provided 8 Click OK to mark the calendars as noted Click Cancel or close the window to quit without making changes to Ihe Attendance Calendar Marking a day as Absent You may wish to use the Absent feature to mark days where student will be skipping school while others are still in attendance Absent days can be skipped over when Rescheduling submitting from a Lesson Plan or Weekly Planner or in the Assignment Copy Repeat Over Date Range procedures Click the Student tab then Attendance tab Click on any calendar day to bring up the Attendance window Attendance Tyre Figure 159 Attendance Manually Marking Present Click All Students or click Selected Students and check names as appropriate Click on the date you wish lo mark or click and drag over a range of dates Choose whether to skip o
198. d blank if you prefer tems to Include Incomplete items choose to include incomplete items without a start date with a start date or both check both boxes Complete items choose to include complete items without a finished date with a finished date or both check both boxes 29 Te Werotmen ments I No Swt Due I7 Weh Sat Date Cone tens IV No Contd Dat 1 Wh Date 59 prem i Dae Compe I Descpton Tou Neos Figure 303 Memorization Report Options Fields to Display Choose which fields you want to have appear in the report Grouping Choose the grouping you prefer Filter Choose which Students you want to create this report for Each student s listing will start on new page Monthly Progress Grades This report will show daily attendance time spent and grades for selected subjects courses Up to 11 subjects courses can be displayed at once The Subject code and Course code wil be used in this report lor space considerations Daily grades come from calculating all the graded items for that subject course that are marked as complete on that date Your grading options for averaging or sum of eamed divided by possible will be used Weighted grading will not be applied here You can choose to roll up the Course grades to give one grade per subject When you choose this option the Course designations are completely ignored for the purposes of this report 593
199. date falls on or within selected date s c Date Given items will be displayed if their date given falls on or within selected date s If you ve turned off this field this option is not available c Date Complete items will be displayed if they are marked as complete and the date completed falls on or within the selected the date s The Custom Filter Option You may find that the standard Assignment grid filters do not give you enough flexibility to control what is displayed in the grid The Custom Filter allows you to view more than one student but fewer than alll students at the same time select single or multiple subjects courses activities resources set custom date ranges select pre defined date ranges based on school year and term limits choose for the date range to apply to the Date Given Date Due or Date Complete view incomplete assignments complete assignments or both Choose filter options To set the custom filter choose Custom in the Filter CS drop down in the Assignment grid panel BEES Choose Filter Options Click the hyperlinks to select pun Students Subjects Courses Activities and or eves Resources ne These are and selections Only those items which meet all of your criteria will be displayed So it you choose the Subject History and Course Algebra you l likely get no results Fon Badii s Sna n him B Te Edi S sari em DAR gt Assignment Types f 49 ze The default se
200. dent s Assignment grid will be marked as duplicates The duplicate search checks the entire database not just the Active School year with blank Page Lesson Chapter fields are not included in the duplicate check procedure Duplicates appear in the Confirm Lesson Assignments grid with a pink background The OK field will be unchecked You may check the OK field to include these items in the submit process If you do not want Homeschool Tracker Plus to check for duplicates you can turn off this option Tools Options Notifications If you have disabled the Page Lesson Chapter field in Tools Options Assignments no duplicate check will be made bs Aw rv Sam ene ovy resource and Figure 111 Lesson Plan Submit Duplicate Items Found If submitting items according to an LP Schedule items which do not have matching schedule entry wil appear in the Confirm Lesson Assignments grid with a blue background The OK field wil be unchecked and disabled No Date Due will be assigned To create these items as assignments you l need to edit your 22322 LP Schedule ana the repeat the H Submission process Once you have Rene could rot be eed because ey i rot have a tU schake ety reviewed the Assignments to be created click the Figure 112 Lesson Plan Submit with no LP Schedule Match Su
201. dismiss specific items Once you ve made your selection click the Dismiss buttons All highlighted items will be removed from the list and the checkmark will be removed from the Remind Me field in the Add Edit window for that item 5 You can remove all items form the list and the checkmark from the Remind Me field by clicking the Dismiss All button Printing the Borrowed Items Due List Click the Print button in the Borrowed Items Due window Enter your report title and choose a grouping preference Click OK Click the Click here link to preview the report Click the Printer icon to print the report as shown Memorization Items You may use the Memorization area to track anything your student is to memorize bible verses spelling vocabulary lists poems etc This is an alternative to creating these items as regular assignments This feature was added at the request of Homeschool Tracker Plus users If it does not fit your homeschooling style you can disable this tab in Tools Options General Memorization items can be included in the Daily Task List Report Anatomy of a Memorization Item Students Required Students are selected when you click SAVE on the Add Memorization Task window List Type Required 100 character limit You can enter anything you like You might choose to use the Topic the item falls under Bible Spelling Vocabulary Poem etc Title Required 100 character limit This
202. dow Click Save amp Close in the assignment window Deleting an Attachment Edit the Assignment and click on the View Edit Attachments link Right click over the attachment you want to view Choose Delete from the context menu An are you sure message will appear Click YES to delete the selected attachment Deleting an attachment will only remove it from the single you are working with Copying items with Attachments When the Attachment feature is enabled an extra message is added to each Copy and Use as New function Check the box if you want to copy the attachments along with all the other information of your assignment field trip reading log resource lesson plan or weekly planner item If the box is checked ALL created copies will contain the attachments of the original item Check this i you wish to have the is to attachments rom the original item copied to the new tems Figure 147 Attachment Copy Message UJ Attachments and Group Edit You can use the Group Edit feature of Assignments Field Trips Resources Reading Log Lesson Plan Weekly Planner to edit the attachments for multiple items at one time This can help you to quickly remove attachments from multiple items in one step or to add the same attachment s to multiple items at once Use shift click or ctrl click to select your Right click over the selection and choose Edit to op
203. dow will appear listing all of the titles selected Gas AMT gt Ew E Figure 198 Create Reading Log Window Choose a Student from the drop down lst Enter whatever other information you would like to be the same for all the selected titles Click Save Go to the Student Reading Log tab to make additional changes or to copy any or all of these items to another student 176 Editing a Reading Log Item You may edit any part of any Reading Log item except Student Some fields can be edited directly in the grid Editing in the Grid The following fields can be edited directly in the grid Done Start End and Notes Click once on the field you wish to edit Type in your changes To save your changes move on to another field or click the SAVE button at the top of the window If you put a date in the End column without checking the Done column the date will disappear when you move to the next item Editing a Single Reading Log Item To view the Reading Log click the Student tab then the Reading Log tab 2 Double click on the entry you wish to Edit or right click over the item and choose Edit from the menu to open the Edit Reading Log window 3 Change any information as necessary 4 Ifthe book has been finished you will want to check the Completed box 5 If you re using Dates checking the Completed box will enable the Completed date fie
204. drop down list Click the Add button to open the add edit window for a new grading scale Enter a name for your grading scale This can be anything you like from 1 to 100 characters Click Save to open the Add Grading Scale Window Enter a letter grade to represent falling grades It can be any 1 4 characters The default is f Courses with failing grades for the year do not receive grade points Set the minimum passing percentage for pass fail courses The default is 60 This means that in a Course using the Pass Fail grading option any average grade that falls below 60 will be given the Fall grade Any average grade that falls at or above 60 will be given the Pass grade Name for Hew Grading Sca Figure 153 Grading Scales Name New Grading Scale 95 Figure 154 Grading Scales Add Grading Scale Window 7 Click the Add Line button and enter the information for your first letter grade and click Save 8 Repeatas needed for the other values in your scale You can add as many lines as you need 9 Glick Save to add the Grading Scale to your list of scales Copying a Grading Scale You may wish to create a new scale using some information from an existing scale The Copy feature allows you create a new scale with all the settings of the existing scale You can then edit the parts of the scale as needed for the newly created scale Right click over the scale you want to start with Choose Copy fr
205. ds will become enabled 5 Make new selection for each checked field 6 Whatever choices you make in this window will be assigned to all the items you have highlighted 7 Click Save to keep your changes click Cancel to exit without saving Mark as Complete Each assignment must be marked as Complete Done in order to register the grade time spent resources used and other pertinent information for the various Tracker reports You can use the right click Mark as Complete Option 3 below to correct the existing Date Completed for any one or more assignments To marka single assignment as completed Option 1 1 Double click on the assignment 2 Check the Completed box A date complete will automatically be entered based on your settings in Tools Options Assignments You may edit this date if you like 3 Click the Save amp Close button or click the Save button and then the Previous or Next icon to move to the next item to be marked Option 2 1 Inthe Assignment grid view click in the DONE box 2 Click the SAVE button at the top of the grid or click on another ilem in the grid A date complete will automatically be entered into the Date Complete field based on your settings in Tools Options Assignments You may edit this date if you like Option 3 In the Assignment grid view right click on the assignment you wish to mark Choose Mark as Complete from the context menu 3 Choose whether to Mark all Items with
206. e Assignments Term 1 Course Ac Pis Poss ar Math Algebra 1 Test 50 35 Math Algebra 1_ Test 100 82 Wath Algebra Test 100 EJ 142 t J Wath Algebra Test T00 78 Test Total 350 275 7857 Ma Algebra T Homework 35 54 Malh Algebra i Homework 1 g Math Algebra 1 Homework 10 g Malh Algebra T Homework 10 E Malh Algebra 1 Homework To 1 Math Algebra i Homework EJ 38 Math Algebra i Homework 25 EJ Homework Total 150 148 8538 Term 1 Math Activity Weighting Weighted Grade Test 70 5500 Homework 9583 30 2860 Tem Grade 83580 Assignments Term 2 Subject Course Activity Pis Poss Pis Earned Grade Mat Algebra i Test 50 25 Math Algebra 1 Test 100 95 Math Algebra 1 Test 1060 72 Math Algebra T Test 100 78 Math Algebra T Test 707 a Test Total 350 EE 76 89 Math Algebra 1 Homework 50 50 Math Algebra i Homework 50 Math Algebra 1 Homework 35 38 Math Algebra i Homework 1 g Math Algebra i Homework 10 10 Math Algebra 1 Homework 10 10 Homework Total 165 T80 5697 Term 2 Math Adivily Total Score Weighting Weighted Grade Test 7688 70 5382 Homework 56 97 30 2808 Term Grade 8291 Yearly Grade Math Algebra 1 83 60 82 91 2 8
207. e Given and Date Due will be different from each other based on the number of days you selected Non school days HVO days and Absent days will not be included in the calculation of Date Due This means that for an assignment created from a Lesson Plan item with a of Days value of 6 and where the Date Given falls on a Monday the Date Due of that assignment will be the following Monday assuming a 5 day school week with weekend days excluded In the Submit Lessons window you have the option to use the of Days value to determine the Date Due or not To do so check the box to Make next Date Given dependent on the previous Date Due used By default when the Date Given field is enabled this option is checked in the Submit window You can choose to use this feature whether you are submitting according to an LP Schedule or via the Use the following days and times option If you choose the Spread evenly over days option the Make next Date Given option is automatically disabled as you ve asked Tracker to ignore the sequence numbers in favor of forcing Ihe create items to fit within a specified time frame e s Starting date for first assignment Day options EET 19 2009 E Use LP schedules 9 use the folowing days and times Choose students to receive new items Slated Days 2Wk C Every Other Day Do you want to skip over special days eat even over _0 days E skp Sch
208. e database from all computers on the home network you have set up the database file must be kept in a shared directory If one computer is always this is the place to create the shared directory 1 Install Homeschool Tracker Plus on each computer in your personal home network Be sure you have the same version of Homeschool Tracker Plus on each compuler in the network Open Homeschool Tracker Plus on each machine in turn and run the following steps Click on Database in the menu bar Click on Utilities Choose Point Tracker to an existing database file Click the CONTINUE button Point to the new location The database in use will change to the one you have selected Click Ok Note To use Homeschool Tracker Plus on non nelworked computers in your home you may want to consider using a USB drive flashvthumb drive as your primary database storage location You can then easily move from one computer to the other with all of your data If you do this you ll want to be sure to have a backup of your database somewhere besides this drive Zipping Compressing Your Database Compressing a file or zipping as it s commonly called is a process of making your file smaller This makes it easier to email the file and of course it takes less space on storage media If you re having trouble with your database and request support we may ask to see the file You ll be asked to zip the database file before attaching it to an email to suppo
209. e fields can only be edited in the grid if there is already a date showing To edit any of these fields click once in the field Make your changes 4 To keep your changes click the SAVE button in the Assignment grid panel or click on another item in the grid 5 To cancel your changes press the escape key on your keyboard before moving away from the field Edi n Item ing a Single Memorizati i Click on the Student tab then on the Memorization tab 2 Choose a Student or All Students from the drop down list 3 Double click on the item you wish to edit or right click over the item and choose Edit 4 Make any changes you would like 5 Click Save to keep your changes click Cancel to exit without saving Group Edit You can edit two or more Memorization Items at a time using the Homeschool Tracker Plus Group Edit feature The only field you cannot edit via Group Edit is Student i Use Shift cick or Ctri click to select Ihe items you wish to edit 2 Right click over the selection and choose Edit to open the Group Edit Memorization Items window 3 Puta check next to each field you want to change for the selected group of items As 1 you check them the fields will become Fate ew iren 4 Make new selection for each checked J field Remember whatever choices you make here will be assigned to all the items you have highlighted 5 Click Save to keep your changes click Cancel to exit without
210. e grids The Lett position will allow you to see more rows at a time the Top position allows you to see more columns at time Student List Sort Order Choose whether to display your student list in alphabetical order or by birth order of oldest to youngest based on the Date of Birth entered in the student profile This setting affect Student drop down and filter lits only It does not affect the order in which items appear in the grids Start Time for Schedule The time you select here will determine the default start time for any LP Schedule or Appointment entry It will also determine the default start time when creating Assignments and Weekly Planner items Enable Spell Check There is a Spell Check utility available in all Directions and Notes field Journal entry fields and the Description fields of Lesson Plan Name Subject Course and Goal features It is an English only dictionary See Spell Check Number of Recent Databases to Remember Homeschool Tracker Plus can assist you in keeping track of where your last used database is located While we strongly urge you to have just one file with all of your information for all your years the program does allow you to maintain more than one file Just like the recently used option in MS Word the File menu of Homeschool Tracker Plus will show you the last 1 9 databases you have accessed Default Journal Font Use this link to set the default font font style and
211. e identical the Order field will determine which item comes first second and last Lesson Plans As noted in the Matching Your Homeschooling Style section above the Lesson Plan feature is for those who like to see everything planned aut in detail at the beginning of the year or term in more areas of study Creating a Lesson Plan allows you to figure out all the details of the work you wish to assign explicit directions combinations assignments that go together such as a Unit Study and the specific pages lessons or chapters to be assigned without having to commit to specific dates or students as yet You can create as many different Lesson Plans as you like Lesson Plans are reusable from year to year and can be exported from or imported into the program See The Import Export Tool You will be the one to determine what information goes into each Lesson Plan You might choose to have a different lesson plan for each area of study lesson plans as unit studies with multiple subjectsidisciplines included elc Some users choose to put an entire grade level of study into the same Lesson Plan You need to use the solution that works best for your homeschooling style And if you change your mind Homeschool Tracker Plus makes it easy to combine multiple lesson plans into a single plan or separate a larger plan into smaller pieces Lesson Plans are just that plans In order to attribute the work time spent resource
212. e level increment might be Chapter 1 Section 1 1 Chapter 1 Section 1 2 Chapter 1 Section 2 1 Chapter 1 Section 2 2 Chapter 1 Section 3 1 Chapter 1 Section 3 2 Chapter 2 Section 1 1 etc 1 To create this type of increment we ll use the First Second and Third Part sections of the Page Lesson Chapter Text Options window Set the Number of Parts spinner to I munberotrams 5 Ei Fret Part use Letters 9 use numbers Lesdno Text StatWEh Increment End wih Leading zeros em p m Second Par Ex The A in Lesson 1A Use Letters Use Numbers StortWth Increment End W h Leading Zeros Third Pat Be he e in Lesson Use Letters Use Numbers Separator start Wh increment 1 rating Tex Gone Figure 71 Assignment Copy Auto Increment 3 Part 2 Inthe First Part section we ll fll aut the fields as we did before choosing to use numbers We ll set the Leading Text to Chapter For four chapters we ll set the Start With field to 1 increment by 1 and set the End With field to 4 3 Now check the box to enable the Second Part in the options window For our example we want to create assignments that display Chapter 1 Section 1 etc so we will choose to use numbers For the separator we ll use the Custom setting and type in Section 4 Inthe Start With enter the first number of the first section 1 5 We ll leave the increment at 1
213. e maintenance list and from all appropriate drop down 7 lists while maintaining its relationship with all linked items lt Unarchive allows you to reactivate previously archived items This wil return the item to the Active filtered view in the maintenance list and to all appropriate drop down lists Reclassify is a special kind of Group Edit that lets you change the Subject selection for linked items that you can then delete the original Subject See EE Used By and Reclassity Used By shows you where the Subject is being used within the program Courses Adding a Course i You must create your Subjects before you enter any Course information See above 2 Click on the Maintenance tab and then the Subjects Courses tab 3 Click the ADD COURSE button to open the Add Edit Course Window Tun a u Se siea 3 Figure 46 Add Edit Course window 4 Subject Choose a subject from the drop down list By default Homeschool Tracker Plus will show you the Subject name currently selected in the Subject Course grid Course Create a name for your Course up to 100 characters 6 Code Enter a unique 1 7 digit alphanumeric Code This is just an abbreviation of the full Course name It can be anything you like Reports will show the full Course name You have the option of displaying the name or code on the Assignment Lesson Plan and Weekly Planne
214. e same name and location each time you will be asked to confirm that you want to overwrite the older file each time you complete this process Unless you feel the need to retain the old backup click YES TTT The destination folder rey has a file by the name et HSPlenner2 mdb Do you tente the fi Figure 34 Database Backup Overwr 8 When the has been copied the Backup Complete message appears The message will also tell you the size of the file created Click OK How Do I Know For Sure that my Backup File is There Trust is an important thing However with something as important as your homeschooling data you get nervous about verifying that the backup was actually created successfully You cannot open the backup file outside of Homeschool Tracker Plus by double clicking on the file the way you would with a Word or Excel fle However you can compare the file size of your backup and your main database When the backup process has completed Homeschool Tracker Plus wil show you a Backup Complete message that shows the location of the backup as well as the size Make a note of the file size You then compare it to the size of the database in use by clicking on Database and then Utilities in the Tracker menu bar If they re the same you know you re good to go ee nen eet rem LI ren oleas ton bebon Figure 35 Database File Size Comparison
215. e the field blank if you prefer Page Break None report wil continue from page to page until complete Subject report will start a new page for each new subject Filter Choose the subjects to include n the report Supplies Other You can print a list of supplies from assignments lesson plan or weekly planner items You can run report for any date range you choose Report will include an alphabetical list of the supplies the quantity information you entered and a check box to help you keep track of what you ve obtained Supplies Report Options Te Serin V V ingre Farrer tome W Lesson Pan tera ALL LESSON PLANS Figure 316 Supplies Report Option Page Options Enter a title for this report You may leave the field blank if you prefer Include Choose which items you want to audit for supply lists If you choose Lesson Plan Items you choose a particular lesson plan or all plans Filter Use the fiters to further refine the items to be audited Time Spent Sessions Other This report will display the amount of time you ve spent studying in various subjects courses You can Group the report by Assignment Location Home Away or by subject status Core Flective If you have disabled both the Time Spent and Sessions fields in Tools Options Assignments this report will be disabled as well 272 Time Spent Sessions Repo
216. e two or more items at the same time Use shift click or ctrl click to select the items you wish to archive Right click over the selection and chose Archive from the context menu Un Archiving a Goal At any time you can choose to move a Goal from the Archive list back to the Active list Click on the Teacher tab and then on the Goal tab Right click over the Goal you wish to move to the inactive list Choose Unarchive from the context menu The Archive box will be unchecked When you return to the Goals grid or change the filter from Active to Archive Only the record will be removed from the Archive Only view 5 You can un archive two or more items at the same time Use shift click or ctrl click to select the items you wish to reactivate Right click over the selection and chose Un Archive from the context menu The Teacher Goals Right Click Menu The Right Click menu is enabled when there is at least one in the grid You can right click over individual item in the grid or over multiple items using Shift Click or Ctri Click New opens the Add Edit Goal window with the Goal Set and Topic matching the one you have highlighted Edit 2 c For single item selection This will open the Add Edit window for that item For multiple item selections This will bring up the Group Edit window from which you may choose to globally edit fields for the selected items Add New D
217. e window Edit opens the Edit window for the Schedule Name selected lt Delete allows you to permanently remove the selected item s from the Edit schedule You will have an opportunity to confirm your selection before Delete deletion occurs Deleted items cannot be retrieved Archive allows you to deactivate the selected item This will remove the Archive item from the Active filtered view in the maintenance list and from all Urerchive appropriate drop down lists An archived LP Schedule cannot be used to Figure 123 LP Schedule submit Lesson Plan items to the Assignment grid Name Right Click Menu Unarchive allows you to reactivate previously archived items This will return the item to the Active filtered view in the maintenance list and to all appropriate drop down lists Weekly Planner In the Weekly Planner section you can set up templates for tasks you assign your student a regular basis Unlike the complete detail of a Lesson Plan item Weekly Planner items are general oullines of the assignments you ll be creating specifically dictating the days of the week you ll be assigning the work and the pattern of pagellesson chapter information to be assigned A Weekly Planner item can be attributed to one specific student or to Students Some use the Weekly Planner only for things like art music PE and co op days Others use it for the majority of their assignments Some choose not to use it at al Item
218. ear start and end dates the days available spent and left will display as N A In the lower part of the screen you wil see a list of your active students along with their number of Days Present Days Absent Hours Time Spent or Sessions for the school year and Average hours or sessions of school per day for the Active Year The Days Present and Days Absent values for each student comes directly from the number of days marked as Present or Absent in the Attendance Calendar See Attendance Hours Time Spent or Sessions information will be displayed based on the type of time you choose to display in the Attendance calendar If you choose not to show hours in Attendance this column will be hidden in the Main Menu See Time Entry Method The Average Hours or Sessions per Day value is calculated by dividing the total hours or sessions for the student by the number of days present Student Tabs Figure 3 Student Tabs You can disable Student tabs for program features you will not be using The Assignments tab is the only one which cannot be disabled as Assignments are the core of your student records Agenda The Agenda provides view of your student s obligations much like a Google Calendar This view is most useful when you have specific start end times for your assignments The Agenda allows you to display all of your student s items in one place assignments chores appointments field trips etc You can view the A
219. eate a name for your new Lesson Plan This will default to the name of the selected LPX file lt You can accept this name as is the default selection lt You can make changes to the name displayed lt You can select an existing Lesson Plan Name from your database in the drop down box If you choose an existing Lesson Plan which already has items in it the new plan items being imported will be added to the existing items in that lesson plan 2 petere rto eser Lesson Pn Figure 270 Import Lesson Plan Plan Name Tab Subjects Courses tab You need to select the Subjects to be assigned to items in this Lesson Plan Courses will be created under the Subject that you choose Figure 271 Import Lesson Plan Subjects Courses Tab This page will ist each subject included in the Lesson Plan you re importing and each Course within each Subject The Import too will look for an exact match between Subjects in the Lesson Plan and your Subjects list Ian exact match is found Homeschool Tracker Plus will suggest using it 27 10 n If there is no match found you will get a choice to Import New Item Whether there is a match or not you may select any Subject name from the drop down list lt Make a selection for each Subject displayed Courses that exist in the Lesson Plan will be created under the Subjects you designate If you already have a Course with the ex
220. ebe 1 08 The 2 week option allows you to specify a pattern m nas 200 which is repeated over every two week period For Contr unes patter example Monday Wednesday Friday of weekone ena astes rennes and Tuesday Wednesday Friday of week two After Sos eveni between start and end tes the 2nd week additional assignments will be copied alternating between the week one and week two Figure 72 Assignment Copy Repeat Over Date Range Day and Date Options Ifyou select the Every Other Day option Homeschool Tracker Plus will automatically count every other calendar day from your Start On date to your End on date placing assignments on alternate days that meet your Holiday Absent and Non School day parameters 4 Enter a Start Date for your copied items 5 If you are using the Date Given field this wil be the first Date Given you wish to use Inthe case of a multi day assignment that is given on one date and due on another the Date Due may be assigned to a non school day or holiday When the Date Given field is disabled or the Date Given the same this wil be the first Date Due you wish to use amp and Date Due of your original item Ifyou want your copies to end on a specific date change the End Date field Otherwise it will default to the same value as your Start Date Now choose your final copy options The tst option Continue
221. ect from the related drop down lists You can reactivate the Course at any time 1 Click on the Maintenance tab and then on the Subjects Courses tab 2 Right click over the Course you wish to move to the inactive list and choose Archive from the context menu The Archive box will be checked lt You can archive two or more items at the same time Use shift click or ctrl click to select the items you wish to archive Right click over the selection and chose Archive from the context menu 3 When you return to the Subjec Course list or change the filter from Active to Archive Only the record will be removed from the Active view Un Archiving a Course any time you can choose to move a Course from the Archive list back to the Active list Click on the Maintenance tab and then on the Subjects Courses tab Change the Filter drop down from Active to Archive Only or Both Right click over the Course you wish to move to the active list Choose Unarchive from the context menu The Archive box wil be unchecked lt You can un archive two or more items at the same time Use shift click or ctrl click to select the items you wish to reactivate Right click over the selection and chose Un Archive from the context menu 5 When you return to the Subject Courses list or change the filler from Active to Archive Only the record will be removed from the Archive Only view Pi nting a List of Courses You can print out det
222. ed the description and any notes entered Field Trip Report Options Page Optone Figure 293 Field Trip Report Options e Page Options Enter a title for your report You can leave this field blank if you prefer Filter Choose which Students Subjects and Courses to include in the report The initial default selections are but your settings from previous reports will be carried over here Field Trip Form Form Here you can create a blank form for your student to use to take notes while on a field trip In the Field Trip grid under the Students tab you can create a Field Trip Form lor a specific trip Here the trip information will be blank Field Trip Form Options Page Options Enter a title for your report You leave this field blank if you prefer Items to Include You can print the page with blank lines to assist your student in note taking or with no lines at Figure 294 Field Trip Form Options The no lines option will display just three lines at the top of the page one for Student name one for Destination and one for Date Line Height Choose between College Rule and Wide Rule These options will only be enabled if you have elected to include Blank Lines Goals Maintenance The Goals List report provides a printout of the Goals you have entered into Homeschool Tracker Plus You can create your own report title and select which Goals to display in the
223. ed directly into the Time Spent field for the selected assignment s This option can be used even if you have disabled the Time Spent field The elapsed time will be rounded to the nearest minute Ifthe Seconds portion of the elapsed time is less than 30 seconds no minutes are added to the total lt Ifthe Seconds portion of the elapsed time is 30 seconds or higher one minute will be added 1B Tne for George ngo Drawing Sentences Lon ae stro 000 LER mm 3 minutes 27 seconds 4 ieee Figure 82 Assignment Timer Multiple Assignments The Order Field The Order field which can be found in the Assignment Lesson Plan and Weekly Planner add edit windows allows you to create custom order in which your assignments will appear in the Assignment grid and assignment reports Simply enter a 1 2 3 etc in the Order field You can sort by the Order field if you like You can set an order in a Lesson Plan or Weekly Planner item as well The assigned order will be copied into the Assignment grid when you submit Lesson Plan or Weekly Planner items If the Start End times field is in use the start time of assignments will take precedence in the ordering of your items so that an assignment with a start time of 8 30 am will precede an assignment with a start time of 9 00 am even if the 9am assignment has an order of 1 and the 8 30 assignment has an order of 2 The start t
224. ed to any particular assignment This feature allows you to include such resources on your Resources by Student report If you wish to create an Additional Resource check the Add Resource box to enable the student list and check the name s as needed 9 The Resource Grid Access the Resource grid by clicking on the Maintenance lab and then the Resources tab Seco Covees Vor AOV Re hme see Figure 205 Resource Grid Panel Collapse Expand Icons ay Use the blue up down arrow icons to collapse or expand all the groupings on this grid You collapse expand individual groupings by clicking the buttons on the grouping headers Homeschool Tracker Plus will not retain your settings when you leave this screen een Choose Columns and Reset Icons 1 Click the Choose Columns icon 2 Check the columns to include uncheck the columns to exclude Column selections will not be visible for features which you have elected to disable in Tools Options Assignments Figure 207 3 Click Save to retain your selections click Cancel to exit without changing your column view Choose 4 Things to remember Columns Icon You can change your selections at any time 1 Excluding a column rom view doss not remove the data stored in that el amp 5 You can reset columns column widths and column ander to hek setings by cick he Reset Columns icon in he Assignment Gr header
225. ed will appear 4 Choose what type of copies you wish to make Same Page Lesson Chapter for this option you can have the same text or no text at all appear in the Page Lesson Chapter field of each copy created Auto Increment Page Lesson Chapter using this option allows you to have Homeschool Tracker Plus automatically increase the Page Lesson or Chapter information for each successive copy created You can create a 1 level Pages 3 5 Pages 6 8 etc 2 level Lesson 1 Part A Lesson 1 Part etc or 3 level Chapter 1 Section 1 1 Chapter 1 Section 1 2 etc increment Type of copy copy Reneat aver date range as Page Lesson Chapter options Same Pape Lesson Chapter for Each Copy Auto oerenent Pagetesson chapter frange V Check this box if you weh to have the inks to attachments From the original tem copie ta the new items Figure 67 Assignment Cop Over Date Range Same Page Lesson Chapter for Each Copy i When you select this option you will be shown a window which will receive the Page Lesson Chapter text for all assignments in this series Type in the text you want to use You can leave the Text field blank if you prefer Figure 68 Assignment Copy Same Page Lesson Chapter Text Options 2 Choose the number of copies you wish to make This defaults to 99 Later you will choose whether to have a date or the number of copies d
226. eduled Holidays V skip absent Days V skio non school Davs ui Make next Date Given dependent on the previous Date Due used qui reck this box you wish to have the inks to attachments from the Sigma tem copied ta the new kema Figure 114 Lesson Plan Next Date Given For the items belonging to the first sequence number in the selection the Date Given will be the same for all assignments created lt Date Due for each of those items will be calculated based on the of Days value for the item For the items belonging to the second sequence number in the selection being submitted the Date Given will be dependent on the Date Due of any items in the previous selection with the same Subject and Course The Date Given will be one school day later than the Date Due of the previous item For example if this is your Lesson Plan Music Theory Lesson T Music Theor Lesson 2 Music Theory Lesson 3 Music Theory Lesson 4 When you submit these four items to the assignment grid at the same time assuming a starting on date of Monday September 7 2009 and a 5 day Monday Friday school week with no holidays within the submit period these will be the resulting Assignments created Fri 9711 2009 Mon 9 14 2008 Tue 9 15 2009 Tue 9 15 2009 Music Theor Wed 9 16 2009 Wed 9 16 2009 Music Theory 100
227. een school years at any time by changing which one is active either from the Maintenance Years Terms area or via the Tools Switch School Year menu Index of Figures FIGURE 1 MAIN MENU Tas FIGURE 2 MAIN MENU VIEW Froune 3 STUDENT FIGURE 4 TEACHER TABS FIGURE MAINTENANCE TASS FIGURE 6 REPORTS Taa FIGURE 7 MAINTENANCE SCHOOL INFO 5 DAYS FIGURE 9 MAINTENANCE YENRS TERMS ADD YEAR FIGURE 10 Toots SCHOOL YEAR CALCULATOR FIGURE 11 5 YEAR CALCULATOR YEAR FIGURE 12 SCHOOL YEAR CALCULATOR CALCULATION FIGURE 13 SCHOOL YEAR CALCULATOR Ser HVO 14 ScicoL YEAR CALCULATOR HVO FIGURE 15 SCHOOL YEAR CALCULATOR TERMS FIGURE 16 SCHOOL YEAR CALCULATOR REVIEW FIGURE 17 MAINTENANCE YEARS TERMS Ficune 18 Yexss TERMS EDIT WITH SCHOOL YEAR CALCULATOR Ficune 19 Yeans Tens Ano Team FIGURE 20 TeRM INPUT WINDOW FIGURE 21 MAINTENANCE STUDENTS FIGURE 22 App STUDENT WINDOW FIGURE 23 STUDENTS GRADE LEVELS Ficune 24 GRADE LEVELS NOTES FIGURE 25 STUDENTS SCHOOLS ATTENDED INPUT WINDOW FIGURE 26 STUDENTS ACTIVITIES amp ACHIEVEMENTS INPUT WINDOW FIGURE 27 ACTIVITIES amp ACHIEVEMENTS ADD TIME FIGURE 28 STUDENTS STANDARDIZED TESTS INPUT WINDOW FIGURE 29 Ser HOUDAY FROM ATTENDANCE Ficure 30 Ser Houpay Input Winoow FIGURE 31 DATABASE LOCATON FIGURE 32 DATABASE BACKUP REMINDER FIGURE 33 DATABASE BACKUP INPUT
228. efer Supplementary Items Choose whether or not you d like to include the number of hours entered for your activitylachievement items Figure 313 Activities amp Achievements Report Options 27 Sorting Choose to list the items in Ascending or Descending order by date Filter Choose which student s to create the report for Student Standardized Tests Other This report provides a way to print out the Standardized Test results lor your student as a separate report rather than as part of the Transcript These items are recorded in the Maintenance Student record under the Standardized Tests tab The items included in the report will have a checkmark in the Show column See Maintenance Info Ancillary Student Information Student Standardized Tests Report Options Page Options Enter a title for this report You may leave the field blank if you prefer Sorting Choose to list the items in Ascending or Descending order by date Filter Choose which student s to create the report for Figure 314 Standardized Test Report Options Subjects Maintenance This is a printout of your Active Subjects displaying the Subject name and any description you have entered in the order in which they appear in the Maintenance Subjects Courses list Subjects Report Options Figure 315 Subject Report Options 27 Page Options Enter a title for this report You may leav
229. effect on our cole this ime as we have incremented by 1 The show Ending Page Range option only affects he ange of the last part n use in this case the second par 10 The Example window at the bottom of the copy options window shows you what the PagelLesson Chapler field wi look ike for the frst assignment created Figure 132 Weekly Planner Auto Increment PLC 2 part Press OK to set the pattern or Cancel to exit the copy window See e 11 Window and Grid Display to continue Creating a three level increment A 3 level increment might be Chapter 1 Section 1 1 Chapter 1 Section 1 2 Chapter 1 Section 2 1 Chapter 1 Section 2 2 etc 1 To create this type of increment we ll use the Fis E S PE NAAA 3 he perseen 2 EG im m four chapters we ll set the Start With field to ee hien Tere and et he ENA WIR ja Now check the box to enable tne Second Pant nen viene Feror we IB want to create assignments that display epis Sin a vt ej d Custom setting and type in Section 4 Inthe Star With enter the first numberof the fist section 1 Figure 133 Weekly Planner Auto Increment Well leave the increment at 1 Each of our lessons had 3 sections so we end with 3 7 complete our set
230. elete tdt c For single item selection allows you to permanently remove the selected item from the database It causes the program to check for items using the Goal you wish to delete You must remove the link in order to delete the goal Deleted items cannot be retrieved Archive For multiple Item selection when you select one or more items and the choose Delete from the right click menu only those Goals which are not attached to an Assignment Field Trip Lesson Plan or Weekly Used By Planner item will be deleted Deleted items cannot be retrieved Use as New allows you to use an existing item to create a new Goal Archive allows you to remove an item from the active view without having to delete it lt Unarchive allows you to return an archived item to the active view Used By allows you to view which items are attached to a particular Goal Use As New Unarchive Goals Right Click Menu The Student Goals Progress Grid Tie Mew Took Dente Hora Narorzasen Sven eso Figure 251 Student Goals Progress Grid Panel Collapse Expand Icons Ry Use the blue up down arrow icons to collapse or expand all the groupings on this grid Youcan gg collapse expand individual groupings by clicking the buttons on the grouping headers Homeschool Tracker Plus wil no retain your settings when you leave this screen pem Choose Columns and Reset Icons 1 Click the CHOOSE COLUMN
231. em All items which can be archived are handled the same way 1 To archive an item go to its Maintenance page 2 Click on a single item or use shift click or ctrl click to select multiple items Right click over the selection and choose Archive from the menu 3 When you leave the grid or change the grid filter from active to archive only the item will be removed from the Active view 4 Please Note When you archive a Lesson Plan Name you are archiving the entire Lesson Plan Archiving while Editing In addition to the above method you can also archive while editing Maintenance items When in Edit made check the Archive box and then click Save Un archiving an Item Al items which can be un archived are handled the same way d To unarchive an item go to its Maintenance page 2 Change the Filler to Archive Only 3 Click on a single item or use shift click or ctrl click to select multiple items Right click over the selection and choose Unarchive from the menu 4 When you leave the grid or change the grid filter from archive only to active the item will be removed from the Archive Only view Spell Check Homeschool Tracker Plus offers an English language spell check dictionary for all Directions Notes and Journal fields throughout the program To Turn on the Spell Check Feature 1 Click on Tools in the menu bar and then Options or press F3 2 Underthe General tab check the box to Enable Spell Check 3 Clic
232. em you wish to edit or right click over the item and choose Edit 154 emen ATE Sed hate Ste SORO Senin War POD M ache ERR SET rg ace tae Ga Eoi et Figure 169 Field Trip Edit Window 4 Make any changes you would like 5 Click Save to keep your changes click Cancel to exit without saving Group Edit You can edit almost any field in two or more Field Trips at a time using the Homeschool Tracker Plus Group Edit feature The only field you cannot edit via Group Edit is Student Group Edit allows you to quickly and easily make changes to the Field Trip entries for all students taking the field trip at one time Choose a particular student or All Students from the drop down list Use Shift click or Ctrl click to select the items you wish to edit Right click over the selection and choose Edit The Group Edit Field Trips window will appear Put a check next to each field you want to change for the selected group of items As you check them the fields will become enabled Make a new selection for each checked field amp Forany drop down list you can type directly in field to create a new item or you can use the pencil icon button next to any drop down list to add a new to that drop down list or to edit the displayed item 7 You can add start end times by checking the Has Time box remove start end times by removing the checkmark in the
233. ems This will return the item to the Active filtered view in the maintenance list and to all appropriate drop down lists Reclassity is a special kind of Group Edit that lets you change the Cours items Used By shows you where the selected Course is being used within the program selection for linked Activities Activities are brief descriptions of the actual type of work to be done an assignment class discussion workbook test etc You may create as many Activities as you d like If you prefer you can limit your Activity list to just one item called school work or whatever else you choose and delete all other entries Activities are stored in the Maintenance area You must have at least Activity listed The Activity Grid You can access the Activity list by clicking on the Maintenance tab and then the Other tab Activities are listed in alphabetical order You must have at least one activity in your list You can enter as many Activities as you would like e Toh 3 Fesovce Stel eo Sstiectn Counen enema Oder Figure 52 Activity Grid Panel Activity Grid Filter The Filter drop down controls which items are displayed in the grid The options are Active Archive Only and Both The default setting for this filter is Active displaying all the Activities that are currently available for use The Archive Only setting shows th
234. ems as desired by clicking the Teacher tab and then the Weekly Planner tab Edit o For single item selection This will open the Add Edit Assignment window for that item c For multiple item selections This will bring up the Group Edit window from which you may choose to globally edit fields for the selected items Delete allows you to permanently remove the selected item s from the database You will have opportunity to confirm your selection before deletion occurs Deleted items cannot be retrieved Use As New is only available for single item selections This option creates a duplicate of the selected record You may then change the record as you wish and save it to the grid Reschedule allows you to designate one or more items to be moved forward or backward in time Other options are disabled Only the selected items will be moved as indicated Start Timer opens a Timer window for the selected assignment s You can then count up elapsed lime from zero or set a specified time limit and count down from that time When counting down you can set a sound fle to be played when time is expired Elapsed time can be copied as text or entered directly into the Time Spent field of the selected assignment s Send to Report allows you to designate specific assignments to be printed to the Assignments Combined Assignment List Daily Task List Goals Met or Scope amp Sequence Report Normal date and Student parameters are disabled fo
235. en mimm Figure 6 Reports Tab Homeschool Tracker Plus provides you aver 30 different reporting options Each report has its own set of options to select what data will be included See Reports Setting up Your School Naming Your Homeschool Your homeschool needs a name The name can be anything you like as long as itis 50 characters or less The name you choose will appear on the Main Menu page on Report Cards and Transcripts and in the footer of your reports Here are some ideas for naming your school Use your own last name The Smith School Proclaim your philosophy or religion In His Steps Homeschool Your street name Main Street Academy Something in your environment Little Creek Learning Center Include your town name the Springfield School Click on the Maintenance tab Click on the School Info tab Enter the information in each field as desired Click SAVE to retain your entries sante Sum Tencer seem mm Seve Gesner Mee ZB Si o 9 FL Geta Cate AOE mee Moonen Bve Faks LORD cal ans ane rake bow masal rian Gee Texter Kale ortie Figure 7 Maintenance School Into Designating School Days the bottom of the School Info screen you will designate your school days This will assist you when marking atlendance copying assignments and submitting Lesson Plan or Weekly Planner items You can always c
236. en the Group Edit window Put a check next to the Attachments field Click the View Edit Attachments link Make your changes ONLY those attachments that are still visible when you are done with your changes will be attached to the selected Printing Attachments You can include the list of attachments in some of the Assignment reports To print the actual attachment file use the program it was created in See Reports Supplies You can create a list of Supplies that will be needed to complete an assignment Supplies may be added to Assignments Lesson Plan Items and or Weekly Planner items If you add Supplies to a Lesson Plan or Weekly Planner item they will be made part of the Assignments created from those items Enabling Supplies If you wish to use the Supplies feature you ll need to enable it in Program Options Turning on this option enables the Supplies field in the Assignments Lesson Plan and Weekly Planner grids 1 To open the Program Options window click on Tools in the Tracker menu bar and then choose Options or press the key 2 Click the Assignments tab 3 Check the box next to Supplies in the Optional Fields list 4 Click Save to keep your changes Creating a Supplies list The process for adding Supplies is the same for all areas of the program so welll look at an assignment here d Add or Edit an assignment and click on the hyperlink in the Supplies field
237. ent Goal to the item s or Archive the Goal rather than delete it Click on the Teacher tab then the Goals tab 2 Right click on the Goal you want to delete lt Ifthe Goal is not linked to any item in the database you ll see a confirmation message Click Yes to delete the Deleted items cannot be retrieved If the Goal is attached to one or more items in your database the Used By window will appear This will show you how many of each type of item are using this goal Double click on the View link to see these items To remove the Goal links you need to edit those items individually or with Group Edit in that item s grid When all linked items have been edited or deleted come back to the Teacher Goals grid Right click over the Goal to be deleted and choose Delete If all links to the Goal have been broken you ll see a confirmation message Click Yes to delete the item Deleted items cannot be retrieved Archiving a Goal If you wil not be using a Goal for the Active School Year but that item may be used again at a future date you may wish to Archive rather than delete the item Click on the Teacher tab and then on the Goals tab Right click over the Goal you wish to move to the inactive list Choose Archive from the context menu The Archive box will be checked When you return to the Goals grid or change the filter from Active to Archive Only the record will be removed from the Active view 5 You can archiv
238. ents together for all students and then lists the students to whom itis assigned Send to Report You can select specific assignments from the Assignment Grid and create custom Assignments Assignment Calendar Daily Task List Goals Met or Scope amp Sequence reports For details on these reports see the individual Report section in this User Manual i Click on the Student tab then the Assignments tab 2 Set your fiters to view the assignments you want to include in the report 3 Use shift click or ctrl click to highlight the assignments to be included Only those items you ve selected will appear on the report You may select items for multiple students if you wish Right click over the selection and choose Send to Report 5 The options window for one of the available reports will open If this is not the report you want to run close the options window and then the preview window and choose one of the other available reports This view of the Reports tab will only show those reports that are available using the Send to Report option 6 Inthe report options window for your selected report certain options will be disabled as those options were determined by the assignments you highlighted Select your options for the report and click OK Click the hyperlink to create a Preview of the report Click the print icon to print the report 0 To exit the special view of the Reports menu click Reset Your selected assignments will no longer
239. es If yau wish to add a holiday to days which already have assignments booked you can use the Reschedule tool to move those items forward or backward in time See Rescheduling Adding a Holiday Vacation or Other Day Earlier in this manual we explained how to create HVO days using the School Year Calculator See Adding a School Year using the School Year Calculator Below we demonstrate how to add HVO days from the Student Attendance area of the program i Click on the Student tab and then the Attendance tab Figure 29 Set Holiday from Attendance 2 Click the Set Holiday button to open the Set Clear All Day Event window 3 Click on the left ight arrow buttons to display the month in which you want to schedule your day s You can click on the Month name to see a list of all months in the Active School Year and click on the month you want to work with Click on a date or click and drag over a range of dates Choose Holiday Vacation or Other in the Type drop down list Tracker makes no distinction between these types they are simply offered to help you keep track of what kind of day you are designating You may enter a description of up to 50 characters Click the Set button Repeat steps 3 7 as many times as necessary to set your days When you have entered all the HVO days you want click the CLOSE button PES Removing a Holiday Vacation or Other Day 1 Click on the Student tab and t
240. esson Chapter Topic Directions and Notes fields Hidden fields will be included in the search parameters The Used and On Columns While all the other columns in the Lesson Plan grid come directly from the Lesson Plan Add Edit window the Used and On columns contain a checkmark and date respectively which are automatically entered when the Lesson Plan ilem is used to create an assignment see below This field can be edited in the grid only when there is already a date showing Grouping and Sorting Just as in the Assignment grid you may choose to group and sort the displayed information in the Lesson Plan grid according to any column heading For full details please see the Using the Grids section Sequence Numbers Sequence numbers set the order of the items in the Lesson Plans grid It allows you to put Plan items in the order you intend to accomplish them You can sel reset sequence numbers to fit your preferences You can reorder sequence numbers as necessary You can have more than one item with the same sequence number to indicate items that should be assigned on the same date Gaps in sequence numbers will not create skips in dates when submitting Lesson Plan items to the assignment grid Only the ordinal pattern is followed from lowest to highest in the Lesson Plan items selected for submitting to the Assignment Grid You can use the sequence numbers in whatever way works best for you Some Homeschool Tracker P
241. essonChaolr ied and your tema i ore Because coring s an AR ranni ption in the 4 function without leading zeros sorting by the Page Lesson Chapter field for assignments ranging from Lesson 1 10 will result in Lesson 1 Lesson 10 Lesson 2 Lesson 3 With the leading zeros in use the list would instead order as lesson O1 lesson 02 lesson 03 lesson 04 through lesson 10 The zeros are only added until there is a non zero entry in the tens place or the hundreds place when using 2 leading zeros or the thousands place when using 3 leading zeros 9 The Trailing Text option at the bottom of the window allows you to add a message to Page Lesson Chapter information For example in a Math assignment series you might choose to assign on the odd or only the even numbered problems You may choose one of these options from the drop down list or choose Custom to enter your own trailing text Or you may leave this option set as 10 Indicate if you wish to show ending page range In our example we are assigning two pages at a time so checking this box will display that the assignment covers pages 1 2 If we uncheck the box each assignment will show just the starting page number for that assignment 11 The Example window at the bottom of the copy options window shows you what the Page Lesson Chapter field wil look like for the first assignment created Press OK to set the pattern or Cancel to exit the copy
242. etermine how many copies are actually created 3 Click OK The text you have entered will appear in the Example box of the Copy window See Completing the Copy Repeat Over Date Range Process to continue Auto Increment Page Lesson Chapter This option allows you to set an incrementing pattern for pages lessons numbers or chapters for the duration of the series You can set up one two or three levels of incrementing Creating a 1 Level Increment one level increment might be Page s 1 5 Page s 6 10 Chapter 3 etc 11 15 etc or Chapter 1 Chapter 2 i To create this type of increment choose the Auto Increment Page Lesson Chapter option in the Assignment copy window Set the Number of Parts spinner to 17 Number of parts 2 Fret part Use Letters 9 Use Numbers Leading Text star with increment End with Leading Zeros Taing Ta show Ending Page Range Dm cal Figure 69 Assignment Copy Auto Increment 1 Part 2 Choose whether you d like to use letters or numbers in your increment label The default option is set 1o use numbers 3 Set your Leading Text from the drop down list Choose from one of the preset options or chose Custom and enter your own text 4 Inthe Start with box enter the first page lesson or chapter number you will be assigning 5 The increment field allows you to specify how many units pass by before the beginning of the
243. exit without saving Deleting a Resource You may only delete resources that are not attached to any Assignment Lesson Plan or Weekly Planner items If the Resource is attached to one of these items you need to Delete the Assignment Lesson Plan or Weekly Planner item s or Assign a different resource to those item s or Choose to Archive the resource rather than delete it see below Deleting a Single Resource To view the Resource grid click on the Maintenance tab and then the Resources tab Right click on the Resource you wish to remove and choose Delete from the context menu 3 Ifthe Resource is not in use A window will appear asking you to confirm deletion Click Yes to remove the ilem from the list click No to leave it in the Resource grid Deleting a Resource does not remove it from the Library 4 Ifthe Resource is in use the program the Used By window will appear and you can Reclassify the connected items to a different Resource so that the one you are working with may be deleted See The Reclassity Feature Deleting Multiple Resources To view the Resource grid click on the Maintenance tab and then the Resources tab Use Shif Click or Ctr Click to select the items you wish to delete Right click over the selection Choose Delete from the menu Click YES to confirm the deletion click NO to exit without deleting If you choose YES only those items which are not attached to any Assignment Lesson
244. exit without saving Editing Weekly Planner Items You may edit any part of any Weekly Planner item Some fields can be edited in directly in the grid make a change to a field filed by a drop down list you ll need to double click on the Assignment to open up the Edit window Make your changes and click the SAVE amp CLOSE button Editing in the Grid The following fields can be edited directly in the grid Use First Use On Last Use On Order Point Possible Time Spent Sessions any of the plan days Directions Notes Last Used and Archive 1 To edit any of these fields click once in the field 2 Make your changes 8 To keep your changes click the SAVE button in the Assignment grid panel or click on another item in the grid 4 To cancel your changes press the escape key on your keyboard before moving away from the field Editing a Single Weekly Planner Item Click on the Teacher tab then on the Weekly Planner tab Choose a Student or All Students from the drop down list Double click on the item you wish to edit or right click over the item and choose Edit Make any changes you would like Click Save amp Close to keep your changes click Cancel to exit without saving Previous Next Buttons If you ve elected to open the Edit window to make changes to an assignment see above you can move to the next or previous item displayed in the grid using the Previous and Next icons in the top right of the window Edi
245. f the Points Possible Points Earned and Grades fields columns When these fields are disabled the Report Card and Transcript features can no longer be used Refer to the Grades Grading Scales amp Weighted Grading section of this User Manual for additional information about this option When this feature is enabled you can give a grade to any or all of your student s work by entering the points possible and the points earned When the assignment is marked as complete Tracker will calculate the percentage grade for that assignment Disabling this option wil Disable the Grade Calculation and Rounding options Disable the Points Possible and Points Earned fields in the Assignment Lesson Plan and Weekly Planner forms Hide the Poss and Earn columns in the Assignment Lesson Plan and Weekly Planner grids lt Hide the grading details in Student Overview Disable the Monthly Progress Report Card Transcript and Grading Scale reports Grade Calculation Choose how your student s grades will be calculated The traditional method is that each assignment is given a percentage grade and then those percentages are averaged together within a Term to come up with an overall grade Alternatively you can choose to calculate a simple grade by dividing the total points earned for all completed assignments in a subject or course divided by the total points possible for those assignments See Grades Grading Scales and Weighted Grading Rounding
246. f you have disabled the Page Lesson Chapter field no duplication checks are made and this option is automatically disabled as well Create items outside active school year Your Active School Year startend dates control what can be viewed in the various grids at any time This reminder will warn you if you are creating an assignment that will not appear in the grids due to the date selections you ve made Mark an assignment as complete without entering a grade If you are using grades and want to be Sure to enter a grade for each and every assignment you ll want turn this reminder on Homeschool Tracker Plus will then let know you know when you re marking an assignment as complete that has the Cm points earned field set to zero when the points possible field is greater than zero It will also give you the option to enter the correct points at that time If the points possible field is set to zero no notification will display This notification wil not appear if you are using the right click mark as complete menu item Submit a duplicate assignment from LP or WP Like the Create duplicate assignment notification above this reminder can warn you when you are about to submit duplicate assignments to a student from a Lesson Plan or Weekly Planner item A duplicate assignment is one that contains the same student subject course activity resource and page lesson chapter information If the page lesson chapter field is b
247. fficulty previewing a report make sure that your Windows default printer and the printer selected in the Reports tab area are the same 5 Alter previewing your report if you need to make changes to your options click the Customize button 6 To create the report click the Print icon PDF Printers amp E Mailing Reports You can convert any report in Homeschool Tracker Plus to an electronic file format that you can email save to print elsewhere To do this you must have a PDF printer driver installed on your computer The PDF file can be saved like any other file for reuse as needed How do I install a PDF Printer Driver You may already have a PDF printer installed on your computer To check open Homeschool Tracker Plus go to the Reports tab and check the Printer drop down list If you don t have a PDF printer installed there are a number of free drivers available on the internet such as www pdi995 com www cutepdl com wwww primopd com 1 Click on a link above or type the URL into your web browser address bar 235 2 Find the Download Now link or button and complete the download 3 When the download window appears click OPEN or RUN not Save 4 The PDF Printer will automatically be added to your list of available printers How Do I Create a PDF file ofa Report Click on the Reports tab Click on a report name This will open the Options window for that report Set your Options as needed and click Ok Se
248. font size for your entries into the Student and Teacher Journal features You can adjust this at any time You can set specific fonts for specific entries or parts of entries in the Journal area Assignment Options These are program options which primarily affect the Assignment add edit window and grid You may wish to review the Assignment area of this manual before reviewing or as you review these options Date Complete Default When you mark an assignment as completed Homeschool Tracker Plus will automatically fil in the Date completed field You may choose to have this automatic entry be either the current dale your computer s system date or the date due that was originally attributed to the selected assignment s The Date Due selection is helpful when you are marking items completed for a number of different dates at the same time You can edit the Date Completed for any assignment at any lime Figure 322 Program Options Assignment Starting Day for Plan Sub This option allows you to determine the default Start On date for the Lesson Plan and Weekly Planner submit features The actual starting date can be changed as part of the submit process Your choices are Today your computer system date Tomorrow your computer system date 1 Days of the week if you select Thursday the Start On date will be today if today is Thursday or the very next Thursday after today Subject List
249. for submission Manual This option allows you to designate specific days of the week on which to book the selected assignments for reschedule You may choose Selected Days set a 2 week pattern or choose Every Other Day When using the Manual option Tracker will place your first day items the first new date due The next day s item from your selection will be placed on the next available date and so on There will be no gaps in date usage The Manual option is your best choice in most cases especially when rescheduling items backwards to an earlier date than their original date due Make It Fit On or Before When you choose the Manual reschedule option you have an additional feature available to you Check the box to Make it fit on or before and enter a date The effect of this choice is to make all of the rescheduled items fit between the First New Date Due and the Make it fir date you just entered Without this choice selected Homeschool Tracker Plus will continue to move your items into the future even it that puts them beyond the Active School Year With Make it Fit you can force the items to be rescheduled on dates within the Active School Year Items that were previously on different dates may be rebooked onto the same date in order to meet the parameters of your settings The Confirm Rescheduled Assignments Window Alter you set your options Homeschool Tracker Plus provides a preview to the changes that a
250. formation as needed You may place this copy in a different Lesson Plan by choosing a new Lesson Plan Name from the Plan drop down lis 5 Click Save to keep your changes click Cancel to exit without saving Lesson Plans with Tests at Regular Intervals Supplemental video available on this topic You may wish to create a Lesson Plan where tests or other evaluations are intermingled with daily lessons at regular intervals Math curricula are the most likely candidates To do this you ll want to first determine what the patter is how many lessons occur before the first test and then how many lessons between each successive test Sometimes a pencil and paper can be helpful with this step 1 Write out the Lessons in the order you intend to assign them Place the Tests or other repeating items where they belong in the list 2 an ordinal number next to each item as show in the diagram 3 These ordinal numbers will be the Sequence numbers you use for the Lesson Plan Items to be created 4 Navigate to the Teacher tab and then the Lesson Plans tab 5 Make sure the Lesson Plan you want to work with is displayed in the Plan drop down box If necessary you can create a new plan name by clicking the pencil icon next to the drop down and choosing Add New 6 Well start by adding the Tests to our Lesson Plan Click the Add button 1 Lesson i 2 Lesson 2 3 Lesson 3 4 Lesson 4 5 Lesson 5 6 Lesson 6 7 Lesson 7 8 Less
251. g ADDING A MEMORIZATION TEM EDITING A MEMORZATION ITEM Editing in the Grid Editing a Single Memorization Item Group Edit Mark os Complete Mark os Incomplete COPYING MEMORIZATION ITEMS 182 182 182 182 182 182 183 184 184 185 185 185 185 186 186 186 186 186 187 187 187 188 188 188 190 190 190 191 192 192 192 192 192 192 193 193 193 193 194 194 194 194 Single Item Copy Multiple Item Deleting a Memorization Item PRINTING Memorization ITEMS Tet MEMORIZATION RIGHT CUCK MENU CHORES CHORES Filter ADDING A CHORE EDITING A CHORE DELETING A CHORE ARCHING A CHORE Un ARCHIVING A CHORE PRINTING CHORES CHORE RIGHT CLICK MENU AGENDA Tet AGENDA DISPLAY Drop Down Lists Date Options The Calendars Choose items to Display View Multiple Students Additional Filters APPOINTMENTS AND CHORES Adding Appointments Adding Chores Group Edit for Appointment or Chore Start End Times Making a Single Copy of an Appointment or Chore Copying Appointments or Chores EDITING ITEMS WITHIN AN AGENDA MOVING ITEMS WITHIN AN AGENDA To change the date To change the start end times Sranr END Times COPYING ITEMS TO ANOTHER AGENDA DELETING ITEMS IN AN AGENDA PRINTING AGENDAS AGENDA RIGHT CUCK MENU overview Tet Ovenview Collopse Expand Icons The Drop Down lists Grading Indicators 194 195 195 195 195
252. g over a range of dates Double click on the item you wish to edit or right click over the item and choose Edit Make any changes you would like Click Save amp Close to keep your changes click Cancel to exit without saving Edi ing a Teacher Journal Entry Click on the Teacher tab then on the Journal tab Choose a Category or All Categories from the drop down list Choose Dates click on a single date or click and drag over a range of dates Double click on the item you wish to edit or right click over the item and choose Edit Make any changes you would like Click Save amp Close to keep your changes lick Cancel to exit without saving Previous Next Icons If you ve elected to open the Edit window to make changes to an assignment you can move to the next or previous item displayed in the grid using the Previous and Next icons in the top right of the window Edit the assignment Click SAVE to commit your changes Then click the Previous or Next icon to move to the next item mw Ex u Tent eem usum Pn me 79 Rhen ent Atachmerts B dd U Undre Figure 265 Journal Prev Next Icons Deleting a Journal Entry 1 Click on the Teacher tab then the Journal tab or click on the Student tab and then the Journal tab 2 Use the Category drop down and date selectors to narrow the displayed items 3 Right click over an entry or use shift click or ctrl click to
253. genda for on student or for multiple students in a side by side view See Agenda Assignments The Assignment is the central point of record keeping in Homeschool Tracker Plus All of your hours grading and goals reports will be generated from the information you enter in the assignment grid Assignments can be created individually or in groups using the Copy lesson Plan or Weekly Planner features You can copy multiple assignments to other students There are a number of customizable options for viewing items in this area See Assignments Attendance In this area you can view the attendance details for each individual student as well as the holiday and vacation notations The All Students view will display the initials for any student marked present or absent on that date See Attendance Field Trips All fied trips are displayed on this page Individual field trips can be assigned to one or more students Field Tips are displayed in date order with the most recent items showing first Field Trips also appear on the Student Assignments page See Field Trips Goals Progress If you are using the Goals feature Teacher Goals this area will display the goals being worked on by each individual student when those goals are attached to an assignment field trip memorization or reading log item that falls in the Active School Year The Goals feature and this tab may be disabled in the Tools Options Assignments area See
254. grades to be calculated This field simply provides a way for you student to let you know that his work is ready to be checked Completed You must check this box the Done box in the grid view to have the time spent sessions and grade for this assignment count towards the various reports that are available for your portfolio as well as Report Cards and Transcripts Date Completed This is the date on which the assignment was actually finished This date will dictate which day will be marked as Present in the Attendance calendar when using Auto Attendance It also controls the date on which grades Time Spent and Sessions will be reported The field is enabled once the Completed box is checked Allow Reschedule At times you may need to change the original Date Due of an assignment If you are moving a number of assignments you might wish to use the Reschedule feature If you uncheck this box this item will not be affected by the Reschedule process and will remain on its originally scheduled Date Due For each assignment this box is checked by default allowing the item to be rescheduled as needed The Assignment Grid Access the Assignment grid by clicking on the Student tab and then the Assignments tab There are four drop down lists on the header that you can use in addition to the Student selector above to control which items will be displayed in the grid These controls can be displayed across the top of the grid or along
255. has been Disabled If you have elected to disable the Page Lesson Chapter field Tools Options Assignments then you will not be able to use the auto increment functions of the copy window You can still make multiple copies over a date range but the only option for number of copies will be to set a starting and ending date range Creating a Duplicate Assignment To quickly create an exact duplicate of a particular assignment you can utilize the Use as New feature Double click on any assignment and click the Use as New buttor and choose Use as New right click over an assignment 9 Figure 74 Assignment Use as New message will appear letting you know you are now looking at the COPY of the original assignment Make any changes you like Click Save amp Close to keep your changes and create the assignment click Cancel to exit without saving No changes will be made to the original assignment Copy to Lesson Plan You may take assignments you ve already created in the grid and preserve them for later use in a Lesson Plan 1 2 Click on the Student tab then the Assignments tab Set the filters to isolate the items you wish to copy to the Lesson Plan u w E Use shift click or ctrl click to select the items you wish to Right click over the selection and choose Copy to Lesson Plan cecimbnctyasehnsehe ra Choose the Lesson Plan Name from the drop down lst LE te worst eat
256. he Courses Report Basic and Expanded The Basic option allows you to print out the details of the active courses you have entered Grouped by subject it lists each course in alphabetical order by course title Its intended purpose is to give you a way to review the information you ve entered for each course The Expanded Course List report produces a document that is suitable for inclusion in a portfolio or as adjunct to the Transcript It provides a list of Courses per student and only includes those Courses for Which the student has at least one completed assignment in the Active School Year Courses Basic Report Options Figure 289 Cours List Report Options Basic Page Options Enter a title for your report The default tlle is Courses You can leave this field blank if you prefer no title on the report Report Style Choose the Basic style 2 Include Activities Lists which activities you have selected to include for this course If you have set up weighted grading the weight assigned will also be displayed Course Description Displays the description you have entered for the selected courses Credit Units Choose to display the number of credits available to be earned upon successful completion of the Course Calculation Option Choose to display the way in which credit hours are awarded Grading Scales Always included Only the name of the grading scale wil appear Resources Not
257. he Student drop down lists are disabled as well insuring that the Student can only view or edit his own assignments The Title bar will show you which student is signed into the program Allowing Student Login Click on Tools then Security Double click on a Student Check the Allow Student Access box Click OK Students who have access can view their own assignments view field trips view attendance fully access the Reports tab Students who have access cannot anything under the Teacher or Maintenance tabs p By choose Suet Logi eder aol have aces te ve e ard aeons eee erem tse rd Sued pom Dre ADD TONAL avene 1 Can Changs Any Joncnrert Fld cr Ad Now cogar E Con change Dae aun Can Change Dae Due EE Gn Charge Date T Con Change Forts Poste and Con Change Tine Spr Series 1 Can Change ban tene Figure 354 Edit Security Privileges mark their own assignments as complete via the I m Done field fully access the Memorization Reading Log and Agenda grids change dates grades or any other fields in assignments other than the m Done field other students information Removing Student Login Click on Tools then Security Double click on a Student Uncheck the Allow Student Access box Click OK to keep the change click Cancel to exit without saving Security Level Student Passwords You c
258. he increment field allows you to specify how many units pass by before the beginning of the next assignment For example if each assignment in a workbook is two pages long new assignment would start on every second page and you d set the increment to 2 6 Inthe End With field enter the last page lesson or chapter to be included in this assignment series For example if the last page in our workbook is page 30 we would enter 30 in the End With box 7 The Leading Zeros option defaults to zero You can add up to three leading zeros to the First part of your increment The purpose of this field is to allow you to sort an assignment list by the Page Lesson Chapter field and keep your items in order Because sorting is an alphanumeric function without leading zeros sorting by the Page Lesson Chapter field for assignments ranging from Lesson 1 10 will result in Lesson 1 Lesson 10 Lesson 2 Lesson 3 With the leading zeros in use the list would instead order as lesson 01 lesson 02 lesson 03 lesson 04 through lesson 10 The zeros are only added until there is a non zero entry in the tens place or the hundreds place when using 2 leading zeros or the thousands place when using 3 leading zeros 8 The Trailing Text option at the bottom of the window allows you to add a message to the Page Lesson Chapter information For example in a Math assignment series you might choose to assign on the odd or only the even numbered problems You may choose
259. he security feature Figure 351 Security Options Only the Teacher will be able to access the Security Options page If you leave the options at this point the following will be in place An additional splash screen appears upon opening Homeschool Tracker Plus listing Teacher and NO Students lt The Teacher retains full access to the program No Student will have access to the program As you grant access to Students their names will be added to the Choose User splash screen PES Using the Security Features Ifyou have security turned on you will be presented with the Log In to Homeschool Tracker screen This screen will only list Teacher and any student who has been enabled with the Allow Access feature Click on a user s name in the list provided Ifa password is set you will see the password prompt While using the program with security enabled you can switch from one user to another by selecting File Login Glick user s name belowio login Figure 352 Security Log In Security Level Master Password This feature lets you set a master password used by the teacher each time you log in lt If you do not share the password information none of your students will have access to the program unless you Allow Access for them see below Students should not be allowed to use the master password lt You can assign individual passwords to s
260. hen an attachment exists an asterisk wil appear in the field grid view Supplies Optional You may create a list of supplies needed to complete the assignment When supplies have been added an asterisk will appear in the field in grid view Page Lesson Chapter Text Options Required In this area you re going to set the pattern that Homeschool Tracker Plus will follow to complete the Page Lesson Chapter field when Assignments are created from this Weekly Planner item Choose from Same Page Lesson Chapter or Auto Increment Page Lesson Chapter If you want to leave the Page Lesson Chapler field blank in the created Assignments select Same Page Lesson Chapter and leave the field blank The Example field will show you the information to be displayed in the Page Lesson Chapter field of the next Assignment to be created Selected Days 2 Wk Required Check off the days of the week when you normally intend to assign this work All days including non school days will be available to you These are the days on which Assignments will be created via the submit process If desired you can set a 2 week pattern to be followed When the actual assignments are created you can choose whether to start with Week 1 or Week 2 Has Time Start End Times Optional Use these fields to set specific starting and ending times for the Assignments that will be created from this Weekly Planner item Order Optional You may enter a number in t
261. hen the Attendance tab 2 Click the Set Holiday button Mie Navigate to the month you want to work with Figure 30 Set Holiday Input Window Click on the date or click and drag over a range of dates Click the CLEAR button Repeat steps 3 5 needed When you have removed the HVO dates you want click the CLOSE button Nomao The Homeschool Tracker Plus Database Where is My Data Stored You do not need to be a computer whiz kid to make the most of Homeschool Tracker Plus but there are a few things you should understand about how the program works Your dala the information you enter into the program is maintained in a file that is separate from the Homeschool Tracker Plus program files The default name of the database is HSPlanner2 mdb Finding Your Database Location When you start Homeschool Tracker Plus for the first time you will be asked where you would like to store the database The suggested location is your Documents folder but you may select another location or put it ina sub folder of Documents if like If you not remember where the database is stored you can follow the directions below t have Tracker tell you where itis 1 Click on Database in the menu bar 2 Click on Utilities 3 The file location will be displayed pd Selectancpon below Securing Your Data with Backups Figure 31 Database Location Your homeschool records are important and you wi
262. her tab Choose Chores from the drop down list 0 Change the Filter drop down from Active to Archive Only or Both Right click over the Chore you wish to move to the active list Choose Unarchive from the context menu The Archive box will be unchecked When you return to the Activity list or change the filter from Active to Archive Only the record will be removed from the Archive Only view 7 You can un archive two or more items at the same time Use shift click or ctrl click to select the items you wish to reactivate Right click over the selection and chose Un Archive from the context menu Printing Chores Once you have created your chores and entered them into the Agenda you can print them out for your student using the Agenda or Dally Task List reports See Reports The Chore Right Click Menu You can right click over an individual Chore or use shift click or ctrl click to select multiple activities and right click over the selection to perform various functions on the selected item Add New allows you to add a new item to the grid Edit opens the Edit Chore window for that item Add New Delete allows you to permanently remove the selected item from the Edit database Die Ifthe Chore is in use Homeschool Tracker Plus will search the database for any items that have been attached to the selected Chore Archive You can then reclassify those items by choosing a different Chore so the Unarc
263. highlight multiple entries to be removed and right click over the selection 4 Choose Delete or press the Delete key on your keyboard 5 Click OK to confirm deletion click Cancel to exit without deleting Deleted Items cannot be retrieved Printing Journal Entries You can print out any Journal entries by date or by category See Reports The Journal Right Click Menu Right click over a singe or use shift click or ctrl click to select multiple items lt Add New allows you to add a new item to the grid Es Edit For single selection only this wil open the Add Edit window for the Delete selected tem Figure 265 Journal Delete allows you to permanently remove the selected item s from the Right Click Menu database You will have an opportunity to confirm your selection before deletion occurs Deleted items cannot be retrieved The Import Export Tool Supplemental video available on this topic Homeschool Tracker Plus provides an Import Export tool to help you share certain aspects of your database with other Homeschool Tracker Plus users You can choose to import or export Lesson Plans 2 Library Items Goals and Holidays Exported files have a file extension of LPX and the default save location is to your desktop although you can choose a different location if you wish When importing or exporting Lesson Plans you must not share copyrighted materials Please honor the licensing rights of o
264. his column wil sort within the confines of your previously sorted column 5 You may sort as many columns as you like jp arrow for How do I remove sorting Click on any column headers with sorting arrows until the arrow disappears completely For ascending columns that is two clicks For descending columns that is one click Selecting a different item in a drop down list Option 1 1 Click on the down arrow to the right of the field 2 Scroll to find the item you want to use 3 Click on the item you want and it will be displayed in the field window option 2 1 Tab or cick into the field ze 2 Begin typing the name of the item The letters you enter wil be compared to the existing list rm of activities and as the typed letters match any all entry ccs Paper in the list youll see the possible matches As you Ree continue typing the options will be further limited to match the typed letters lt Once you see the item you wish you may continue Figure 332 Selecting a ferent item in a typing until itis the only option listed or use the down drop down list arrow to highlight the item you want and then press the Tab or Enter key to select that item This option is only available for fields which have the pencil icon button Column Order and Size You can change the order in which columns appear in each of the grids even choosing to hae cols at you dont ree Some
265. his field to indicate the order in which assignments are to be completed within any given sequence The Order will be carried over when you prepare Weekly Planner items for the Assignment grid Points Possible Optional Grading is optional in Homeschool Tracker Plus If you do not wish to grade your student s work leave the Points Possible field set to zero To grade work enter the points possible for the assignment There is no Points Earned field in a Weekly Planner item When the item is used to create an Assignment the Assignment itself will have the Points Earned field Time Spent Optional Enter the total number of time in hours and minutes that the student is to spend on the Assignments created from this Weekly Planner item Sessions Optional Instead of tracking actual hours and minutes some users prefer to track sessions with one session being awarded each time that class is held Enter the number of sessions to be awarded to Assignments created from this Weekly Planner item First Use On Optional You can limit the date range in which given Weekly Planner will be used Click the down arrow to enable the calendar and choose the first date on which you want to create an Assignment Last Use On Optional You can limit the date range in which a given Weekly Planner Item will be used Click the down arrow to enable the calendar and choose the last date on which you want to create Assignment
266. hive original item can be deleted Deleted items cannot be retrieved a For multritem selection any Chores not in use will be removed Recossiy Activities which are used within the database will remain Used By Archive allows you to deactivate the selected item s This will remove the Figure 227 Chore item from the Active filtered view in the maintenance list and from all Right Click Menu appropriate drop down lists while maintaining its relationship with linked items lt Unarchive allows you to reactivate previously archived items This wil return the item to the Active filtered view in the maintenance list and to all appropriate drop down lists Reclassify a special kind of Group Edit that lets you change the Chore selection for linked items Used By shows you where the selected Chore is being used within the program Agenda Supplemental Video available on this topic The Agenda is a graphical representation of the work your student is to accomplish Each Active Student in your database will have his own Agenda page You can view one student at a time all students side by side or any selected students you choose You can create Appointments and Chores for any student You can also choose to display Assignments Attendance Field trips Holidays Journal notations Memorization Items Reading Log items and Term start end dates from other areas of the program You can turn off the Agenda tab in Tools O
267. hoose to book an assignment on non school day if you wish The default settings have Monday through Friday set as school 90 voy 2 Tamer days V eder 1 Puta checkmark next to the days on which you generally hold mr school during the week Non school days can then be automatically skipped when creating Assignments or entering Attendance records Figure 8 School days 2 Click the SAVE button to retain your entries Create a School Year and Terms When you install Homeschool Tracker Plus there will be a default school year entered You can create custom year to meet your needs You must define a start and end date for each school year These dates will set the basic parameters for the data you can view in the program grids as well as the limits for your reports Your school year can be as short as 1 day or as long as a decade or more Most users will create a school year that covers 9 12 months You will create new school year for every year that you homeschool Your School Years may overlap it you like However if there are graded assignments In the overlap period they wil be credit to the Report Card and Transcript for both years Adding a School Year using the School Year Calculator Supplemental video available on this topic The School Year Calculator will walk you through the process of creating a school year selecting your school days setting terms and setting up holid
268. ick the Submit button to put these items into the assignment grid click Cancel to exit without copying the listed items Copying Multiple Assignments to Another Student You can copy any group of existing assignments to any other students 1 Use Shilt cick or Ctri click to select two or more assignments 2 Right click over the selection and choose Copy 3 Check the names of students you want to copy to lt Make your selections carefully as there is no preview window prior to submitting If you include the student s you are copying from they will end up with duplicates of the selected assignments 4 Click the Submit button to make the copies click Cancel to exit without copying Copy Over Date Range You can use the Copy Repeat over Date Range function to create multiple assignments for one or more students at a lime These assignments can have the same Page Lesson Chapter information for each assignment created or you can incrementally increase the Page Lesson Chapter information for each entry You can create these copies while entering a new assignment or from an existing assignment from the grid 1 To activate the Copy menu right click on any single assignment and click Copy or click on the COPY button in the Assignment Add Edit window 2 Click on Repeat over Date Range 3 Check the students for whom you want to create copies If you are using Courses only the students attached to that course in the assignment being copi
269. ignations are al treated in the same way We offer the different types to help you differentiate between the types of day off you are scheduling For most users a Holiday would be Christmas Thanksgiving etc a Vacation would be Winter Break Spring Break etc and they might choose to use an Other day designation for Grandmom s visit something else that does not fit neatly into the other two categories Throughout the User Manual Help File and Training Videos these are generally referred to as HVO days Journal a free entry area under the Student and Teacher tabs Each Journal entry requires a date category and title You may use this area for anything you like Lesson Plan a planning feature which allows you to set up all the work you intend to assign to one or more students throughout the year You can create as many different Lesson Plans as you like You can put items from multiple disciplines into the same Lesson Plan or create a separate plan for each Lesson Plans can be used over and over again You can import Lesson Plans created by other Tracker users You can export your own Lesson Plans to share with other Tracker users Library the central repository for all of your Resource and Reading Log items Quick entries can be made using the ISBN lookup feature which requires an open internet connection on the computer where you are working at the time Long Term Assignment any assignment where there is a difference of
270. ill be checked by default lt Check uncheck days as desired 2Wk This allows you to set up 2 wk pattern such as MWF for week 1 T TH for week pattern that meets your needs The second set of days will be enabled All school days will be checked by default Check uncheck days as desired The submit process will begin with the first week selections proceed to the second week selections and then repeat the process with the first week until all selected Lesson Plan items have been submitted lt The Starting Date will be applied to the first week of dates If that date is beyond the last day of the week selected then the second week will be used first For instance if the first day selected in the week 1 is Friday and your Staring On date is a Saturday then the 2 pattern will begin with week 2 Every Other Day Ali days will be disabled Homeschool Tracker Plus wil assign items on Every Other Day beginning with the Starting On date entered above and skipping over Holidays Absent and Non School days as you have selected m Starting date for first assignment Choose students to receive new items Do you want to skip over special days Day options January 12 2009 B Use LP schedules 9 Use the flowing days and times Selected ays C Every Other Day E spread evenly over 5 days TE Skip Scheduled Holidays Make next Date Given dependent on the skip ab
271. ime will always be the first consideration for ordering items Alter the Start time or if that feature is not in use Homeschool Tracker Plus will use the entry in the Order field to determine the display of assignments for a specified date If two items have the exact same start time the end time will determine order If the end times are also the same then Tracker will use the Order field to sequence them If two items have the same Order value then Tracker will use the order of your Subjects in the Maintenance Subjects Courses grid to sequence the items The default order of this list is alphabetical but you can alter that if you wish See Subjects Courses and Activities Example Start End times in use Siar Time EndTime Order Subject 8 00 am 5 00 am 2 English 8 00 am 9 30 am 1 Math 8 30 am 9 00 am 0 An In the above example the start time of each item takes first precedence The English item will appear before Math because the end time of the English assignment comes first even though the Order field implies that the Math item should precede it The Art item comes last because it has a later start time than the others Example No start end times or identical start end time values Start Time End Time Order Subject 8 00 am 9 00 am 0 An 8 00 am 3 00 am 1 Math 8 00 am 9 00 am 2 English This time since the start end times for all three assignments ar
272. ing a Grading Scale to a Course 139 WHAT ls WEIGHTED GRADING 140 Setting Up Weighted Grading 140 How much should I weight each activity 141 The Practical Effect of Weighted Grading 141 Weighted Activities with no Completed Graded Assignments 144 PRINTING GRADES 144 ATTENDANCE 5 FULL OAY AND HALF DAY PRESENT OPTIONS 145 The ALL STUDENTS View 145 ENTRY IN THE ATTENDANCE CALENDAR 146 To Select a Time Entry Option 146 Entering Manual Hours in the Attendance Calendar 146 Entering Sessions or Time Spent on the Attendance Calendar 147 MARKING ATTENDANCE 147 Auto Attendonce m How Do I Turn On Off Auto Attendance 147 Manually Marking day as Present or Present X day 147 Marking a day as Absent Removing a Present or Absent Entry Recalculate Present VIEW ASSIGNMENTS FROM THE ATTENDANCE CALENDAR PRINTING ATTENDANCE FIELD TRIP ANATOMY OF A FIELD The FIELDTRIP GRID Collopse Expand Icons Choose Columns and Reset Icons The Drop Down Lists The Search field Grouping ond Sorting ADDING A FIELD TRIP FIELD TRIPS AS ASSIGNMENTS Emne Fab Taip Editing in the Grid Editing a Single Field Trip Entry Group Edit The Field Trip ond Assignment Group Edit DUPLICATING A FIELD TRIP MARKING A FIELD as COMPLETE DELETING A Feto TRIP Deleting from the Field Trip grid Deleting using the Assignment grid Deleting from the Agenda Fo TRIPS Tet FIELD TRIP RIGHT CUCK MENU
273. ion and chose Un Archive from the context menu Printing Weekly Planner Items You can print out the Weekly Planner items for any selected students See the Reports section for details The Weekly Planner Right Click Menu Use As Nen You can right click over an individual item in the Weekly Planner grid or over View Aasignmente multiple items using the Shift Click or Ctr Click procedures outlined above archive Add New brings up the Add Edit Plan Item window Figure 142 Weekly Plann Copy allows you to copy the selected item s to one more Students Right Click Menu 05 Edit For single item selection opens the edit window for the selected item For multiple item selection opens the Group Edit window Delete allows you to permanently remove the selected item s from the database You will have opportunity to confirm your selection before deletion occurs Deleted items cannot be retrieved Use As New creates a copy of the selected record You can then change the record as you wish and save it to the grid for the same Student or a different Student It is enabled for single selection only lt View Assignments will bring you to a special Assignment grid view showing all Assignments with the same Student Subject Course Activity and Resource as the selected item It is enabled for single item selection only Archive allows you to remove an item from the active vie
274. is Course both in the Active and previous School Years 10 Be sure to click SAVE in order to apply the weightings you ve created How much should I weight each activity It depends on what is important to you the Course your curriculum your umbrella school if you report to and possibly your student s strengths and weaknesses Generally the larger a portion of the course work the activity covers the higher the weight assigned So research papers are more than journal entries test more than quizzes etc The only unbreakable rule is that all your weights within a course need to equal exactly 100 The Practical Effect of Weighted Grading To see how Weighted Grading can make a difference in your student s overall grade we will take the examples from above for Averages and Sum Earned Possible grading and add the weighting component For our Algebra 1 Course Test will carry a weight of 70 of the overall grade and Homework will account for the other 30 of the overall grade Examples for Weighted grading using Averages Assignments Term 1 Ma Algebra 1 Test 50 35 70 00 Math Algebra 1 Test 100 82 82 00 Malh Algebra 1 Test 100 EJ 80 00 Math Algebra 1 Test 100 78 78005 Test Total 310 00 Ma Algebra T Homework 38 EJ DAGA Math Algebra 1 Homework 10 8 90 00 Mal Algebra 1 Homework 10 g 90 00 Math Algebra i Homework 1 g 90009 Math Alge
275. isplay just seven lines at the top of the page one each for Student Title Author Grade Level Pages ISBN and Time Spent Line Height Choose between College Rule and Wide Rule Figure 307 Reading Log Form Options These options only exist if you have elected to include Blank Lines Reading Log Time Spent Other In this report you can show the amount of time your student has spent reading the books in his Reading Log It wil pull information from the Add Time entries of the Reading Log items You can choose to report Time Spent or Sessions You can choose to include completed or incomplete items You can group by Date or by Title Reading Log Time Spent Report Options Spent Fields to nete EL Figure 308 Reading Log Time Spent Report Options Page Options Enter a title for your report You can leave this field blank if you prefer Grouping Choose to group by Date or Title Show Choose whether to display Time Spent or Sessions These options will be limited by your settings in Tools Options Assignments Fields to Include Choose whether or not to include the number of pages read per day ems to Include Incomplete items choose to include incomplete items without a start date with a start date or both check both boxes Complete items choose to include complete items without a finished date with a finished date or both check both boxes Filter Choose whi
276. it Sometimes you may find it necessary to alter your existing lesson plan to get more work done in fewer days The Make it Fit option helps you do that If you re going to use this option you might want to first COPY the lesson plan items into a new plan that your original plan remains intact but that is up to you See Working with a Lesson Plan Copying to New Plan above for instructions on that procedure Once you have the items in the plan you want to work with Select one or more items in the Lesson Plan using shift click or ctrl click to highlight the items Right click over the selection and choose Change Sequence Numbers Choose the Make it Fit option Enter the sequence number you want to start with Enter the number of days The number you enter here will be the highest sequence number used in the process Each sequence number will be used between your Start With and number of Days value lt Your Number of days must be equal to or less than the total number of items in the Lesson Plan that you want to resequence Since a gap between sequence numbers has no meaning in the Lesson Plan Submit process you cannot create gaps with the Make it Fit tool lt For example if you are working with 15 items and you choose to Start With 1 and set your number of days to 3 Tracker will resequence the selected 15 items putting 5 items as Seq 1 5 items as Seq 2 and the last 5 items as Seq 3 lt The overal
277. it Units For the Combined format you may choose whether to include Credit Units and or Letter Grades Deselecting both will simply provide a list of subjects and courses studied Percentage grades are only an option for display in the Full Page Transcript style 2 Supplementary Items GPA Credit Summary You may choose to display Credit Unit and GPA summary on the 2nd page of the Transcript The Credit Unit Summary will display each Subject and the number of total credits earned for each of the most recent six years included in the report as well as an overall total credits per subject The GPA Summary will display the GPA for each the most recent six years included in the report as well as an overall average GPA for the years of the Transcript Schools Attended unchecking this option will prevent inclusion of any Schools Attended information even if that information is set for inclusion in the Maintenance Student record Activities and Achievements unchecking this option will prevent inclusion of any Activities and Achievement information even if that information is set for inclusion in the Maintenance Student record I you include Activities amp Achievements you can also include any hours entered for those items Standardized Tests unchecking this option will prevent inclusion of any Standardized Test information even if that information is set for inclusion in the Maintenance Student record Signa
278. it each item or use Group Edit to enter the appropriate time The Recalculate Time Spent tool allows 22020707 you update the Time Spent field quickly in all these ES instances 0 1 Click Tools in the menu bar samomo Lime U 2 Click Recalculate Time Spent snag oateove 20 2000 3 Enter a Starting and Ending date The default dales ar asus the start end dates of your Active School Year 4 Select the status of assignment to be changed Incomplete Complete or Both 5 You can further refine your selection by choosing selected Students Subjects Courses Activities and or Resources These are selection statements items displayed must meet all criteria selected Ifyou have disabled Resources this option will be 5 Figure 64 Recalculate Time Spent grayed 6 Click Recalculate The progress bar wil tell you how many assignments are being audited When the process is complete you ll be returned to the grid you were last viewing Copying Assignments Supplemental video available on this topic Single Copy You can copy any one assignment to any other student s You can create the copy while entering the original assignment or from an existing assignment from the grid 7 erate sect rou wano nava tinet he Gran tun cosest to na tene Figure 65 Assignment Single Copy 1 To activate the copy menu right click over an assignment and cli
279. ive The Both setting shows all Chores whether they are Active or Archived Adding a Chore 1 Click on the Maintenance tab then on the Other tab 2 Choose Chores in the Select Table to Edit drop down 3 Click the ADD button at the top of the grid The Add Edit Chore window will appear 4 Enter a name for your Chore up to 100 characters 5 Inthe directions area you can add any details about the chore that you want These directions can be included when Figure 225 Add Edit Chore Window printing chores in the Daily Task List report 6 Click Save to keep the new Chore click Cancel to exit without saving 9 Editing a Chore 1 2 3 Click on the Maintenance tab then on the Other tab and choose Chores from the Select Table drop down Right click a chore Make any changes needed to the Chore title or directions Click Save to keep your changes click Cancel to exit without saving Deleting a Chore Chores can only be deleted if they assigned to any Student in the Agenda When a Chore is already in use you must first delete the Chores from the Agenda or use the Reclassily feature to put a different Chore i 1 its place To view the Chore grid click on the Maintenance tab and then the Other tab and choose Chores from the Select Table drop down list Right click over the Chore you want to remove and choose Delete or press the Delete key on your keyboard Ifthe Chore is in
280. ivisions will be determined by the number of hours you choose to display per page either in 15 minute 30 minute or 1 hour increments Daily 1 page per day One page will be created for each date in your selected date range Weekly 1 page All seven days of the week will be displayed Report shows days in column format Weekly 1 page alternate This view provides a different weekly view with large boxes for Monday through Friday and a shared box for Saturday Sunday Each entry will show on just ane line You may find this helpful as a weekly chore and or appointment chart Weekly 2 pages Splits the Weekly 1 page view across 2 pages Sunday Monday and Tuesday will appear on page 1 Wednesday through Saturday will appear on page 2 Days appear in columnar format 2 Weekly 2 pages alternate Uses the larger blocks of the Weekly 1 page alternate view across 2 pages Each block is one full page width Weeks always begin on Monday Monday to Wednesday wil appear on page 1 Thursday through Sunday will appear on page 2 Details A plain vanilla listing of the Agenda report We believe that the Daily Task List will give you pleasing results than this option Print Color Choose how you d like the report to appear The Black and White option uses the least amount of toner If you re using a color printer the Color option will display the colors that you see in the report Preview window
281. ivities which are used Z within the database will remain Figure 54 Activity Archive allows you to deactivate the selected item s This will remove the Right Click Menu item from the Active filtered view in the maintenance list and from all appropriate drop down lists while maintaining its relationship with all linked items lt Unarchive allows you to reactivate previously archived items This will return the item to the Active filtered view in the maintenance list and to all appropriate drop down lists Reclassify is a special kind of Group Edit that lets you change the Activity selection for linked items See The Reclassify Feature Used shows you where the selected Activity is being used within the program Assignments The center of all things in Homeschool Tracker Plus is the Assignment These are the tasks that you give your student to complete math lessons spelling tests wriling assignments science experiments ete You can choose to create your education plans ahead of time or add details after the fact The degree of detail is up to you as well You can enter each and every task attempted and completed by your student just a representative assignment for a week month or term worth of work All of your hours grading and goals reports will be generated from the information you enter in the assignment grid which is found under the Student Assignments tab Assignments can be created directly in the
282. k reference material website software etc If you are using the ISBN entry method this field can be completed automatically Type Required Define the type of resource you re entering book reference CD etc The Resource type will default to the first item on your Maintenance Other Resource Type list You may choose a type from the drop down list or use the pencil icon button to add a new Resource Type or edit an existing Resource type can be simply book or you may prefer to note Fiction Non Fiction Book Magazine etc it s entirely up to you how diverse your Resource Type list becomes Custom Optional This field gives you another way to identity a library item It is an alphanumeric field that will hold up to 250 characters Author Optional 200 characters If you are using the ISBN entry method this field can be completed automatically Publisher Optional 200 character limit If you are using the ISBN entry method this field can be completed automatically ISBN Optional 20 character limit The International Standard Book Number or ISBN is a 10 or 13 digit number assigned to the book You can enter the ISBN with or without dashes For details on creating items using ISBN entry see below Call Number Optional 20 character limit The library call number for the book If you are using the ISBN entry method this field can be completed automatically Note Entries from the I
283. k SAVE 9 mel Figure 342 Spell Check Option To Use Spell Check i Type into a Directions or Notes field If you mistype the misspelled or unrecognized word will be underlined in red If your screen display is set to 120 dpi the red line will run through the misspelled word You can right click over the misspellings to see the suggested corrections If you see the word you meant to type click on it to change your text 4 Ifthe word was typed as you intended you can click Add to Dictionary so that Homeschool Tracker Plus will recognize the word the next time 5 Ifthe word is mistyped but you can t find a suitable replacement in the suggested list click Spell Check to open the Spelling Errors Found window Select a word from the suggested lst or type your own entry into the Change To field Click Change or Change All 8 Toleave the word as itis click Ignore Once Ignore All or Add to Dictionary pa p Date Due Ay Vm LL Ena ba30 N Ports o Port am E Sess E E gore Al Spel heck LII Figure 243 Spell Check in action E Used By and Reclassify Supplemental video available on this topic In Homeschool Tracker Plus it is easy to discover which items a Resource Activity Subject Course etc are linked to with the Used By feature The Reclassify feature is a type of Group Edit which assists you i
284. k to select multiple entries and then right click over the selection 2 Click Delete in the menu options 3 Click OK to confirm deletion Click Cancel to exit without deleting Deleted items cannot be retrieved Deleting using the Assignment gri 4 Right click on any single entry or use shift click or ctrl click to select multiple entries and then right click over the selection 2 Click Delete in the menu options 3 Click OK to confirm deletion Click Cancel to exit without deleting Deleted items cannot be retrieved Deleting from the Agenda 1 Right click on any Field Trip entry 2 Choose Delete in the menu options 3 Click OK to confirm deletion Click Cancel to exit without deleting Deleted items cannot be retrieved Printing Field Trips You can print out a list of completed Field Trips for any selected students You can also print a form which the student can use to make notes while on the field trip See Reports The Field Trip Right Click Menu The Right Click menu is enabled when there is at least one item in the grid You can right click over an individual item in the grid or over multiple items using Shift Click or Ctri Click lt New allows you to add a new item to the grid Clicking this option will Add New bring up the Assignment Add Edit window Edit For single selection This will open the Add Edit Assignment window for that item Use As New For multiple item selectio
285. ked When you return to the Lesson Plan Name list or change the filter from Active record will be removed from the Archive Only view to Archive Only the You can un archive two or more items at the same time Use shift click or ctrl click to select the items you wish to reactivate Right click over the selection and chose Un Archive from the context menu Printing Lesson Plans You can print all or part of any Lesson Plan for review or posterity See Reports Lesson Plan Right Click Menu You can right click over an individual item in the Assignment grid or over multiple items using the Shift Click or Ctrl Click lt Add New allows you to add a new item to the Lesson Plan Clicking this option will bring up the Add Edit Lesson window e Copy 12 For single item selections use the Copy Lesson Plan ltem window to make as many copies as you like with or without incrementing the Page Lesson Chapter designation for each created item TI e Form lile tem selections You can copy the selected Lesson 7 Plan ems lo a diferent Lesson Plan m Edit Delete For single item selection This will open the Add Edit Lesson window for that item c For multiple item selections This wil bring up the Group Edit window from which you may choose to globally edit any number of fields for the selected items Moke User Delete allows you to permanently remove the selected item s from the SOROR Mo OM
286. l 6 Click Save to keep your changes click Cancel to exit without posting to the Reading Log ing Time to a Reading Log Item 1 Once Reading Log Item has been created and saved to the Reading Log grid you can edit that item to add Time Spent Sessions and Pages read information 2 Click on the Student tab and then the Reading Log tab 3 Double click on the entry you wish to edit or right click over the items and choose Edit from the menu to open the Edit Reading Log Item window 4 Click the Add Time button Figure 199 Reading Le Add Time Entry Window Figure 200 Reading Log Add Time 5 Enter a date for the entry 6 If desired enter the number of pages or a range of pages read on that date 7 7 Enter the Time Spent or Sessions These fields are enabled based on your selections in Tools Options Assignments If both Time Spent and Sessions have been disabled only the Date and Pages fields will be active 8 Click SAVE to add the time entry to the Reading Log item 9 You may edit a Time entry at any time by double clicking on the entry in the Reading Log Edit window Group Edit You can use the Group Edit feature of the Reading Log grid to make changes to any field for two or more Reading Log items at the same time 1 Glick on the Student tab and then the Reading Log tab 2 Use Shift click or Ctri click to select the items you wish to edit 3 Right click over the selection and choose Edit to
287. l You can enter anything you lke in this space Your notes may be printed in report format Journal entries can be viewed by date or by category See Journal Lesson Plans The Lesson Plans area of Homeschool Tracker Plus provides a place for you to plan out work you intend to assign to your students without committing to specific dates Lesson Plans are reusable from year to year with one or more students See Lesson Plans LP Schedules The LP Schedule allows you to set up day ime patterns for Homeschool Tracker Plus to follow when submitting items from a Lesson Plan to the Assignment grid You can create as many different schedules you like See The LP Schedule Weekly Planner The Weekly Planner feature provides an alternative planning method to the Lesson Plan area Weekly Planner items are templates of the work you intend to assign to your student s See Weekly Planner Maintenance Tabs Fie New Tools Help TIC SES Figure 5 Maintenance Tabs Library The Library is the repository of all books texts videas ete that are used within Homeschool Tracker Plus it can include items you own items you hope to own one day items you need to borrow at some point etc Items from the Library wil be used in the Resource and or Reading Log areas See Library Resources Resource is any ilem used as part of your curriculum Resources can be tied to specific subjects courses for organizational purposes
288. l items created in that Lesson Plan and subsequently attached to all Assignments created from those items You may attach additional goals to any individual Lesson Plan items as well Ad ga Lesson Plan Name You may choose from any of the three ways listed below to create your Lesson Plan Names Option 1 1 Click on the Maintenance tab then the Other tab and choose Lesson Plan Names from the drop down list orbs m Figure 88 Lesson Plan Names Maintenance Grid 2 Click ADD 3 Enter the Plan name 4 You can enter a description or objectives for the Lesson Plan if you like pu 5 Click the Choose Goals link to add Goals which wil be tied to all items created in the Lesson Plan Click Save 7 Repeat as necessary These items wil now be available to you in Ihe Plan drop down list on the Lesson grid Option 2 1 Click on the Teacher tab and then the Lesson Plans tab Tab or click into the Plan drop down list in the Lesson Plan grid header area This will highlight the displayed Lesson Plan Name Type in your new Lesson Plan Name Press Tab Homeschool Tracker Plus will ask you if you wish to add the new item Click YES to accept the new Plan Name The new Lesson Plan Name will now appear in the Plan drop down lis field IL will also appear in the Maintenance Other Lesson Plan Names list and it will be available in all other Lesson Plan Name drop down lists Figure 89 Add Lesson Pla
289. l original order of your items will be maintained as the items are split up 6 Inthe lower half of the window you need to choose which items you want to change The first selection will cause Homeschool Tracker Plus to compress only the items you have highlighted in the grid The second selection will cause Homeschool Tracker Plus to change all items with a sequence number equal to or higher than the number indicated This will default to the sequence number of your first selected item You can change that value if you wish This allows you to select just one row and have the changes applied to that item and all that follow without having to select them first 7 Ifyou have several items on the same sequence number and you want to change your Lesson Plan that each item has a distinct sequence you can use this option to accomplish that Choose a Start With value of 1 and have the number of days equal to the number of items in the plan Submitting Lesson Plan Items to the Assignment Grid All Lesson Plan Items will eventually become Assignments You can submit items one at time or in groups There are two methods for submitting these items Submitting according to an LP Schedule and Submitting according to days and times you indicate during the submission process To view the Lesson Plans grid click on the Teacher tab and then the Lesson Plans tab Choose a Lesson Plan from the Plan drop down list Set the Subject drop down lis
290. lank Homeschool Tracker Plus will not check for duplicates The duplication check includes all assignments in the database not just the ones in the Active School Year If you have disabled the Page Lesson Chapter field no duplication checks are made and this option is automatically disabled as well Ask me are you sure when submitting from preview grids In a complex database such as the one Homeschool Tracker Plus uses an undo button is not practical This option allows you to set a reminder to prevent clicking through submitipreview screens without reviewing the items to be created This reminder requires typing in YES Show list of library item due every time you start the program For borrowed library items you can enter a date when the item is due to be returned By checking this box Tracker will open a reminder window showing which items are due to be returned each time you open the program are included in the listing if their date due falls within the number of days between today s dale and the value entered below for the return reminder You can print a list of these items either from the pop up window or from the Reports tab of the program Default Library Return Reminder When you have a borrowed item in your Library you can enter the date the is to be returned Homeschool Tracker Plus can generate a Borrowed Due list for you via the Tools menu or the Reports tab Use this option to set the n
291. le the Home Away option of the Time Spent Sessions report Attachments Enable or disable your ability to add attachments to assignments field trips reading log items lesson plan items weekly planner items journal entries or resources See Attachments Disabling this option will Disable the Attachments link in the Assignment Lesson Plan and Weekly Planner forms Hide the Attachments column in the Assignment Lesson Plan and Weekly Planner grids Date Given There are three date fields in every assignment you create Date Given Date Due and Date Completed The Date Due and Date Completed fields are required The Date Given field is optional You will want to enable this field if you want to be able to assign a task on one date and have it due on different date Disabling this option will Disable the Date Given field in the Assignment form Hide the Date Given field in the Assignment grid Hide the Date Given field in the Lesson Plan and Reschedule preview windows Disable the of Days field in the Lesson Plan form Goals Creating goals allows you to outline what you hope to accomplish in the coming year You can create as many different goal sets as you like by grade level by student by year etc Disabling this field also turns off the Student Goals Progress tab the Teacher Goals tab the Goals report and the Goals Progress report See Goals Disabling this option wil Hide the Student Goals Progress tab
292. lection is for All Subjects All Courses and All Activities and All Resources Selections made here will be carried over into all other selection areas until you change those selections here or in the options window for a different report 3 Date Range Choose whether you want to display assignments based on Date Due Date Given or Date Complete Then Select your date range There are a number of quick entry date options available to you based on the dates for the year current term or week Or you may choose Custom to set Figure 60 Assignments your cun data range Custom Filter Options 4 Assignment Types Choose whether to display Incomplete assignments Complete assignments or both by checking the boxes 5 Click OK to set the filer click Cancel to exit the menu without resetting filters When you return to the grid view the Student Subject Course and Dates Calendar filters will be disabled The Filter will display Custom All other functions of the grid remain intact The Custom Filter lock on the grid will be retained until you change the option in the Filter drop down list or exit Homeschool Tracker Plus Tie Nen Tros Mee resna sMIWTES 1 1234587 1 0 Jl i2 14 EIL Figure 61 Assignments Custom Filter Effects The Search field Supplemental video available on this topic You can search among your assignments within the pa
293. lick on the Maintenance tab and then the Library tab 2 Use shift click or ctr click to select the items you want to add to the Resource grid 3 Right click over the Library item and choose Create Reading Log Se Lt Figure 188 Create Multiple Reading Log Items from Library The top part of the window shows the titles you have selected the lower half of the window you ll add the information pertinent for the Reading Log Items Choose a Student Set dates goals attachments and notes as pertain to all the titles selected Click Save Go to Student Reading Log to make any required changes to the individual items Deleting a Library Item 1 Click on the Maintenance tab then on the Library tab 2 Double click on the item you wish to remove and click the Delete button or right click over the item and choose Delete 3 You can delete multiple items at once using Shift click or Ctri click to select the items Right click over the selection and choose Delete 4 Click YES to confirm deletion click NO to exit without deleting Deleted items cannot be retrieved Archiving a Library Item If you will not be using a Library item for the Active School Year but that item may be used again at a future date you may wish to Archive rather than delete the item i Click on the Maintenance tab then on the Library tab 387 Right click over the Library item you wish to move to the inactive li
294. ll want to keep them secure A great step towards meeting that goal is to create regular backups of your database Homeschool Tracker Plus has a bull feature to assist you in the process Backing up your database simply means making a copy of the database to a secure location If your database is stored in your Documents folder on your computer s hard drive you will want your backup stored on a flash drive or other removable media Why Because if you keep your backup on the hard drive and the hard drive fails you will have lost both the original and the copy Setting the Homeschool Tracker Plus Backup Reminder 1 To open the Options menu press the key on your keyboard or click on Tools in the Homeschool Tracker Plus mero bar and inon ciek on Optone dinis coco HN MN NN 2 Click the Backups tab 3 Check the first box to have Homeschool Tracker Plus Gea sere ens Sor aise remind you to create a backup on a regular basis V Renn Mee se tic 4 Selthe number of days between reminders anything from Pop aman Pachap Remis i 18 1 every day to 30 once per month an Ta Show Res iin an de 5 Choose whether you want the reminder to appear when cepa Evy Tow Vou opening or closing the program Als 6 Click SAVE to keep your settings Now Homeschool Tracker Plus will remind you to backup as you requested You can always opt nat to back up at that time If you do not make a
295. lude in the report Detail Progress Grades This report can be an alternative format for printing incomplete or complete assignments If you run the report for more than one student at a time all the students will be combined in the same area This report can also be used to show completed graded assignments Detail Progress Report Options Page Options Enter a title for your report You can leave this field blank if you prefer tems to Include Choose to include Incomplete and or Complete items Ifyou choose Completed items you can elect to include only those completed items which have been graded points possible and points earned Fields to Include Choose which of these fields you d like to include Page Break Options None the report will continue from page to page until completion Date Due a new page wil be started with each new Date Due 2 Figure 292 Detail Progress Report Options Grouping You can group by Date and then Student or Student and then Date Filter Choose which Students Subjects Courses Activities and or Resources to include Field Trips Assignments The Field Trip report creates a list by Student of all rips taken within a given date range While Field Trips will appear on the Agenda Assignments Combined Assignments and Daily Task List reports this report give the detail of the trip that you have entered It includes the date of the trip the SubjecCourse assign
296. lus users like to set Sequence numbers to mirror the week of school they are in and have the last digit mirror the day of that week For instance a sequence number of 11 would signify Week 1 Day 1 while a sequence number of 124 would signify Week 12 Day 4 Creating a Lesson Plan The Lesson Plan Name Belore you can add a lesson plan item you need to create a Lesson Plan name A plan name can be the name of a Resource Unit Study Student year etc For example Susie 4th Grade Algebra Il Unit Study Egypt The History of US 2nd Grade Science etc Plan names will be listed in alphanumeric order so you might choose to put the grade level at the start each so that you can easily find what you re looking for The bottom line is that the of the Lesson Plan is only for your use so you should call it something that makes sense to you You can add a Lesson Plan Name in the Maintenance Lesson Plan Names grid or directly into the Lesson Add Item window If you have a number of plan names to enter the Maintenance list is the best place to do so Along with a name for your Lesson Plan you can add specific Plan Objectives and or Default Goals The Objectives area is a free text area which you can use in any way that you choose such as a brief outline of what will be included in the Lesson Plan Plan Objectives can be printed out in the Lesson Plan report Default Goals are goals which will attached to al
297. ly Planner items to which it is linked 4 Click Save to keep your changes click Cancel to revert to the previous version of the entry Group Edit You can use the Group Edit feature of the Resource grid to make changes to any field for two or more Resources at the same time 1 To view the Resource grid click on the Maintenance tab and then the Resources tab 2 Use Shi click or Ctri click to select the items you wish to edit 3 Right click over the selection and choose Edit to open the Group Edit window Figure 211 Group Edit Resource Window 4 Puta check next to each field you want to change for the selected group of items As you check them the fields will become enabled 5 Make your new selections for each checked field 6 Remember whatever choices you make here will be assigned to all the items you have highlighted 7 Click Save to keep your changes click Cancel to exit without saving e Use As New In general you only need one entry for each Resource If the same item will be used for more than one Course you might choose to create a copy for each individual Course i To view the Resource grid click on the Maintenance tab and then the Resources tab 2 Right click on the item you wish to copy 3 Choose the Use as New option A reminder will appear telling you you re looking at a copy of the original item Click OK 4 Make any changes that you like 5 Click Save to keep your changes click Cancel to
298. m Ifyou uncheck the Goal Set name the entire goal set will be un linked lt If you uncheck the Area Discipline name all goals under that area discipline will be un linked If you uncheck an individual goal that item will be un linked 5 Click Save to keep your changes click Cancel to exit without saving Bes Goals and Group Edit in other Grids 1 You can link Goals to multiple Assignment Field Trip Lesson Plan item Memorization Task Reading Log entry or Weekly Planner items using Group Edit feature in those grids 2 Select the items you wish to edit using shift click or ctrl click 3 Right click over the selection and choose Edit to bring up the Group Edit window 4 Check the box to the left of Goals to enable the field 5 Click on Choose Edit Goals Only the goals for the first item in your selection will appear as linked 6 Check or uncheck the goals you want to attach to the selected items 7 Click Save You ll be returned to the Group Edit window Click Save or check another area to edit 8 Allitems wil now be linked only to the goals you have just selected If olher goals were previously attached to one or more items those goals will be removed in favor of the new selections You may only delete Goals which are not linked to any Assignment Field Trip Lesson Plan or Weekly Planner item If the Goal is attached to one or more of these items you need to Delete the linked item s or Assign a differ
299. m in the Lesson Plan grid When it s time you just pick the next one or two or ten items on the list and submit them to the Assignment grid You can even enter your Goals and Topic information when entering the items into the Lesson Plan grid In Weekly Planner you enter one item for each Subject Course Activity Resource combination You then enter the lesson number you want to start on the maximum lesson number you want to assign and the days of the week you generally assign that task When you go to prepare your week you click a few buttons make some minor changes as necessary click Submit and you have created a week or more worth of assignments for your students So which am I supposed to use Some users will use only one or the other based on the type of planning they prefer Many others will use both features for different parts of their curriculum Don t feel pressured to use both or even either of these features if they don t meet your methods The beauty of Homeschool Tracker Plus is that it affords many options but you don t have to take advantage of them all Use the features of Homeschool Tracker Plus which make your homeschooling planning easier not the ones that stress you out Lesson Plan is great for the steady predictable things you do Most Math curricula for example work well as Lesson Plans You can work out all the lessons and tests in order and then never have to give it a thought again just submit each item
300. m selection This will open the Add Edit window for that item o For multiple item selections This will bring up the Group Edit window from which you may choose to globally edit fields for the selected items Unarchive Delete fedt For single item selection Homeschool Tracker Plus will search the Used database for any Assignments Lesson Plan or Weekly Planner tems that mure 712 _ Resource have been attached to the selected Resource You can then reclassify those Hight click Menu items by choosing a different Resource so the original item can be deleted Deleted items cannot be retrieved c For multiple item selection only those Resources which have not been used for any Assignment Lesson Plan or Weekly Planner item will be removed from the list Deleted items cannot be retrieved Use As New is only available for single item selections This option creates a copy of the selected record Archive allows you to deactivate the selected item This will remove the item from the Active filtered view in the maintenance list and from all appropriate drop down lists while maintaining its relationship with all linked items lt Unarchive allows you to reactivate previously archived items This wil return the item to the Active filtered view in the maintenance list and to all appropriate drop down lists Reclassity is a special kind of Group Edit that lets you change the Resource for Assignments Lesson Plan and Weekly Planner items
301. mes or include Plan Objectives and Goals Lesson Plan Names Report Options age Core Te Leen Pan Names Page Options Enter a title for your report You can leave this field blank if you prefer tenets rale Items to Include Choose whether or not to include the Plan Objectives and Goals in your list Status Choose to include Active Lesson Plans Archived Lesson Plans or both Library Items Figure 300 Lesson Plan Names Report Options Maintenance You can print out a list of the items in your library grouped and sorted to meet your needs Choose the information you want to include about each listed For a custom list of library items see the Library section specifically the Right click menu section Library Items Report Options Title Enter a tille for your report You can leave this field blank if you prefer Grouping 1 Select a grouping from the drop down list The default selection is Alphabetical Your selection will be maintained until you change it Grouping 2 You may select a secondary grouping if you like Your selection will be maintained until you change it The selection made in Grouping 1 wil not be available in Grouping 2 as you cannot group by the same category twice Additional Sort You may choose yet one more category to sort on Selections made in Grouping 1 and Grouping 2 will not be available Fields to Include Choose which fields you d like to display in the repor
302. meschool Tracker Plus will remember the last report selected Setting Options See the specific reports below for an explanation of the options available Student Subjects Course Activity and Resource Options 1 Many of the reports allow you to choose specific Students Subjects Courses Activities and or Resources 2 Click any of the hyperlinks to make your selections The default setting for each is All These settings are retained through the program wherever these options exist 3 The Subject Course Activity Resource options are inclusive So if you choose a Subject of Math and a Course of The War in Europe you re likely not to get any results as your Math subject probably doesn t have a History course assigned to it 4 These filters are the first thing you should check if your results are not as expected You may have forgotten to reset them between reports Previewing a Report Alter selecting your report options click OK This will bring up the Preview toolbar 3 Use these tools to make any changes you like to margins page orientation fonts choose a date range etc 4 Click the hyperlink to load a preview of your report You must have at least one printer definition installed in order to preview report lt If you do not have an actual printer you can use a PDF printer driver see below lt The Preview window will use the parameters of your Windows Default printer to generate the report preview If you re having di
303. ms lt Hide the Start and End times fields in the Assignment Field Trip and Weekly Planner grids Topic The topic field gives you a place where you can enter a brief description of the assignment basic facts covered etc Topics for completed assignments can be printed out in the Scope amp Sequence report See Topics Disabling this item will Disable the Topic field in the Assignment Field Trip Lesson Plan and Weekly Planner forms Hide the Topic column in the Assignment Field Trip Lesson Plan and Weekly Planner grids Disable the Scope amp Sequence Report Attendance Options These options deal specifically with the Attendance function Refer to the Attendance section of this User Manual for additional information about their function in Homeschool Tracker Plus m m Jihan rat a amor sorte J hemete ot mert on oat conie m Tee Spent Tre rey Trae Soen om Coie eere __ Figure 323 Program Options Attendance Automatically set present on completed Assignments This is the Homeschool Tracker Plus aulo attendance feature When enabled dates will be marked as Present on the Student s attendance calendar when an assignment is marked as completed for that date You may manually mark additional dates as Present as well See Attendance ally set present V day when If Auto Attendance is turned on you can also set a present option When enabled dates will ma
304. n ess Choose Columns and Reset Icons 1 Click the Choose Columns icon 2 Check the columns to include uncheck the columns to exclude Column selections will not be Visible for features which you have elected to disable in Tools Options Assignments Figure 127 3 Click Save to retain your selections click Cancel to exit without changing your column view Choose 4 Things to remember Columns Icon 02 You can change your selections at any time Excluding a column from view does not remove the data stored in that fiel You can reset columns column widths and column order to their original settings by click Figure 128 the Reset Columns icon in the Assignment Grid header Reset Columns Icon The Drop Down Lists Student Choose whether to view items for All Students or one particular student Subject Choose All Subjects or one particular subject Course Choose All Courses or one particular course Filter Choose to view Active items Archived items or Both The Search Field You can search among your Weekly Planner items within the parameters of your drop down settings Search text will compare against Subject Course Activity Resource Page Lesson Chapter Topic Directions and Notes fields Hidden fields will be included in the search parameters Grouping and Sorting Just as in the Assignment grid you may choose to group and sort the displayed information in the Weekly Planner grid according
305. n Name sene Option 3 Click on the Teacher tab and then the Lesson Plans tab Click the button with the pencil icon to the right of the Plan drop down field and choose Add New Enter the name of the new Lesson Plan Name in the Activity Add Edit window Click SAVE to keep the new Lesson Plan Name The new Lesson Plan Name will now appear in the Plan drop down lis field IL will also appear in the Maintenance Other Lesson Plan Names list and it will be available in all other Lesson Plan Name drop down lists naona Ad ig a Lesson Plan Item There are four ways to bring up the Add Edit Lesson window Click the Add button at the top of the Lesson Plan grid Press the F10 key Right click in the grid and choose Add New Click on New in the Homeschool Tracker Plus Menu bar then Lesson Plan Item See Anatomy of a Lesson Plan Item above for a description of each field The drop down lists will be filed with the default entries The Plan field entry will be taken from the selected Plan you are viewing Fill in each field as desired The only required fields are Plan Subject Activity and Sequence Number Click Save amp Close to add the Lesson Plan to the grid 23 Editing Lesson Plan Items You may edit any part of any Lesson Plan Item Some fields can be edited directly in the grid To make change to a field filled by a drop down list you ll need to double click on the lesson plan item to open up the
306. n a window which will receive the Page Lesson Chapter text for all assignments in this series Type in the text you want to use You can leave the Text field blank if you prefer 2 Choose the number of copies you wish to make 3 Click OK The text you have entered will appear in the Example box of the Copy window See Setting Figure 93 Lesson Plan Copy Sequence Number and Completing Copy Pracess to Samo PLC Text Options continue Auto Increment Page Lesson Chapter The second option allows you to set an incrementing pattern for pages lessons numbers or chapters for the duration of the series You can set up one two or three levels of incrementing Creating a 1 Level increment Aonetevel increment might be Page s 1 Cetemm tUe o 5 Page s 6 10 Page s 11 15 etc or E a Chapter 1 Chapter 2 Chapter 3 etc 1 To create this type of increment choose the Auto Inerement Page Lesson Chapter option in the Assignment copy window Set the Number of Parts spinner to 1 2 Choose whether you d like to use letters numbers in your increment label The default option is set to use numbers 3 Set your Leading Text from the drop down list Choose from one of the preset options or chose Custom and enter your own text Figure 94 Lesson Plan Copy Auto Increment 1 Part In the Start with box enter the first page lesson or chapter number you will be assigning T
307. n changing a field across multiple types of items at once The Used By and Reclassify features be utilized for the following types of items Activities X X X Assignment Locations X X Resource Locations X X Chores X X Resource Types X X Courses X X Resources X X Goals X Students X Journal Categories X X Subjects x x Lesson Plan Names x x The Used By Feature i In any Maintenance list that supports this feature right click on the item of your choice and choose Used By 2 The Used By window wil list all the different types of items which could be associated with your selection Double any row to view the selects The View column wil have a link for any Tables with YE ede cae linked items The Table column will change based on the type of items selected The tems column wil show you how many connections dicis exist 3 Double click on the View link to see the items that are liked 4 The Used By Reclassly Selected ems window wil appear You can group the grid by any one or more column headers Figure 344 Used By Window Use the Collapse and Expand icons to collapse expand groupings Sig Te Misto tente H Subject Te Masi Sites Selected items will receive the following 9 gt Figure 345 Used By Reclassify Selections
308. n let your student use this area to write his impression of the book or you can enter your own notes The Reading Log Grid Access the Reading Log grid by clicking on the Student tab and then the Reading Log tab Mam Mera Teacher Reports aneniance AX Figure 194 Reading Log Grid Panel Coll pse Expand Icons ay Use the blue up down arrow icons to collapse or expand all the groupings on this grid You colapseiespand individual groupings by clicking the buttons on the grouping headers u Homeschool Tracker Plus will not retain your settings when you leave this screen pe Choose Columns and Reset Icons 1 Click the Choose Columns icon Z 2 Check the columns to include uncheck the columns to exclude Column selections will not be visible for features which you have elected to disable in Tools Options Assignments Figure 196 3 Click Save to retain your selections click Cancel to exit without changing your column view Choose 4 Things to remember Columns icon You can change your selections at any time 1 Excluding a column form view does not remove the stored in that oi amp 1 You can eet celumns sum widths column order 1 hr orginal setings by clek he Reset Columns con in he Assignment Gr header rae 197 The Drop Down Lists Columns Icon Student Choose
309. n trailing text Or you may leave this option set as none 9 Indicate if you wish to show ending page range In our example we are assigning two pages at a time so checking this box will display that the assignment covers pages 1 2 If we uncheck the box each assignment will show just the starting page number for that assignment 10 The Example window at the bottom of the copy options window shows you what the Page Lesson Chapter field will look like for the first assignment created 11 Press OK to set the pattern or Cancel to exit the copy window See Completing the Copy Repeat Over Date Range Process to continue Creating a 2 Level Increment A two level increment might be Lesson 1 A Lesson 1 Lesson 1 C Lesson 2 A Lesson 2 8 etc or Chapter 1 1 Chapter 1 2 Chapter 2 1 Chapter 2 2 etc 1 To create this type of increment we ll use the First Part and Second Part sections of the Page Lesson Chapter Text Options window Set the Number of Parts spinner to Number of Parta Fret Part Use Letters 9 Use Numbers Leading Text StatWEh increment End with Leading zeros a 5 Second Par Ex The x in Lesson 12 Use Lettre Use Numbers Separator Start Wah Incemant End With c rating Tex mend E Show Ending Page Range Figure 70 Assignment Copy Auto Increment 2 Part 2 Inthe First Part section we ll fll out the fields as we did for the one level increment
310. n visit each grid individually to customize the view to your liking 2 aie e Pos Fen any Rm m Aw Em m cursor over and ng et colapsa er expand ems the um Figure 335 Column separator bar EA n BY BY a Banded coun mam TE 396 Expanded Column Keyboard shortcuts When working in the grids there are some Windows keyboard shortcuts that can assist you These consist of holding down the Control Ctrl and or Shift key and another key as indicated Ciri a Selects all the text in the field Copies the selected text into the clipboard leaving it in the original field as well Ctri v Pastes the text from the clipboard into the selected field The text will also remain in the clipboard until you copy something else to the clipboard or close Homeschool Tracker Plus Ciri x Cuts the selected text out of the selected field and places it in the clipboard Cirl End Moves the selection bar to the very last record in the grid you are viewing 5 Highlights all the rows from the row you start on down through and including the last row in the grid you are viewing Cir Shifi PageDn An alternative method to highlight all the rows from the row you start on down through and including the last row in the grid you are vie
311. named and double click on it to set the Tracker pointer to that fle The Homeschool Tracker Plus Menu Bar File Menu Recent Databaser Figure 356 File Menu New Database Create a new empty database and start over Your original database will be preserved in its current condition Open Database Point to a database file that you want to use lt Recent Databases Maintains a list of the last database you used You can set the number of files that Homeschool Tracker Plus wil remember in Tools Options General Login becomes enabled when you have Security features turned on Click Login to change users Exit close the program New Menu He Hew Tools You can use the links in the New menu to open the add edit window to add Assignment AppointmentiChore Field Trip Holiday Vacation Olher day Lesson Plan Item Memorization Task Reading Log or Resource Alternatively the Function keys listed will open the designated add edit window Tools Menu Figure 357 New Menu He New Datsbase Help Main Mess Import Export Reports Options Schot Year Calculator Borrowed ems Due Recalculate Present Recalculate Time Spent Reset A Grids Switch Schoe Yer Timer Figure 358 Tools Menu Import Export Opens the Import Export menu from which you can choose to impar
312. nd Weekly Planner forms Hide the Supplies column in the Assignment Lesson Plan and Weekly Planner grids Disable the Supplies report Time Spent Time Spent allows you to enter the actual time spent in each class in an hh mm format If you re not interested in tracking your school time at all you can disable this field See Using Time Spent Disabling this option wil Disable the Time Spent field in the Assignment Field Trip Lesson Plan Reading Log Add Time and Weekly Planner forms lt Hide the Time Spent option in the Time Entry Method drop down in Tools Options Attendance Hide the Time Spent column in the Assignment Field Trip Lesson Plan and Weekly Planner forms If both this and the Sessions items are disabled the Time Spent Sessions report and the Reading Log Time Spent report are disabled Auto Calculate Time Spent Based on Start End Times This option is only enabled if you activated Start End Times and Time Spent When enabled Homeschool Tracker Plus will automatically calculate the Time Spent based on the start end times entered You can edit the automated entry if you like Homeschool Tracker Plus will only overwrite your changes if you alter the start or end time for that assignment or if you use the Recalculate Time Spent tool See Assignments Recalculate Time Spent in this User Manual Disabling this item will Disable the Start End times fields in the Assignment Field Trip and Weekly Planner for
313. nd preserve them for later use in a Lesson Plan 1 Click on the Student tab and then the Assignments tab 2 Set the drop down menus to isolate the items you wish to copy to fan ese i7 the Lesson Pian Cesk tta the besne 3 Use Shift click or Ctrl click to select the items you wish to edit Right click over the selection and choose to Lesson Plan 5 Choose the Lesson Plan Name from the drop down list or click the pencil icon button and then click Add New to add a new Figure 101 Copy to Lesson Plan Window TE Lesson Plan Name The new name appears in the Copy to Lesson Plan window 6 Click Copy to proceed click Cancel to exit the process without copying items to the Lesson Plan When the COPY is successful you will see the Copy Complete message Click OK 8 Click on the Teacher tab and then the Lesson Plans tab to view the Lesson Plan grid to organize the items you just copied 9 items you copied will be displayed in the order they were entered in the Assignment grid based on their Date Due 10 All the sequence numbers for the copied items will begin with 10 000 For each distinct Date Due the sequence number will be increased The sequence numbers are set to this level so they do not Conflict with existing items 11 You may edit these items if desired The new are assigned sequence numbers starting at 10 000 When the Date Due of the copied as
314. nd times or if there are two items with identical start times then the value in the Order field will determine the priority of items listed c Ifthe Start time and Order are non existent or the same then the Subject list order in Maintenance Subjects Courses will set the priority Time Subject Order Ifyou re using Start End times they will determine the primary order of your items Ifyou are not using Start End times or if there are two items with identical start times then the Subject list order in Maintenance Subjects Courses will set the order Ifthe Start time and Subject are the same then the priority value of the Order field will determine the priority of items listed Page Break Student The report will start a new page when changing to a new student Student and Grouping If you choose this option the report will start a new page for every student and for whichever grouping you chose above Date Given Date Due Date Completed or Subject So if you run a report for an entire week you ll have at least five pages in your report Filter Use the Student Subjects Courses Activities and or Resources filters to limit what is displayed in the report f 2 The ed format of the Assignments report The Combined Assignment List report is designed for use by the teacher to keep track of students work for a selected day or range of days It is different from the Assignment Report in that it g
315. nderline to alter your text You can print a Journal Repart from the Homeschool Tracker Plus Reports Menu The Journal Grid 219 File New Tesh IEEE perm J reme Pentra Lay AY kon E eua HB Figure 258 Teacher Journal Grid Panel om 2 Use the blue up down arrow icons to collapse or expand the groupings on this grid You can Figure 259 collapselexpand individual groupings by clicking the buttons on the grouping headers Collapse Expand Homeschool Tracker Plus wil not retain your settings when you leave this screen icons Choose Columns and Reset Icons 1 Choose Columns ron visible for features which you have elected to disable in Tools Options Assignments Click Save to retain your selections click Cancel to exit without changing your column view 4 Things to remember con You can change your selections at any time Excluding a column from view does not remove the data stored in that feid lt You can reset columns column widths and column order to their original settings by ick Figure 261 the RESET icon in the Assignment Grid header Reset Columns leon The Drop Down Lists student Only appears on the Student Journal Select the student whose records you want to review or select Students Category Choose one or Categories to display Calendar
316. ndow Editing a Single Goal 1 Double click on the goal you wish to edit or right click over the item and choose Edit 2 Change any information you like The changes you make will be reflected in the Goals grid and in any Goals already linked to Assignments 3 If you want to archive the goal you can check that box now 4 Click Save to keep your changes click Cancel to exit without saving Figure 248 Edit Goal Window Group Edit 1 You use the Group Edit feature of the Goals grid to make changes to the Goals Set or Area Discipline fields for two or more Goals at the same time You can also use Group Edit to archive any goals 2 Use Shif click or Ctri cick to select the items you wish to edit Right click over the selection and choose Edit 4 Puta check next to each field you want to change Figure 249 Group Edit Goals for the selected group of items As you check them the fields will become enabled 5 Enter your new selections for each checked field Remember whatever choices you make here will be assigned to all the items you have highlighted 6 Click Save to keep your changes click Cancel to exit without saving Duplicating Goal If you want to use the same goal for a different Goal Set or Area Discipline you can make a copy of the existing item with the As New right click menu option Click on the Teacher tab and then on the Goals tab Right click over any item and choose Use
317. next assignment For example if each assignment in a workbook is two pages long new assignment would start on every second page and you d set the increment to 2 6 Inthe End With field enter the last page lesson or chapter to be included in this assignment series For example if the last page in our workbook is page 30 we would enter 30 in the End With box 7 The Leading Zeros option defaults to zero You can add up to three leading zeros to the First part of your increment The purpose of this field is to allow you to sort an assignment list by the Page Lesson Chapter field and keep your items in order Because sorting is an alphanumeric function without leading zeros sorting by the Page Lesson Chapter field for assignments ranging from Lesson 1 10 will result in Lesson 1 Lesson 10 Lesson 2 Lesson 3 etc With the leading zeros in use the list would instead order as lesson 01 lesson 02 lesson 03 lesson 04 through lesson 10 The zeros are only added until there is non zero entry in the tens place or the hundreds place when using 2 leading zeros or the thousands place when using 3 leading zeros 8 Trailing Text option at the bottom of the window allows you to add a message to the Page Lesson Chapter information For example in a Math assignment series you might choose to assign on the odd or only the even numbered problems You may choose one of these oplions from the drop down list or choose Custom to enter your ow
318. nformation for the new Library item You can use the ISBN link to add the ilem if you like 3 Click Save to keep the new Library item click Cancel to exit without saving If saved the new Library item will be added to the Resource grid and will appear in the Resource field Option 2 In the Assignment Lesson Plan or Weekly Planner Add window click or tab into the Resource field 2 Begin typing the name of your Resource If there is an existing resource with the same letter pattern it will appear in the auto complete box Continue typing until you have entered the entire name 3 Press the Tab Return or Enter key on your keyboard to move to the next field or click the SAVE button The Add New Library window will appear Enter the information for the new Library item You can use the ISBN link to add the item you like 5 Click Save to keep the new Library item click Cancel to exit without saving If saved the new Library item will be added to the Resource grid and will appear in the Resource field g a Resource from the Library 1 Click on the Maintenance tab and then click on the Library tab Right click over any Library and choose Create Resource 3 The Add Edit Resource window will appear showing the Title and other information from the Library item selected Choose a Subject from the drop down list Enter whatever other information you would like 6 Click Save Adding Multiple Resources
319. ng Scales and Weighted Grading section ofthis manual See Grades Grading Scales and Weighted Gradina Grading Select a form of Grading Letter Grade P F or Percent This will determine what part of your Grading Scale will be used for the Report Card and Transcript for this course When creating transcript Courses with Percent grading will be translated to the A F portion of the selected scale Weighting Choose whether or not you d like to apply Weighted Grading to this course Weighting the grades for activities within a Course affects the overall grade achieved in a course of study See Grades Grading Scales and Weighted Grading If you do not wish to use weighted grading go on to step 12 Totum on Weighted Grading for this course choose YES This will enable the Total Weight field and add the Wt weight column to the Activity window Click on the Weight field for each Activity to enter a value The Total Weight wil adjust each time you add change or remove an activity s weighting Activities can have different weights in different Courses Tests may count for 50 of the grade in your Algebra course but only 40 in your Presidents course If you would like to include an activity but you do not want items attached to that activity to have an effect on the overall grade set the weight for that activity to 0 It you click SAVE while the Total Weight is greater than or less than 100 you will receive an Invalid Entry
320. ng again from zero Just click the Start button See below lor directions for copying the elapsed time information to an assignment or other document Counting Down If the student is limited to a specific amount of time in which to accomplish the task you can use the Count Down option so they know when time has run out This option allows you to set a sound file to play when the allotted time has expired i Click the option in the Timer window and enter the hours time 2 Ifyou like you can choose a sound file on your computer to play when time is up by clicking the Set button and pointing to the file you want to play After selecting your sound file click the Test button to hear it once Tracker will remember that sound file designation until you change it even after you close the program 8 Click Start when you re ready to begin At the bottom of the Timer window Tracker will display how much time is LEFT from the allotted time If the student finishes before the allotted time click STOP Otherwise your sound file will play when the timer runs out inutes and seconds for the total allowed vere 0005 f original allotted time Hes Sein TE Per Ww Fe Wen ed Sas ik 3 minutes 27 seconds amp Time remaining L ico sa ege og Bg ie esse Soe Figure 80 Assignment Timer Counting Down 53 Copying Elapsed Time The total elapsed
321. ngs neat and orderly the ability to renumber is crucial Of course if you wish you can simply type new sequence number directly into the grid S remman d p 8 Oya hao Pug edat T Figure 105 Lesson Plan Change Sequence Numbers Window However if you have a large number of items to change that process can become tedious very quickly The options outlined here also allow you to create gaps in your existing sequence numbers to give you to add more items in between your existing items if needed Increase Sequence Numbers This is a great option to use when you want to create a hol add intervening items into the Lesson Plan in your sequence numbers so you can Select one or more items in the Lesson Plan using shift click or ctrl click to highlight the items Right click over the selection and choose Change Sequence Numbers The Increase Sequence numbers by will be selected Enter the value you want to add to each of the existing sequence numbers For instance if you enter 1 and your existing sequence numbers are 1 2 3 the changedlincreased sequence numbers will be 2 3 4 5 In the lower half of the window you need to choose which items you want to change The first selection will cause Homeschool Tracker Plus to change only the items you have highlighted in the grid The second selection will cause Homeschool Tracker Plus to change all i
322. nments on 9 Choose which days you d like Homeschool Tracker Plus to skip over when creating assignments Scheduled Holidays Absent and or Non School days 10 Choose your starting pattern If any of your items have a 2 wk pattern you ll need to select whether you want to start with Week 1 or Week 2 11 Check the box to include any attachments from these Weekly Planner items with the created Assignments 12 Click PREVIEW Figure 140 Weekly Planner Create Assignments Preview Window 13 Take a moment to review the items to make sure that they are correct before clicking the Submit button 14 You can change the grouping and or sorting of the grid column order and size and even exclude certain columns if you like to make it easier for you to review 15 The screen will fil based on the dates and Weekly Planner Items selected These are now the actual Assignments that will be placed in the grid when you click SUBMIT 16 When creating these Assignments Homeschool Tracker Plus performs a check for duplicate Assignments already created for the student in the Assignment grid 17 tems that have the exact same Student Subject Course Activity Resource and Page Lesson Chapter as an existing item in any school year in the student s Assignment grid will be marked as duplicates Items with blank Page Lesson Chapter fields are not included in the duplicate check procedure 18 Duplicates appear in the Confirm Lesson Assignments
323. not calendar days This option will also work for a Lesson Plan where ALL the items have the exact same sequence number So if you have 30 items in your Lesson Plan and they all have a sequence number value 53 of O or 1 you can use the spread evenly option to have the resulting assignments automatically spread over the specified number of days 5 Click PREVIEW to continue to the Confirm Lesson Assignments window 6 See The Preview Window below to continue The Preview Window 1 You may use the Choose Columns icon to select which columns to display and in what order to display them You can also choose to group and sort the Preview window in any way you like Homeschool Tracker Plus will remember your settings 2 You may edit the following items directly in this grid Order Page Lesson Chapter Topic Date Given Date Due Start Time End Time Points Possible Time Spent Sessions Directions and Notes 3 If you are using Student colors the items in the Preview window will display in those colors for easy identification Number f tems selected to submit 38 ESTEE EXEEITETTTY Figure 110 Lesson Plan Submit Preview Window 4 When creating these Assignments Homeschool Tracker Plus performs a check for duplicate Assignments already created for the student in the Assignment grid ems that have the exact same Student Subject Course Activity Resource and Page Lesson Chapter as an existing item in the stu
324. ns Page Options Enter a title for your report The default title is Assignments You can leave this field blank if you prefer title on the report Report Style Assignments This is the original Homeschool Tracker assignment report format It provides a list of items for your student to accomplish for the selected date range 2 Combined This is the same as the Teacher s Planner report in Homeschool Tracker Basic It groups identical assignments together where one or more students have the same work assigned See below for more information Cokes ide Y Ports O Test ated Ten Felis haute Come U Wem Figure 285 Assignment Report Options Assignments to Include Choose one or more options Incomplete Items within date range Assignments that fall within the From To dates you enter for the Report Dates and which are not yet marked as completed Incomplete Items prior to dates past due Assignments which are incomplete and have a Date Due prior to the start of your selected date range Incomplete Long Term Items Assignments with two or more days for the student to complete the work the Date Given is different from Date Due This option is disabled if Date Given is disabled in Tools Options Assignments Complete Items Assignments have been marked as Complete For a completed item to be included in the report
325. ns F3 Main Menu Tab Figure 1 Main Menu Tab 53 This is the default stating page for Homeschool Tracker Plus Your school name and contact information will be displayed here as well as information about the number of days available used and left in the Active School year and current Term The Gentle Homeschool 234 Stret Orlando FL 32808 407 555 5555 support tghomesolt com pe Days Spent 4 ays Let 257 Give thanks o the LORD hie name make among the nations what he has done 1 Chronicles 16 8 Figure 2 Main Menu View The Days Available value comes from calculating the school days that exist between and including Ihe start and end dates of your Active School Year School Days do not include any days you ve marked as Holiday Vacation or Other days See Holiday Vacation and Other Days Days Spent indicates the number of possible school days that have already occurred before today It is not an indication of attendance only of the potential school days you could have had from the beginning of the school year to today Days Left are the number of potential school days between today and the last day of your Active School Year These same values are listed for the current Term When you are within the final Term of the School Year the days left of the Year and Term will be the same If today s date your computer system date is outside of the Active School Y
326. ns This will bring up the Group Edit window from which you may choose to globally edit fields for the selected items Figure 171 Field Trip Delete allows you to permanently remove the selected item s from the Right Click Menu database You will have an opportunity to confirm your selection before deletion occurs Deleted items cannot be retrieved Use As New is only available for single item selections This option creates a copy of the selected record You may then change the record as you wish and save it to the grid or use the Copy button in the Add Edit Assignment window to make a single copy or to copy over a date range Print Form generates a Field Trip Form with header information based on the Field Trip selected You can print a generic Field Trip Form from the Reports tab of Homeschool Tracker Plus f 87 Library Supplemental video avallable on this topic The Library is a central repository for all your Resource and Reading Log items Library items can be used in either location The Library will store the specifics of your books title author publisher a thumbnail of the cover image etc The Reading Log and Resource entries will display this information as well as details specific to a Resource or Reading Log entry Anatomy ofa Library Item do Se Figure 172 Library Add Edit Window Title Required 200 character limit This is the name of the boo
327. nt Right click on any single item you wish to copy and choose Copy to Student or use shift click or ctrl click to select any 2 or more items right click over the selection and choose Copy to Student Put a checkmark next to the name of any one or more students Click Submit to enter the copy onto each selected schedule click Cancel to exit without making copies 7 Copied items will appear on the Agenda and related grids for the selected student s with the exact same day time parameters as the original item 8 No duplicate check is performed as part of this function pepe Deleting Items in an Agenda 1 Click on the Student tab and then the Agenda tab 2 Choose a Student from the drop down list 205 Right click over the item you wish to remove and choose Delete 4 You can delete multiple items at once by using shift click or ctrl click to select them Right click over part of the selection and choose Delete 5 Click YES to confirm deletion click NO to close wilhout deleting Deleted items cannot be retrieved Deleted items will be removed from their home grids as well Printing Agendas There are number of formats available for printing Agendas Appointments and Chores can also be printed on the Daily Task List report For full details see the Reports section of this User Manual See Reports The Agenda Right Click Menu You can right click over a single item or over multiple items using Shift
328. ny or Weekly Planner items Teacher Weekly Planner that you will not be using in the new year Archive any Subjects and or Courses that you will not be using in the new year Maintenance Subjects Courses 93 Insure that any Memorization items entered in the current year have been marked as done with an ending date so they will not appear in the new year Insure that nay Reading Log items entered in the current year have been marked as done with an ending date so they will not appear in the new year Addanew school year with terms and holiday vacation days using the School Year Calculator Tools School Year Calculator or Maintenance Years Terms Add Year When you make the new school year active all of the Assignments Field Trips Memorization and Reading Log items of the old year will be hidden fram view To see those items simply change the Active School Year back to the previous date range Program Options F3 Supplemental video available on this topi There are a number of options you can set that will help you use Homeschool Tracker Plus in the way that works best for you When you make a selection on one of the options pages be sure to click the SAVE button to apply your settings You can access the Program Options by pressing the F3 key on your keyboard or by clicking on Tools in the Homeschool Tracker Plus menu bar and then click on Options General Options These are options that affect the overall
329. o that item and all that follow without having to select them first 6 Click OK to make the changes Reset Sequence Numbers Rather than just increase or decrease existing sequence numbers the Reset option allows you to set a specific starting sequence number as well as the increment between successive sequence numbers Select one or more items in the Lesson Plan using shift click or ctrl click to highlight the items Right click over the selection and choose Change Sequence Numbers Choose the Reset Sequence numbers option Enter the sequence number you want to start with Enter the increment for each successive number assigned For example if you enter a starting number of 5 and an increment of 4 the resulting sequence numbers will be 5 9 13 17 etc until your series is complete 6 Inthe lower half of the window you need to choose which items you want to change The first selection will cause Homeschool Tracker Plus to change only the items you have highlighted in the grid The second selection will cause Homeschool Tracker Plus to change all items with a sequence number equal to or higher than the number indicated This will default to the sequence number of your first selected item You can change that value if you wish This allows you to select just one row and have the changes applied to that and all that follow without having to select them first 7 Click OK to make the changes Make it f
330. o the date field and choose the None label at the bottom of the calendar 7 The Address field is optional Enter as little or as much information as you d like 8 Choose whether to have this item appear on the Transcript You can change this option at any time 9 Inthe Notes field use the standard Windows keyboard shortcuts to copy ctrl c paste ctrl v or cut ctri x Figure 25 Students Schools Attended Input Window text Right clicking in this area will enable the spell check feature 10 You can use the icons above the Notes area to adjust the font as desired 11 Click Save to add the entry Click Cancel to exit without saving orm Entering Activities and Achievements Enter information about your student s special activities and achievements This can include any type of items you like volunteer work awards part time jobs etc If you are already editing a Student record to add other information you can move to this area simply by clicking on the tab in the Student Edit window Click on the Maintenance tab and then the Students tab Right click over a student name and choose Edit Choose the Activities and Achievements tab Click Add oS Bum mm ree ADR Fayed 2nd vin Racommandsd by orchasr Tha Schuykd Valey ea chestia E you made up ot mineane for mde sehen rou fh ara Figure 26 Students Activities amp Achievements Input Window
331. of short videos that will walk you through some of the more involved features of Homeschool Tracker Plus You can find them a link to them here http www homeschooltracker com support_plus_videos aspx lt Email us at support homeschooltracker com Visit our Homeschool Tracker Discussion group to ask questions and share ideas with the developers of Homeschool Tracker and with other users hltp torum homeschooltracker com Use the Ask Live button on the website to initial live chat window with one of our support staff Glossary of Homeschool Tracker Terms Active School Year The Year that is currently controlling which items are visible in the various areas of the program Only one year may be active at a time You can change your Active School Year at any time in Maintenance Years Terms or from the Tools Switch School Year menu Activity a short description of the type of work to be done in the assignment e g Lesson Test Reading Worksheet etc When using weighted grading weight is assigned to each Activity within the Course Agenda The Agenda provides view of your student s obligations much like a Google Calendar This view is most useful when you have specific startend times for your assignments The Agenda allows you to display all of your student s items in one place assignments chores appointments field trips etc You can view the Agenda for on student or for multiple students in a side
332. om the context menu Enter a name for your new scale and click Save Scale names can have 1 100 characters Change any parts of the existing scale as needed add or delete lines if you wish Click Save to add the scale to your list Assigning a Grading Scale to a Course For Assignments where no Course is specified only the Default Grading Scale will be used When you create Courses within your Subjects you can assign different grading scales to different courses You can also choose to use the letter grade pass fail options 1 Click on the Maintenance tab and then click on the Subjects Courses tab 2 Right click over the Course you want to work with and choose Edit from the context menu or you double click on the Course to open the add edit window 3 The Grading Options section is in the upper right corner of the Course window 09 pom mo Figure 155 Grading Assigning a Grading Scale to a Course 4 Choose a grading scale from the drop down list 5 Choose whether to use A F Pass Fail or Percentage only grading for this Course 6 Click Save to keep your changes What Is Weighted Grading Weighted grading is an optional feature Only you can decide if weighting the various activities in a Course to give more importance to one area of work over another is right for your students Weighted grading is assigned per Activity per Course and can be edited at any time It you teach to p
333. om the menu 4 Click YES to confirm deletion click NO to exit without deleting Deleted items cannot be retrieved Deleting an LP Schedule 1 Click on the Maintenance tab and then the Other tab 2 Choose LP Schedule Names from the drop down list 3 Right click over a schedule name and choose Delete or click once on a schedule name and press the Delete key on your keyboard 4 Click YES to delete the item click NO to exit without deleting Deleted items cannot be retrieved Archiving an LP Schedule If you wil not be using an LP Schedule but may wish to use it again in the future you can use the Archive feature to remove it from the LP Schedule Name drop down list Click on the Maintenance tab and then the Other tab Choose LP Schedule Names from the drop down list Right click over a schedule name and choose Archive When you return to the LP Schedule list or change the filer from Active to will be removed from the Active view vchive Only the record You can archive two or more items at the same time Use shift click or ctrl click to select the you wish to archive Right click over the selection and chose Archive from the context menu Un Archiving an LP Schedule any time you can choose to move an LP Schedule from the Archive list back to the Active list 1 Clickon the Maintenance tab and then the Other lab 2 Choose LP Schedule Names from the drop down list TS Change the Filter drop down from
334. omework 35 38 CEIS Math Algebra i Homework 10 g 90 00 Math Algebra 1 Homework 10 19 100 00 Math Algebra i Homework 10 10 100 00 Total 851299 Term 2 Math Algebra 1 951 29 11 86 48 Yearly Grade Math Algebra 1 88 10 86 48 2 Grade Calculation Method Sum of Earned Possible This method will display a grade for each completed assignment However Term grades are calculated y taking the total points earned for all completed assignments and dividing that value by the total points possible for all of those items Individual Assignments Grades are only calculated for Assignments marked as complete lt To create a Grade for a completed Assignment you must enter Points Possible and Points Earned Homeschool Tracker Plus calculates the grade for the assignment by dividing the points earned for the Assignment by the points possible for the Assignment Aletter grade is appears in the Assignments add edit window based on the Grading Scale you have selected This letter grade is just a reference on how your student performed on this single task The percentage appears in the Grade column of the Assignment grid For more details on this please see Grading Scales below Term Grades 7 For Courses without weighting or if you are not using Courses the Term grade is calculated by adding all the points earned for all completed assignments within the Term This value is divided by the total points
335. ompleted Assignments which have Date Given and Date Due values that are different are called Long Term assignment Long Term Assignments can be viewed in the Assignment grid based on the Date Given the Date Due or the Date Completed using the View By filter drop down In the Agenda Long Term assignments will appear at the top of the day columns and span from the Date Given through and including the Date Due In reports your multi day assignments will be displayed as outlined below Agenda Report Muli day assignments will appear at the top of each day in the all day event from the Date Given through and including the Date Due Mult day items appear in the all day event area whether start end times are assigned or not Assignment Calendar Report Multi day assignments will appear on the Date Due only Assignments Report You must check the box to include Long Term assignments Mulli day assignments will appear only on the Date Given or Date Due depending on the report preferences you have set If you re grouping by Date Given it wil appear on the Date Given but also display the Date Due If you re grouping by Date Due it wil appear on the Date Due but also display the Date Given Daily Task List Report Multi day assignments will appear on each day of the report from the Date Given through and including the Date Due The assignments will have the label LT displayed to the left of the assignment details
336. on Day options YI Sio Scheduled Holidays 7i skip Absert Days EI skip non school Days E Tomas Ww Ur VW MK Wr Uis Figure 236 Copy Calendar ltem Click Preview to review the items about to be created Take a moment to review the items to make sure that they are correct before clicking the Submit button You can change the grouping and or sorting of the grid column order and size and even exclude certain columns if you like to make it easier for you to review Click Submit to send these items to the Agenda Click Cancel to start over Editing Items within an Agenda You can edit any item displayed on an Agenda 1 2 3 4 Right click on the item you wish to change and choose Edit The Add Edit window for that item will open Make any changes you like and click Save or Save amp Close The changes you make here will be reflected on the home grid of that item as well assignments field trips reading log ete There is no Group Edit feature in the Agenda Moving Items within an Agenda You can change the date and or time of any item without opening the Edit window To change the date Click once on the item Drag it to the new date Release the mouse button For all day items click once on the item and drag one end or the other over to a different date to lengthen the time frame 5 If you accidentally drag an item to a different student that change will not be maintained The item
337. on you can add Notes to any Grade Level which can then be included in the Report card If you are already editing a Student record to add other information you can move to this area simply by clicking on the tab in the Student Edit window Click on the Maintenance tab and then the Students tab Right click over a Student and choose Edit Choose the Grade Level tab Type your grade designation direction into the Grade Level field for the corresponding School Year If you d like to enter notes double click on the Notes field These notes can be included on the Report Card rend te set veo vou mont cement eile aso ty ane Sek See Sy tots nto recon ba cued en Rear Cr Figure 24 Grade Le 6 Enter your text in the Notes window 7 Click Save to keep your changes Click Cancel to exit without saving Entering Schools Attended In this area you can enter information about schools your student attended prior to or in conjunction with your homeschool If you are already editing a Student record to add other information you can move to this area simply by clicking on the tab in the Student Edit window Click on the Maintenance tab and then click the Students tab Right click over a Student name and choose Edit Choose the Schools Attended tab Click Add Enter a school name The date fields are optional If you do not want to include dates for either or both of these fields click the down arrow next t
338. on 8 9 Lesson 9 10 Lesson 10 11 TEST 1 12 Lesson 11 13 Lesson 12 14 Lesson 13 15 Lesson 14 16 Lesson 15 17 TEST 2 18 Lesson 16 19 Lesson 17 20 Lesson 12 21 Lesson 19 22 Lesson 20 23 TEST 3 24 Lesson 24 25 Lesson 22 26 Lesson 25 27 Lesson 24 28 Lesson 25 Semple Lesson Plan lohan 29 TEST 4 30 Lesson 26 31 Lesson 27 32 Lesson 28 33 Lesson 29 Lesson 30 35 TEST 5 Figure 99 Lesson Plan Sample Worksheet Create a new Lesson Plan selecting the Subject and Course you want Set the Activity to Test Choose your Resource You may also add Directions Notes Points Possible elc as needed Click the COPY button and the click the radio button for Auto Increment Page Lesson Chapter In Leading Text choose Custom and type in Test Start with 1 increment by 1 and end with the highest number test in our example that would be 5 See the Example field at the bottom of the window to see what your Page Lesson Chapter text will look like Click OK Taing Tex Figure 100 Lesson Plan Copy Example Text In the Sequence number section set the Start On number as the sequence number you ve assigned to the first Test This would be Sequence number 11 in our example above Set the Increment By value by subtracting the number next to Test 1 11 from the number next to Test 2 17 in this case a6 Click Begin Copy to create all the test items In the Preview window
339. on Tasks Search text will compare against Type Title and Notes fields Hidden fields wil be included in the search parameters This search field is tied to the search fields in the other Student tab areas Field Trip Memorization and Reading Log Grouping and Sorting Just as in the Assignment grid you may choose to group and sort the displayed information in the Memorization grid according to any column heading See Using the Grids Adding a Memorization Item You can open the Add Memorization Item window in three ways From Student Memorization screen click Add From anywhere in Homeschool Tracker Plus press F1 t Click on New in the menu bar then Memorization Task BE See The Anatomy of a Memorization Item above for a description of each feld 1 Fill in each field as desired The only required fields are List E Samantha Type Tiie and Students 2 Click SAVE Choose one or more students from the list by checking the box to the left of their name 4 Click Submit to create a Memorization item entry for each student selected Figure 221 Memorization 5 An entry will be made in the Agenda if a Started On date has Choose Students Window been entered Editing a Memorization Item You may edit any part of any Memorization item except Student Some fields can be edited in directly in the grid Editing in the Grid 1 All fields except Student can be edited directly the grid Dat
340. one of these options from the drop down list or choose Custom to enter your own trailing text Or you may leave this option set as 9 Indicate if you wish to show ending page range In our example we are assigning two pages at a time so checking this box will display that the assignment covers pages 1 2 If we uncheck the box each assignment will show just the starting page number for that assignment 10 The Example window at the bottom of the copy options window shows you what the Page Lesson Chapter field will look like for the first assignment created 11 Press OK to set the pattern or Cancel to exit the copy window See Setting Sequence Number and Completing Process to continue PES Creating a 2 Level Increment A evel increment might be Lesson 1 A Lesson 1 B Lesson 1 C Lesson 2 A Lesson 2 8 elc or Chapter 1 1 Chapter 1 2 Chapter 2 1 Chapter 2 2 etc o Materne 1 To create this type of increment we ll use the First Part and Second Part sections of the Page Lesson Chapter Text Options window se Letars Ueber Set the Number of Parts spinner to 2 esie SWE Laden zerar 2 Inthe First Part section we l fl out the fields we did for the one level increment We ll again choose to use numbers in the First Part Sieun o wenes Well set the Leading Text to Lesson For five San Wen end Wen
341. or Grouping 1 Grouping 2 or Additional Sort you can use this area to choose whether to display those items in ascending oldest to newest or descending newest to oldest order 257 LP Schedule Planning The Schedule report provides a printout of all items in a selected LP Schedule grid While the Schedule itself is static the report header will display the beginning and ending dates of the week for which it is printed LP Schedule Report Options Choose a Schedule Select an LP schedule from the drop down list You can print only one LP schedule at a time Time Frame Choose the earliest and latest time you wish to display The time range you select will affect how well the items are d displayed on the printed page Your selections will be maintained on tet Tee ext Print Style There are four options to choose from When choosing Duy age par day a Weekly format all seven days will be included Westy 10390 Print Color Choose how you d like the report to appear The Black and White option uses the least amount of toner If you re using a color printer the Color option will display the colors that you see in the LP Schedule tab view Memorization Assignments Figure 302 LP Schedule Report Options Create a report of your Memorization items ation Report Options Page Options Enter a title for your report You can leave this fiel
342. or change the filter from Active to Archive Only the record will be removed from view 1273 You can Un archive two or more items at the same time Use shift click or ctrl click to select the items you wish to reactivate Right click over the selection and choose Unarchive from the context menu Holiday Vacation and Other Days Supplemental video available on this topic Everyone needs a day off sometime Homeschool Tracker Plus allows you to designate a would be school day as a Holiday Vacation day or Other day something that is neither a holiday nor vacation but you want to mark as a day off These days off will be referred to as HVO days An HVO day is a school wide day off In order to use this feature you must have the Attendance feature enabled See Attendance All HVO days will appear on each student s attendance calendar on the All Students view of the Attendance calendar and on the Agenda HVO days appear as bolded dates on the Assignment grid calendar addition to declaring the day as Holiday Vacation or Other day you can add a description of the day such as thanksgiving Spring Break Mom s birthday etc You can choose to skip over HVO days when submitting copying and rescheduling assignments A day can be marked as HVO and Present if you wish Creating HVO entries affer assignments have been created will not automatically move those assignments to different dat
343. or other item that the student requires access to in order to complete an assignment Sessions an alternative to actual Time Spent the Sessions feature helps you keep track of how many times your student works in his various areas of study For most one assignment equals one session Student the child doing the work You may have as many student records as you need to accommodate the children in your immediate family As a student graduates from homeschooling you can archive their Student record to retain of their assignments grades and work history and yet remove them from the Active lists Subject a general description of the area of study such as Math History Science Language Arts etc Subjects can be designated as Core or Elective Subject Code any 1 7 characters of your choosing which serve as an abbreviation of the full Subject name You may choose to display the Subject Code column along with or instead of the Subject Title column in any of the program grids Term a term is any number of days within your school year You must create at least one Term per Year that spans the starting and ending date of the year You may choose to create quarters semesters trimesters whatever suits your needs Time Spent allows you to keep track of the actual time your child spends on individual assignments You can enter this information as the assignment is created if you want to give your student a guideline of the
344. or sort the grid to locate the items you want or use the Search field to refine the list of items 3 Use Shift click or Ctrl click to select one or more Library entries 4 Right click over the selection and choose Custom Library Report 5 Choose your report options The Include and Status options are disabled as those parameters are determined by the items you selected in the grid 6 Click OK on the options window and then preview your report TL The Library Right Click Menu ee e New You can right click over an individual item in the Library grid or over multiple Create Resource items using the Shift Click or Ctrl Click procedures outlined above Creme Reading Log tem Archive Add New brings up the Add Edit Plan Item window Edit c For single item selection opens the edit window for the selected item VIE o For multiple item selection opens the Group Edit window Custom Library Report Delete allows you to permanently remove the selected item s from the Figure 189 Library Right Click Menu database You will have an opportunity to confirm your selection before deletion occurs Deleted items cannot be retrieved As New creates a copy of the selected record You can then change the record as you wish It is enabled for single item selection only Create Resource For single item selection adds the Library item to the Resource grid You can choose to attribute a specific subject or course
345. ose items you have chosen to Archive The Both setting shows all Activities whether they are Active or Archived Adding an Activity Click on the Maintenance tab then on the Other tab This will bring you to the Activity grid 2 Glick the ADD button at the top of the grid The Add Edit Activity window will appear 3 Enter a name for your Activity up to 100 characters 4 Click Save to keep the new activity click Cancel to exit without saving Editing an Activity Click on the Maintenance tab then on the Other tab to view the Activity grid Option 1 1 Double click on the item you wish to edit to bring up the Add Edit Activity window 2 Change the Activity name as you wish 3 archive the activity check the Archive box See Archiving Maintenance Items 4 Click Save to keep the new activity click Cancel to exit without saving If saved your changes will be applied to all linked Assignments Courses Lesson Plan Schedule and Weekly Planner items Option 2 Right click on the Activity you wish to edit Choose Edit from the context menu Change the Activity name as you wish To archive the activity check the Archive box See Archiving Maintenance Items Click Save to keep the new activity click Cancel to exit without saving If saved your changes will be applied to all linked Assignments Courses Lesson Plan Schedule and Weekly Planner items Option 3 1 Click once on the Activity you w
346. ou may only delete Maintenance items which are not linked to any Assignment Course Field Trip Lesson Plan LP Schedule or Weekly Planner items If the Maintenance item is attached to one or more of these you need to Delete the linked Assignment Course Field Trip etc Assign a different Maintenance item to the linked item using Reclassily Choose to Archive the Maintenance rather than delete it see below 1 Click on the Maintenance tab then the Other tab and choose the list you want to work with from the drop down list Right click over the item you wish to remove and choose Delete from the menu 3 Ifthe item is not being used anywhere in the program you may delete it by clicking Yes in the Are You Sure box 4 Ifthe item is being used the Used By window will appear lt The list in the Table column will vary depending on the type of ilem selected for deletion This tool allows you to see where the Maintenance item is being used Double click the View link to see the actual Assignments Field Trips Courses etc which are linked to the Maintenance item you are wishing to delete From the Used By Reclassity Selected Items window you can choose a different Maintenance item to replace the existing one See Used By and Reclassity When all linked items have been reclassified or deleted you can then delete the Maintenance item Deleted items cannot be retrieved Maintenance Other
347. ou see all Assignments for a Student that have the same Subject Course Activity and Resource as a Weekly Planner item This will show you all Assignments with those parameters regardless of whether they were created individually from a Weekly Planner or Lesson Plan item or copied from an existing Assignment i Right click on any Weekly Planner item and choose View Assignments 2 This will take you to a special view of the Assignment grid The usual filters and calendar will be inaccessible Figure 141 Weekly Planner View Assignments Window 3 You can edit these Assignments in any way you like You can add new Assignments or delete Assignments as necessary 4 When you have finished click the Return button You can go to any other tab in the program but the Assignment grid will not return to normal until you click Return 2 Deleting Weekly Planner Items Click on the Teacher tab then on the Weekly Planner tab 2 Choose a Student or All Students from the drop down list 3 Double click on the item you wish to remove and click the Delete button or right click over the item and choose Delete 4 You can delete multiple items at once using Shift click or Ctri click to select the items Right click over the selection and choose Delete Click YES to confirm deletion click NO to exit without deleting Deleted items cannot be retrieved Deleting a Weekly Planner item has no effect on Assignments previously crea
348. ount of time the Student has spent on that item in hours and minutes lt You can choose to have the daily Time Spent total displayed in the Student s Attendance calendar by choosing Time Spent in the Attendance Time Entry drop down in Tools Options Attendance This information will then also appear on the Main Menu view The Time Spent Sessions report can show you the total Time Spent for each Subject Course for any date range you choose If you are entering specific starting and ending times for your Assignments and Field Trips you can choose to have Tracker automatically calculate the Time Spent for each item Enable this feature in Tools Options Assignments Using Sessions Enable the Sessions field in Tools Options Assignments As you enter or edit your Assignments Field Trips and Reading Log items you can enter the number of Sessions you want to attribute to that task You can choose to have the daily Sessions total displayed in the Student s Attendance calendar by choosing Sessions in the Attendance Time Entry drop down in Tools Options Attendance This information will then also appear on the Main Menu view The Time Spent Sessions report can show you the total Sessions for each Subject Course for any date range you choose Grades Grading Scales and Weighted Grading Grades and Weighted Grading are optional features of Homeschool Tracker Plus If you do not wish to use the grading features you can disa
349. out a lst of the Resources you ve entered You can limit the report based on Borrowed or Loaned status and or specific Subjects Resource List Report Options Title Enter tile for your report You can leave this field blank if you prefer Grouping 1 Select a grouping from the drop down list The default selection is Alphabetical Your selection will be maintained until you change it Grouping 2 You may select a secondary grouping you Ike The default selection is empty Your selection will be maintained until you change it The selection made in Grouping 1 will not be available in Grouping 2 as you cannot group by the same category twice 2 Repot Sye Seg Com 9 I E kerestem IT Nether boroued nor loaned Unused tems p A E Ate B H H E 7 Figure 310 Resource List Report Options Additional Sort You may choose yet one more category to sort on Selections made in Grouping 1 and Grouping 2 will not be available Fields to Include Choose which fields you d like to display in the report If there is no entry in the Resource record for a selected field it will be ignored If you have selected a category in Grouping 1 Grouping 2 or Additional Sort it will not be available in this selection as that field will already be included in the report Report Style Choose the style you prefer single column or full page width Include Borrowe
350. ow Click OK Your selected items will be irretrievably removed Click Cancel in the Used By window 5 Right click over the Lesson Plan Name one more time and choose Delete from the context menu 6 Click YES to remove the Lesson Plan Name Archiving a Lesson Plan If you will not be using a Lesson Plan for the Active School Year but that Lesson Plan may be used again ata future date you may wish to Archive rather than delete the plan Click on the Maintenance tab and then on the Other tab Choose Lesson Plan Names from the Select Table to Edit drop down Right click over the Lesson Plan Name you wish to move to the inactive list Choose Archive from the context menu The Archive box will be checked When you return to the Lesson Plan Name list or change the filter from Active to Archive Only the record will be removed from the Active view You can archive two or more items at the same time Use shift click or ctrl click to select the items you wish to archive Right click over the selection and chose Archive from the context menu Un Archiving a Lesson Plan At any time you can choose to move Lesson Plan from the Archive list back to the Active list Click on the Maintenance tab and then on the Other tab Choose Lesson Plan Names from the Select Table to Edit drop down Right click over the Lesson Plan Name you wish to move to move to the active list Choose Unarchive from the context menu The Archive box will be unchec
351. ow appear in the header bar and in its regular column position 3 Once you have grouped you will see a separator bar which shows the detail of the grouping m 4 ook FOREIG _outher pbloh ain Road to Engi foris ere 10 Cher Sook DD Facer Australis TS Ts Beck iro Figure 328 Grouping Separator bar How do I Group by more than one category 4 Choose your first Grouping category and drag it to the header bar Choose your second grouping category and drag it to the header bar as well 3 Each Grouping Category will have a separator bar Merriam Webster Collate TRT auhorbubih E E Epira brary 772005 Figure 329 Grouping by more than one category How do I switch the hierarchy of my multi category grouping 4 Click and drag a heading to the subordinate right side of another group heading A bar will appear This indicates where the grouping header will appear when you release the mouse button 2 When the black bar appears in the right location release the left mouse button 3 Your grouping categories wil be reordered accordingly aste EUER Date Dur Monday December 15 2008 8 Student Jean temis Figure 330 Switching Grouping Hierarchy How do I Remove a Grouping Designation i Click on the grouping heading you wan
352. ow will appear Click OK 8 You can click Continue on the Import Export window to import another file or click Cancel to close the window and return to the program Exporting Lesson Plans Goals Library Items or Holidays 1 Click on Tools in the menu bar and then click on Import Export 2 Click the radio button to Export a file to share with What would you like to do someone This will enable the lower portion of the chine gu Import Export window S Export afle to share with someone 3 Choose the type of file you wish to export 0 4 Inthe Preview window choose the exact items you want Choose File Type to export For Lesson Plan export you will first need to select 9 Lesson Plan the Lesson Plan you want to work with fram the drop Goals down list Library tems lt For Holiday export choose the date range you want Holidays to work with The default dates will be the starvend dates of your Active School Year Only the holidays Figure 273 Exporting files that fall in the selected date range will be exported The export process does not include days marked as Vacation Other lt You can group and sort the information in the Preview window to meet your needs When you have selected the items you want click the OK button 5 Choose a name for your export file When exporting a Lesson Plan file the name of the lesson plan will appear as the default file name You can change it to an
353. own settings Search text will compare against Subject Course Activity Topic and Notes fields Hidden fields will be included in the search parameters This search field is tied to the search fields in the other Student tab areas Assignment Goals Progress Memorization and Reading Log Grouping and Sorting Just as in the Assignment grid you may choose to group and sort the displayed information in the Field Trip grid according to any column heading For full details please see the Using the Grids section Adding a Field Trip You can open the Add Field Trip window in three ways From Student Field Trip screen click Add From anywhere in Homeschool Tracker Plus press F7 Click on New in the menu bar then Field Trip See The Anatomy of a Field Trip above for a description of each field 1 Filin each field as desired The only required fields are Trip Description Trip Date Subject and Students Thoms Click SAVE 3 Choose one or more students from the list by checking the box to the left of their name 4 Click Submit to create a Field Trip entry for each student selected Choose the student s to receive the new tems Anentry will be made in the Agenda on the esca Uncheck con Assignment wil be entered for each Figure 168 Field Trip Choose Students Student attached tothe field trip on the Date 83 Field Trips as Assignments The Field
354. p down lis 5 Click Save to add the item click Cancel to exit without saving Creating Assignments from Weekly Planner Items Supplemental video available on this topic All Weekly Planner Items will eventually become Assignments You can submit items one at a time or in groups 1 Click on the Teacher tab then on the Weekly Planner Choose the date range for the new assignments tab m 2 Set the drop down lists to display the items you wish to work with 3 You can Group or Sort the displayed items to more mug marh Do you want to skip over special days easily access the lems you wish to prepare for 3 stp seas Assignments 4 If you wish to change the days of the week for any Assignment do so now You can check and uncheck Stating pattem days of the week from the Weekly Planner grid without Fortes wn a2 weak ten chose ne sang went opening each item oon 5 Remove checkmarks from the Use column for items you do not want to include in this process You can Attachments click the Check AllUncheck All buttons or click inthe nant eme Use square amp Click the PREPARE button The Greate Assignments window will appear 7 Choose a Start On date the first date you want to book Assignments on Figure 139 Weekly Planner Create Assignments Window 323 Choose a Through date the last date you want lo book Assig
355. port that are not included in any assignment The majority of Homeschool Tracker Plus users will have need for this feature If you wish to create an Additional Resource check the Add l Resource box to enable the student list and check the name s as needed Create Resource Multiple Item Selection i Click on the Maintenance tab and then the Library tab 2 Use shift click ctr click to select the items you want to add to the Resource grid 3 Right click over the Library item and choose Create Resource Figure 184 Create Resource ltem Multiple Selections 4 The top part of the window shows the tiles you have selected 5 Inthe lower half of the window youll add the information pertinent for the Resources Only select those options that will be true for all the items Resources crested 2 selected 6 Click Save 7 If none of the selected items already exist in the Resource grid you ll see a message showing how many items were selected and the same number created as Resources Figure 185 Resource tems 8 This process will not create duplicates in your Resource grid If one or in more of the selected items is already in the Resource grid you ll see a notice of how many items were selected how many Resources were created and the list of those selected items that area already in the Resource grid As noted in this window you can create duplicates in the Resource grid via the Use as New right
356. ppear on the report Attendance Report Options Attendance You can leave this field Page Options Enter a title for your report The default title is blank if you prefer no title on the report Show Hours Sessions Ifyou are not tracking any time in the Attendance Calendar there is no option here If you are tracking Total Hours Time Spent or Sessions in the Attendance Calendar you can choose whether or not to display that information on the Grid by Month or List styles The Grid by Student style does not have the option to show hours information Figure 287 Attendance Report Options Report Style Grid with Month Rows c This report displays the attendance information for one student per page o The months of the school year which have attendance within the selected date range will appear as the row headers 8 A P indicates day Present a slash indicates Y day and a dash indicates an Absent day c The total Time Spent Sessions or Manual Hours entered for each month is displayed in the next to last column and totaled in the last row c The total number of days Present for each month is displayed in the last column c The total number of days Present for the selected date range is totaled in the last row Grid with Student Rows o This format displays the attendance information for all students in one month per page c student names all active students will
357. ptions Enter a tile for your report You can leave this field blank if you prefer Choose Lesson Plan Selecta Lesson Plan from the list Due the complexity of the report only one Lesson Plan can be printed at a time The Sequence spinners will show the lowest and highest sequence number available in the selected Lesson Plan You may limit the items displayed by sequence number if you like Items to Include lt Un Used Items those which have not been used to create an assignment as yet Used Items those which have been used to create an assignment already Plan Objectives and Goals information you entered along with the Lesson Plan Name Fields to Include Choose which fields you wish to display Sort By Subject Course items will appear grouped by Subject and Course following the order of your Subjects in the Maintenance list Courses are alphabetical within each Subject Sequence Order items will display in sequence number order If you are using the order field to control the order of items on the same sequence number this will be the next level or sorting Filter Choose the Subjects Courses Activities and Resources to include in this report os Lesson Plan Names Maintenance Lists Provides a list of the names of the Lesson Plans you ve created You can run this report for Active Lesson Plans Archived Lesson Plans or both You can choose to display just the plan na
358. ptions General If you do not use the Start End times feature for your Assignments you may not find the Agenda view to be very useful Feld Trips Ee Le Figure 228 Items Viewable in Student Agenda The Agenda Display Access the Agenda by clicking on the Student tab and then the Agenda tab Figure 229 Agenda Grid Panel Drop Down Lists Student Choose one Student or All Students In the All Students view youll see each students agenda side by side You can use the horizontal soroll bar to see more information See View Multiple Students below to learn how to view two or more but not necessarily all students at once View Choose the Day School Days Week Month or List view Increment For the Day School Days and Week views you can choose from 15 minutes 30 minutes or 1 hour increments Date Options effects of clicking on a date or range of dates changes based on your selected view ong You can click on any single day or click and drag over any range of dates to display those dates in the Agenda You can ctrl click on any or more non consecutive dates to display them side by side in the Agenda Regardless of the order in which you click on them they will display in date order The selected dates will be highlighted on the calendar School Days This option will show only those days which
359. quence numbers with the Same olan suorat course and resource Check this box if you wish to have the links to a attachments rom the onal tem copied to the Figure 97 Lesson Plan Copy Window and any existing items in the Lesson Plan wilh a lime background The preview include both used and un used items from the existing plan Take moment to review the items for placement within the Lesson Plan The new items can be edited the existing items cannot be edited in this view 8 Youcan edit the sequence numbers in this view if you wish You can also edit the Order Group Page Lesson Chapter Topic Directions Notes of Days Time Spent Sessions and Points Possible fields 9 You can uncheck the OK box for any of the newly created items to prevent them from being added to the Lesson Plan Figure 98 Lesson Plan Copy Preview w Same PLC Text Options a3 10 You can set which columns to display the order in which columns are displayed and the grouping and sorting settings for this table 11 Click the Create button to add the new items to your Lesson Plan click Cancel to exit without adding the items Duplicating a Select the item you wish to copy gle Lesson Plan Item Right click over the item and choose Use As New 8 Click OK on the Use as New message A duplicate of the original item will appear in an Add Edit Lesson window 4 Change any in
360. r Scope amp Sequence Other The Scope and Sequence report lists Topics covered grouped by Subject Course and Resource for completed Assignments and Field Trips in the selected date range This report allows you to show some of what was studied in each discipline You can display the report by topic in alphabetical order or by date completed for the completed Assignment or Field Trip If you are using the Topic field to describe the specific subject matter covered this report can provide a nice addition to your student s portfolio of the work attempted through the school year Scope amp Sequence Report Options Figure 312 Scope amp Sequence Report Options Options Enter a title for this report You may leave the field blank if you prefer Items to Include Choose to display Topics from Assignments or a Lesson Plan 9 Assignments choose incomplete complete or both check both boxes Lesson Plan select a Lesson Plan from the list Fields to Display Choose whether to display the Date and or Resource information with along with your Subjects Courses and Topics If you choose to include the Date the topic was studied the Topic will be repeated for each date entry if it was covered in more than one assignment If you do not include the Date each topic will be displayed just once regardless of the number of assignments to which it is attached If you are printing Topics for a
361. r Resource filters to limit the items displayed Other Options lt are displayed if their Date Complete falls within the date parameters selected Transcript Grades The Transcript report will generate an official documentation of your student s work that is appropriate for Submission to a college or other institution There are two Transcript formats to choose from Columns and Full Page The column format uses the newspaper columns format starting with the left column and continuing in the right hand column as space is needed The Full Page option utilizes the full left to right margin space for each line entry Full Page Transcripts are available only in the Yearly report format a more traditional format breaking items down by the year in which they were completed You can choose to include letter grades and or percentage grades in this report Column Transcripts are available in the Yearly or Combined format The Combined version has no yearly designations The Combined report also offers the option of creating a report without including letter grades This version will display one line for each completed Course for each selected year If the student has completed work for the same Course in more than one school year the Course will appear multiple times in the report Some users choose to create a special school year when using the Combined report that encompasses the school years they want to report on In the option
362. r anything you like the primary intent of this area is to provide an area to record results of college entrance exams such as SAT ACT and CLEP If you are already editing a Student record to add other information you can move to this area simply by clicking on the tab in the Student Edit window Click on the Maintenance tab and then the Students tab Right click over a Student name and choose Edit Click the Standardized Tests tab Click Add Enter a name for the test of 1 10 alphanumeric characters The date fields are optional If you do not want to include dates for either or both of these fields click the down arrow next to the date field and choose the None label at the bottom of the calendar 7 Enter an overall score and or percentile for the test 8 Choose whether to have this item appear on the Transcript or not EEE You can change this option at any time 9 Inthe Notes field use the standard Windows keyboard shortcuts to copy ctrl c paste chri or cut ctr x text Right clicking in this area will enable the spell check feature 10 You can use the icons above the Notes area to adjust the font as desired 11 Click Save to add the entry Click Cancel to exit without saving Figure 28 Students Standardized Tests Input Window Deleting the Default Student i Click the Maintenance tab and then the Students tab 2 Enter at least one other student using the directions above 3
363. r auto generating multiple lesson plan items with incremented page lesson chapter information Topic Optional 100 character limit You may enter brief description of the lesson plan item basic facts covered chapter or lesson title elc of days Optional This field is only enabled when you have elected to display the Date Given field in Tools Options Assignments It allows you to set a specific number of days between the date given and date due of assignments created from this Lesson Plan item So if you set the number of days at 4 and the Date Given is September 10 then the Date Due will be September 13 The Date Due will be placed the appropriate number of days into the future The Date Given counts as day one The Date Due will not be placed on a non school day holiday or absent The default entry for this field is 1 indicating a one day assignment that is given and due on the same date Allow Reschedule At times you may need to change the original Date Due of an assignment If you are moving a number of assignments you might wish to use the Reschedule feature If you uncheck this box this item will not be affected by the Reschedule process and will remain on its originally scheduled Date Due Lesson Plan items with this box checked will create assignments with the box checked as well Directions Optional Enter any directions you want the student to have when completing the assignment Information entered in
364. r grids 7 Credit Units This is an optional field You may enter a value with up to 2 decimal points Credit units are awarded in the Transcript when a passing grade is attained for the Course for the year 8 Calculation Option This option allows you to determine how the credits you have assigned will be awarded to your student Click on the link to set the way in which credit hours will be awarded 5 10 oe spent required tor fil red 8 7 ese Spent resedit a ul ret awarded the student has a passing grade for the course AND the student has at east Figure 47 Credit Unit Calculation Options Basic Full credit hours are awarded if the student has a passing grade for the course No partial creditis allowed This is the default selection for all new Courses Time Full credit hours are awarded if the student has a passing grade for the course and the student has at least the total amount of time spent noted No partial creditis allowed Sessions Full credit hours are awarded if the student has a passing grade for the course and the student has at least the total number of sessions noted No partial credit is allowed Time Spent Partial Credit Full credit hours are awarded if the student has a passing grade lor the course and the student has at least the total amount of time spent noted Partial credit hours are awarded for time spent less than that noted
365. r new school year menda yeu ike ta Begin your year Wednesda nae ne one ays ure Sindor Figure 11 School Year Calculator Year Set up your new school year Enter a onere forthe new ene vear T hat date would you Ike to begn your school e 2 What is tha Latest date that school fn be compat for th year Figure 12 School Year Calculator Calculation Click the Next button or click the Holidays tab to move to the next section of the calculator Here you can enter whatever Holidays or vacation days you ve planned for the year Supplemental video available on this topic Click the Set Holiday button to open the All Day Event window Click on the arrow buttons to display the month in which you want to schedule your day s Click on a date or click and drag over a range of dates Choose Holiday Vacation or Other in the Type drop down list To Tracker these designations are al treated in the same way We offer the different types to help you differentiate between the days off you are scheduling Holiday Vacation and Other days are referred to as HVO from this point on 1 13 If desired enter a description of up to 50 characters 44 Click the Set button 15 Repeat steps 10 14 as many times as necessary to sel your days 16 When you have entered all the HVO days you want for now click the Close button All your days will be displayed The g
366. r the report as those settings are dictated by the assignments you have selected for the report Mark as Complete allows you to enter a checkmark in the Done box and a date of completion for one or more items at the same time You can choose to mark all assignments as completed on their original Due Date or with a date you select from the calendar Ifyou have selected items that are already marked as complete their completion date will change as indicated by your choice here This will cause any grades or Time Spent Sessions entered for these items to be added to the appropriate report and display calculations Ifyou are using Auto Attendance the appropriate dates will be marked as Present on the student s Attendance Calendar Mark as Incomplete allows you to remove the checkmark and completion date from any selected record s Any grades or Time Spent Sessions information entered in these items wil no longer be calculated in reports or displays until the items are once again marked as complete If you are using Auto Attendance and all completed items for a date are marked as incomplete the designation of Present will be removed from the appropriate Attendance Calendar Assignment Timer Supplemental video available on this topi The Timer allows you to keep track of how long it takes for a student to complete a task You can count up from zero or you can count down from a specified time limit For example if your studen
367. r the report card and transcript You can choose to set items with the same letter grade but different minimum percentages and grade points if you wish so that an A al 94 percent receives one grade point and an A at 95 receives a different grade point 7 Te Delete an existing line lt You can remove any grade line you no longer wish to use in a grading scale Ifyou already have graded assignments using this scale the related grades wil be changed accordingly if you d like to remove the plus and minus grade for instance and work with a straight A B C D grading scale you can right click on the plus and minus grade lines in turn and choose Delete from the context menu M you delete a line in error youll need to use the Add Line button to replace it and re enter the information To Add a line to a grading scale Click the Add Line button or right click over any line in the grading scale and choose Add Enter the letter grade minimum percentage and grade point you would like The minimum percentage must be a whole number The Grade Point can contain up to 2 decimal places Click Save to create your entry Homeschool Tracker Plus will automatically display your items in numerical order by the minimum percentage values Adding a Grading Scale You can create as many grading scales as you like Click on the Maintenance tab then the Other tab Choose Grading Scales in the Select Table to Edit
368. r us Subjects Courses and Activities An Overview Supplemental video available on this topic Subjects are the top of the Homeschool Tracker Plus hierarchy Subjects can be anything you want them to be but generally fall into the following types of categories Language Arts Math Science History etc Subjects are required for the creation of Assignments Field Trips Lesson Plan and Weekly Planner items For some jurisdictions there are specific subjects you are required to teach In general you won t have more than 10 Subjects total forall of your children One subject can be used for more than one student and more than one grade level You can use the Course feature to further specify the area of study see below You can name your subjects anything that suits your needs For space considerations each Subject is assigned a code for display on certain screens You can assign any 1 7 character code of your choice essentially just an abbreviation of the Subject name Reports will show full Subject names Subjects can be designated as Core or Elective All subjects are set as Core when the product ships You may change the status of any Subject at any time by editing the Subject If your governing authority requires that you teach certain subjects you might want to make these your Core subjects as they can bbe singled out in Report options to include just that information Courses are subdivisions of Subjects
369. rading you must assign activities to courses and assign a weight to each activity selected One activity may be attached to more than one course and even have a different weight assigned in each See Grades Grading Scales and Weighted Grading Homeschool Tracker Plus comes with pre entered Subjects and Activities You may add to edit or delete from these lists to suit your needs Subjects Courses Activities gt Language Arts Literature Class Discussion Figure 38 Subjects Courses amp Activit Subjects and Courses Since Subjects and Courses are inter related well ook at these features together The Subjects Courses Grid Access the grid by clicking on the Maintenance tab and then the Subjects Courses tab Subjects and Courses are listed together under the Maintenance tab There are no pre loaded Courses so your initial view wil show just Subjects listed in alphabetical order To put Subjects in a different order click the Change Order button In this window you can drag a subject name to the exact position in the list where you want it When dragging in the upward direction the selected subject will be placed above the highlighted subject you drag it over When dragging in the downward direction the selected r Freon amos
370. rameters of your drop down settings Search text will compare against Subject Course Activity Resource Page Lesson Chapler Topic Directions and Notes fields Hidden fields will be included in the search parameters This search field is tied to the search fields in the other Student tab areas Field Trip Goals Progress Memorization and Reading Log Grouping and Sorting You may choose to group and sort the displayed information in the Assignment grid according to any column heading For full details please see the Using the Grids section Adding an Assignment While assignments can be added via the Lesson Plan and Weekly Planner features or by copying from existing assignments in this section we re just going to deal with entering an Assignment from scratchy There are four different ways to bring up the Add Assignment window Click Add button in the Student Assignment grid panel Click on New in the menu bar then click Assignment Press the F5 key Right click in the Student Assignments grid and choose Add New There must be at least on assignment displayed in the grid to use this last option See The Anatomy of an Assignment above for a description of each field The drop down lists will be filed with the default entries Choose other selections as needed Fil in each field as desired The only required fields are Student Subject Activity and Date Due Click SAVE amp CLOSE to add the Assignment to the
371. ray bar will show how many available school days above your minimum are still available ticas Tams Enter holidays vacationg Figure 13 School Year Calculator Set HVO Enter holidays vacations and other days off 1 Figure 14 School Year Calculator 17 Click the Next button or click the Terms tab to move to the next section of the calculator Here you set your terms for the year Homeschool Tracker Plus requires that you create a minimum of term per school year 12 18 Use the spinner to choose the number of terms you want from 1 to 6 Homeschool Tracker Plus will automatically set start end dates and display the number of school days in each term creating terms with roughly the same number of days throughout your school year You can edit the Term dates and code fields If you make a change be sure to click the Update button The program will automatically assign each term to Semester 1 S1 or Semester 2 S2 for the Transcript Holidays Tans Raven Create Terms EEG Hest Sewan 0 Tome Deca 2e T2 St Emesso maman oecs0 meemmeGamo 12 80 Worse 210 s00 Mo oF Figure 15 School Year Calculator Terms 19 Itis best to have the Start date of one Term immediately follow the End date af the previous Term even if those dates fall on non school days This will prevent yo
372. re about to be made to your selected assignments This is an important step in the Reschedule process as it allows you to make changes or cancel the reschedule prior to commiting those changes to the Assignment grid 1 Alter setting your Reschedule options click PREVIEW to open the Confirm Rescheduled Assignments window ia aon 11 200 8 en ei a hey ot 08 7 ee d Date Due Frey Api 2008 1 ani 2 Bid Date Due Maney 0208 5 Due Ferde A 7 288 Sen Figure 350 Confirm Rescheduled Assignments Window 2 You can see the Old Date Due and the New Date Due which will help you verify the items before submitting the changes to the Assignment grid 3 The default grouping is by Old Date Due You can change the grouping to whatever suits you by dragging off the old header and dragging the new column title into the header area Homeschool Tracker Plus will remember those settings the next time you reschedule 4 You can use the Choose Columns icon to select which columns are displayed in this view 9 5 Youcan uncheck any assignment do not wish to change by clicking the OK box for that item You can replace the checkmark in the same way You may also use the Check All Uncheck Al buttons 6 You can change the New Due Date value for any assignment Click in the cell and use the drop down calendar to select a new date Click anywhere else on the grid to preserve the date
373. ress will be displayed You can change this to meet your needs It you add multiple attachments they will be listed in alphabetical order by Display Name Click SAVE on the Attachments window and then click Save amp Close on the Assignment add edit window 27 Viewing an Attachment Edit the Assignment and click on the View Edit Attachments link 2 Right click over the atachmentyouwantio view 3 Choose Open from the context menu 4 Homeschool Tracker Plus will open a file in its native program Word Excel image viewer etc You must of course have that program installed on your computer to open the file 5 Ifyou wish to view a webpage Homeschool Tracker Plus will open the web page in your preferred browser 6 If you are using Homeschool Tracker Plus on multiple computers you may not be able to access your attached files from all computers If you are using a home network storing your attached files in a shared directory is the best way to avoid this issue Files are not stored in the database itself Only the details of the file path are retained in the Homeschool Tracker Plus database file Figure 146 Attachment Right Click Menu Editing an Attachment Edit the Assignment and click on the View Edit Attachments link Right click over the attachment you want to view Choose Edit from the context menu Make your changes Click Save in the editing window and the Attachments win
374. review the sequence numbers to make sure they match the ordinal numbers on your worksheet Click Create to add the items to your Lesson Plan Click OK 7 Next set up your Lessons that will go around the tests Set up an item for your lessons and click Fill out the Page Lesson Text options as needed In the Sequence number section set the Start On number to and increment by one Check the box next to Do not use sequence numbers with the same plan subject course and resource This is an important step Checking this box assures that you will not have booked a test and a lesson on the same sequence number Click Begin Copy to create all the lessons The Preview window will show the new items to be created along with the existing items so you can review the plan before committing to your changes Click Create to add the new items to the plan 8 If your tests or other inserted items do not fall at regular intervals you can stil use this plan Set up the interval items first as above using the closest increment you can Then manually adjust your sequence numbers so all your interval items are properly spaced in the Lesson Plan After that you enter the regular lessons around the existing items as noted above remembering to check the Do not use option Copy from Assignments One of the benefits of the Lesson Plan is to be able to take assignments you have already created in the Assignment grid a
375. rked as Present Ye day on the student s attendance calendar when an assignment is marked as complete for that date and the total Time Spent or Sessions for the completed items is less than the values entered You must have either the Time Spent or the Sessions field enabled in order to use the Present e day option Time Entry Method Choose whether and which type of time to display in the Attendance calendar The selected type will also appear on the Main Menu screen I you display one of these options in the Attendance calendar you can also choose to display the values on the Attendance Report See Time Entry in the Attendance Calendar Backup Options ened Sesion Rande IJ Fere Me To aka Ban Dey tese bcp Rarer 10 en Te See Ren When gam Es V hort tbc Fels Eve Tne You t Figure 328 Program Options Backups Remind Me to Make Backup We strongly recommend that you create a backup of your database on a regular basis To that end you choose to have Homeschool Tracker Plus remind you to do that Check this box to enable the reminder Days Between Backup Reminders Set the frequency of reminders to create a backup of your database from 1 daily to 30 once month When to Show Reminder Choose whether you you d like to be reminded to backup when the program opens or upon closing Copy to Autoback Folder Every Time You Exit If you enable this option each time you close Homeschool Tra
376. rm LT assignments will be displayed on each occurrence or just the first occurrence A long term assignment is one where the Date Given and Date Due are different School Days Choose whether non school days will be included in the report This will show any chores and appointments that fall on non school days Reading Log and Memorization Tasks will appear on each day in the date range Sorting If you are using Start End Times the start time will be the primary factor in the sort order of the items your list for each day without time come first then those with start end times If you have multiple items with the same start time or are not using time at all you can set your preference for how items are sorted from that point Time Order Subject After time the Order column will determine how things are listed If two items have the same Order number then the order of subjects in the Maintenance list will take precedence Time Subject Order After time the Subject column will determine how things are listed The Subject sort will follow the order of subjects in your Maintenance list If two items have the same subject then the Order will ake precedence Page Break Student Each time a new student comes up a new page is started Student and Date Each time a new date comes up a new page is started Filter Choose the Students Subjects Courses Activities andlor Resources to inc
377. roficiency meaning that you stick with a particular topic until the student has a full grasp of the material there is little value in setting up weighted grading as all grades will be at or near 100 Setting Up Weighted Grading 4 Click on the Maintenance tab then the Subjects Courses tab 2 Double click on a Course or click ADD COURSE to create a new Course 3 Inthe Grading Options section of the Course window choose YES for Weighting Figure 156 Turning Weighted Grading On for a Cour 3 This will enable the Total Weight field and add the Wt weight column to the Activity window 5 As or after you add Activities click on the Weight field for each Activity to enter the value The Total Weight will adjust each time you add change or remove an activilys weighting 6 Activities can have different weights in different Courses Tests may count for 50 of the grade your Algebra course but only 40 in your Presidents course 7 If you would like to include an activity but do not want items attached to that activity to have an effect the overall grade set the weight for that activity to 0 8 If you click SAVE while the Total Weight is greater than or less than 100 you wil receive an error message Click OK and adjust your weights as necessary 9 You may come back to this screen to edit the weighting at any time Changes you make will affect all the Term and Yearly grades of all assignments tied to th
378. roups identical Assignments together where one or more students have the same work assigned There are a few report options that are only available when you ve selected to create the Combined style of the Assignments report Assignments to Include Only Incomplete Items with Notes When you choose this option the other options in this section are disabled Only Assignments which have Notes attached will be included in the report Fields to include Notes The Combined format is the only report that will show you any Notes you ve added to your assignments So in this format you can choose whether or not you want those Notes printed on the report or not Page Break None The report will continue page to page until it runs out of data to report lt Grouping The report will start a new page based on your selection in the grouping area above Other Options When you select the Combined report style you can elect to hide the Student names showing which students are assigned to which tasks hen be a Figure 286 Combined Assignment Report Options Attendance Other The Attendance report documents days and hours spent schooling There are three layouts available which are outline below You can print an Attendance report for any date range and choose to include exclude Time Spent Sessions or Total Hours you are tracking in the attendance calendar Holiday Vacation Other days do nat a
379. rs It will be used to display attendance on the All Students view of the Attendance Calendar 6 The Address field will be auto completed with the information you entered in the Maintenance School Info tab Figure 22 Add Student Window 7 You can click the Set Color link to choose a specific color for this student By choosing a color for each student you may find it easier to more quickly identify what you re viewing in the grids This color will be used to highlight entries for the student in the Assignments Field Trips Memorization Reading Log Weekly Planner Main Menu and Maintenance Students grids To utilize these color selections in the grids you must turn on the Student Colors feature in Tools Options General See Colors 8 When you have entered all the information you want for now click SAVE to add the student to your database Editing a Student Click on the Maintenance tab and then the Students tab Right click over a student name and click Edit 3 Make any changes you wish or add information to one of the additional tab areas of Grade Levels Schools Attended Activities and Achievements or Standardized Tests 4 Click Save to keep the changes Click Cancel to exit without saving 7 Entering Grade Levels You may enter a grade level for each student to correspond to each School Year you ve created This information can be included in the Report Card and Transcript In additi
380. rt Options Figure 317 Time Spent Sessions Report Options Page Options Enter a title for this report You may leave the field blank if you prefer Items to Include Choose whether or not to include the Time Spent or Sessions information for your Reading Log items If you choose to include Reading Log items you can also choose the label used to display this time Reading Log are displayed under the Electives heading Choose whether to include Incomplete Assignments Complete Assignments or both Group By Choose to Group your display by Core Elective or by Home Away If you have disabled the Assignment Location field in Tools Options Assignments the Home Away option is disabled here as well Courses You can choose to suppress Course information so that all details are listed by Subject only Show Choose to display either Sessions or Time Spent If you have disabled one of these options in Tools Options Assignments it will be disabled here as well Column Format If you choose to group by Home Away the only option here is combined 273 Ifyou group by Core Elective you can choose a combined format which means all hours for the subject course will be reported together or you can choose the Home Away format which means the time will be split between those hours spent at Home and those at another location Filter Use the Student Subject Course Activity and o
381. rt homeschooltracker com How do I Zip my Database Open Homeschool Tracker Plus Click on Database in the menu bar and then click on Backup Make a backup to your DESKTOP Right click on the file on your desktop HSPlanner2 mdb Choose Send to Compressed zipped folder file will be created in that location with a zip file extension Attach it to an email to support homeschoollracker com Reinstalling Homeschool Tracker Plus The License agreement that comes with Homeschool Tracker Plus allows you to install the program computer you own and to reinstall the program on any of those computers as needed throughout your homeschooling career Use the information you received at the time of purchase to access the special link on our website to download and install the current version of the program If you have misplaced that information send an email to support homeschoollracker com which includes your full name mailing address and registered email address and we will send you the details you need Automatic Backups Homeschool Tracker Plus creates an automatic copy of the current database each time you close the program These copies are kept in a folder called AUTOBACK in the same directory where your database is stored You should not rely upon these backups as your sole means of securing your data You can choose how many different automatic backups are made before they begin copying over the old one
382. ry Ifyou have selected a category in Grouping 1 or Additional Sort it wil not be available in this selection as that field will already be included in the report Report Style Choose the style you prefer single column or full page width Items to Include Incomplete items choose to include incomplete items without a start date with a start date or both check both boxes Complete items choose to include complete items without a finished date with a finished date or both check both boxes Filter Choose which Students you want to create this report for Each student s listing wil start on a new page Sort Direction If you have selected a date type field for Grouping 1 or Additional Sort you can use this area to choose whether to display those items in ascending oldest to newest or descending newest to oldest order Reading Log Form Forms Here you can create a blank form for your student to use to create a book report or take notes on the book he is reading In the Reading Log grid under the Students tab you can create a Reading Log Form for a specific book via the right click menu When using the Reports tab area the book information will be blank Reading Log Form Options Page Options Enter a title for your report You can leave this field blank if you prefer to Include You can print the page with blank lines to assist your student or with no fines at all The no lines option will d
383. s A Lesson Plan is a planning method These items must be submitted to the assignment grid in order to attribute the work time spent or grades to particular student Weekly Planner With the Weekly Planner feature you can set up a template of tasks you assign your student on a regular basis Unlike the complete detail of a Lesson Plan item Weekly Planner items are general outlines of the assignments you ll be creating specifically dictating the days of the week you ll be assigning the work and the pattern of page lesson chapter information to be assigned A Weekly Planner item can be attributed to one specific student or to All Students See Weekly Planner Items in the Weekly Planner are not actual assignments it is simply a staging area You need to submit items from the Weekly Planner to the Assignment grid in order to assign them to your students record grades and so forth How is the Lesson Plan different from the Weekly Planner Both the Lesson Plan and Weekly Planner features help you by simplifying your day to day use of Homeschool Tracker Plus However their implementations are different In Lesson Plan you are entering each and every task you intend to give throughout the year for a given subjecticourse or Unit Study Lesson Plan also allows you to segregate items by a Plan name which be a subject student school year unit study etc All the particulars as to page lesson chapter are included in each ite
384. s The default setting is for 5 automatic backup copies You can turn off this feature in Tools Options F3 under that Backups tab Uncheck the box to Copy to Autoback Folder every time you exit Goma tment Ate ESSE Naoto TEI Rerird Ne To ake Bec Figure 355 Autoback Option Settings To change the number of automatic backup copies 1 Click on Tools then Options or press 2 Click the Backup tab 3 Use the spinner to adjust the Number of Autoback Files to be created before overwriting the oldest 4 Click Save to keep your changes click Cancel to exit without saving Identifying Autoback Files Autoback files are named for the exact date and time they were created in the following format yyyymmdd hhmmss bkp Where y jonth d day h hour m minute s second using military time Therefore an auto backup made on March 5 2007 at 1 54 pm exactly would have a file name of 20070305 135400 bkp To Restore Your Database Using an Autoback File 1 Locate the AUTOBACK file you d like to restore 2 copy of the file to a different location You can move it anywhere you like but it must be moved out of the Autoback folder Rename the file to anything you like Be sure to use the mdb file extension 4 Click on Database in the Tracker menu bar and the click on Utilities and choose Point Tracker to an existing database file and click Continue 5 Locate the file you have re
385. s elc to your student s you will need to submit the Lesson Plan items to the specific student s assignment grid as outlined below Anatomy ofa Lesson Plan Item Plan Required Lesson Plan items must be attached to a specific Lesson Plan The name of the Lesson Plan can be anything you Ike within the 100 character limit Some choose to name their LP for a grade level and subject or course some by the primary resource Your choice wil likely be determined by the way in which you organize your plans Goals Optional You may elect to attribute goals to any lesson plan item or group of lesson plan items Subject Required Select a Subject from the drop down list Course Optional Select a Course from the drop down list or choose the blank line entry if you do not wish to attribute a specific Course to this item Activity Required Select an Activity from the drop down list Resource Optional Select a Resource from the drop down list or choose the blank line if you do not wish to attribute a specific Resource to this item Location Optional The Location field allows you to track where each assignment was given If you are not required to track this information you can simply leave the default Home location as is and ignore this field Forta Posate 0 Tie Soent 0 0 p am enne Tees 0 Oa f Mow Rancho on ifo fr ngon pan ton ieu
386. s 1 and 2 for the next year then repeat steps 3 through 7 as needed pane Transcript Options for Columns Style Page Options Title Enter a title for your report The default title is Transcript Graduation Date Label If you include a Graduation Date on your Transcript you have the option here to customize the title of the entry The default tile is Projected Graduation Date Your entry will be maintained until you change it Report Style Yearly Items are grouped by year Under each year Subjects are listed alphabetically Courses are listed alphabetically below their Subject Combined Subjects are listed alphabetically Courses are listed alphabetically below thelr Subject School Years Only years which have at least one term defined will appear as selections lt You may include as many or as few years as you wish Figure 318 Transcript Columns Report Options Filter Due to the complexity of the report you can only create a Transcript for one student at a time Choose which Subjects Courses and or Activities you want to include in your Transcript Previously archived Subjects and Courses will appear on the list followed by an asterisk to signify their status Header Items Choose which of the listed items you want to display in the header area of the Transcript Body tems For the Yearly format Letter Grades are automatically included Choose whether to display Cred
387. s calculated by taking an average for each weighted Activity and multiplying it by the weight assigned to that Activity Then all weighted values are added together to get the final grade See Weighted Grading below for more information Yearly Grades Yearly averages are taken by creating a simple average of the Term averages that have already been calculated Examples for Non weighted grading using Averages Assignments Term 1 Subject Cou Activity P s Poss Mam Algebra 1 Test 50 35 70 00 Math Algebra 1 Test 100 82 82 00 Mai Algebra i Test 300 80 80 00 Mai Algebra i Test 700 78 78009 Mai Algebra 1 Homework 35 3 714 Mai _ _ 70 g 30007 Mai Algebra 1 Homework 10 EJ 90 00 Mah Algebra 1 Homework 70 E 90 00 Mam Algebra i Homewok 70 1 700 0 Math Algebra T Homework 50 38 26 00 Math Algebra 1 Homework 25 EJ 36007 Tol Eri Term 1 Math Algebra 1 969 14 11 88 10 Assignments Term 2 Subject Course Activity Pis Poss Pis Eamed Grade Mat Algebra i Test 50 25 30 00 Math Algebra i Test 100 95 95 00 Math Algebra i Test 100 72 72 00 Math Algebra i Test 100 78 73 00 Math Algebra T Test 100 a 81 0 Math Algebra i Homework 50 50 100 00 Math Algebra i Homework 50 48 6 00 Math Algebra i H
388. s chart format Grading Scale Report Opi ns Choate Grating Seale ih Shoe A Level Page Options Enter a title for your report You can leave this field blank if you prefer Choose Grading Scale Choose any active grading scale to print You can print one scale at a time Figure 297 Grade Scale Report Options C Journal Other The Journal report provides a printout of your nates throughout the year The header will indicate the date range chosen Journal Report Options Page Options Enter a title for your report You can leave this field blank if you prefer Select Choose to print entries form the Teacher Journal or from selected students If you choose Students the hyperlink will be enabled and you can choose from among your active Students Category Click the link to select the categories you wish to include in the report Fields to Display Choose whether or not to include the Title of your Journal entries Group By Choose to group by Category or by Date Page Break Options Student Each time a new student is encountered new page wil be started Figure 296 Journal Report Student Group By A new page will be started when each new Category or Date is encountered based on your options as well as for a new Student Lesson Plan Planning The Lesson Plan report provides a printout of items in a selected Lesson Plan for your review Lesson Plan Report Options Page O
389. s in the Weekly Planner are not actual assignments it is simply a staging area You need to submit items from the Weekly Planner to the Assignment grid in order to assign them to your students record grades and so forth Anatomy of a Weekly Planner Item ur en mi KERE cien Figure 124 Weekly Planner Add Edit Window Student Required Weekly Planner tems are attached to students You can choose a single Student or the All Students option If you select All Students an Assignment will be created for each Active student when you prepare the Weekly Planner item Goals Optional You may elect to attribute goals to any Weekly Planner item Subject Required Select a Subject the drop down list Course Optional Select a Course from the drop down list or choose the blank line if you do not wish to specify a Course for this item Activity Required Select an Activity from the drop down list Resource Optional Select a Resource from the drop down list or choose the blank line if you do not wish to specify a Resource for this item Location Optional The Location field in Assignments allows you to track where each assignment was given If you are not required to track this information you can simply leave the default Home location as is and ignore this field Attachments Optional You may attach a reference to a document image or website to any Weekly Planner ilem W
390. s or Chores at the same time Click on the Student tab and then the Agenda tab Set the View drop down to List 3 Click on a single date click and drag over a range of dates check the View Entire School Year box 4 Click the Choose Agenda Items link and check just chores and or appointments 5 Use Shift click or Ctri click to select the items you want to change Right click over the selection and choose Edit Set the new start end times you want for these items or click the All Day Event box Click Save to keep the changes or click Cancel to exit without making changes Figure 235 Group Edit AppointmentiChore Making a Single Copy of an Appointment or Chore Double click on any Appointment or Chore Click the Copy button in the Add Edit window Check the name s of the student s to receive the copy Click Preview and confirm the items to be created Click Submit Copying Appointments or Chores can make multiple copies of Appointments or Chores as you enter them or after the fact copies as you create the new item enter your details as above and then click the Copy button and follow the directions below To make copies from an existing Appointment or Chore right click on the item and choose 1 To make multiple repeating copies of a selected item for one or more students click Repeat over date range 2 Place a check next to the names of the Students to receive the new items
391. s window you would select only this year definition Credit hours which you enter when creating a Course are awarded for each Course with a final passing grade final grade higher than F based on the Credit Hour Calculation you have designated Assignments with a subject but no course have no credit units assigned If assignments for a Subject have no specified course the subject name will be displayed in the Course field of the Transcript If you are using Time Spent or Sessions to determine Credit Hours to be awarded See Courses there must be at least one completed graded assignment per activity with Time Spent or Sessions in order for those values to count towards the total Credit Hours awarded If expected items are not appearing on the transcript one or more of the following are true There are assignments for the course Assignments are not marked as complete Assignments do not have grades pls poss and pts earned Assignments have Date Completed values that fall outside the reporting time frame Assignments are not attributed to the proper subjecticourse Report filers are set to Selected and such selections preclude inclusion of the desired items 2 Summary Credit Hours and Grade Point tables are available for both Transcript types The last page of either form of the Transcript is the same It contains information you have entered into the Student Schools Attended Activities and Achievements and Standardized Test
392. saving Mark as Complete Figure 222 Group Edit Memorization 1 Right click over a single item or use Shift click or Clri click to select multiple items and right click over the selection and 2 Choose Mark Complete from the menu 3 You have two options for your completion date The default selection is to enter a Finished Date equal to the Start Date Alternatively you may select a date from the calendar to use as the Finished Date 4 Click OK All selected items will now display a check in the Done column and the date selected in the End column Mark as Incomplete 1 Right click over a single or use Shift click or Cirl click to select multiple items and right click aver the selection Choose Mark Incomplete from the menu 3 The checkmark will be removed from the Done column and the date will be removed from the End column 4 If you open the Edit window for this item the check will be gone from the Finished box and the Finished Date field will be blank Copying Memorization Items Single Item Copy 1 Right click on an item and choose Use as New 2 Click OK on the Use As New message You are now looking at a COPY of the original item 9 3 Make any changes necessary 4 Click Save to choose a student or students to receive this item click Cancel to exit without saving 5 The original record will not be changed in any way Multiple Item Copy Use Shificlick or Ctri click to select two
393. sent Days recusare Due used ski non school Davs Check this box you weh to have the inks to attachments rom the Signal Rem copied tote new Rams Figure 109 Submit with Use the following days and time Has Time If you have enabled the startlend times option you can set specific Start End times for your created assignments Uncheck the box if you do not wish to assign times Spread evenly over __ days use this option if you want to spread or compress the selected Lesson Plan items evenly over the number of days you specily If you choose this option the Lesson Plan items will be kept in order based on their sequence number and order field entry However items with the same sequence number may not be on the same date For example You have selected 6 Lesson Plan items with sequence numbers from 1 through 6 Without the spread evenly option your items will be placed one on each of the first 6 available school days If you enter 3 in the spread evenly box Those six items will be doubled up 2 items on each of 3 school days in order to spread them evenly across the options you ve set If you choose to enter 12 in the spread evenly box one item will be placed on every other day If the items cannot be divided up evenly Homeschool Tracker Plus will distribute them as close to evenly as possible over the number of days indicated Please note that the value you enter for spread evenly is the number of schoo days
394. sers You can import a Goals list from any other Homeschool Tracker Plus user See the Import Export section for more information The Teacher Goals Grid Figure 243 Teacher Goals Grid Panel Collapse Expand Icons ay Use the blue up down arrow icons to collapse or expand all the groupings on this grid You colapeelexpend indvidual groupings by cicking the 1 buttons on the grouping headers Homeschool Tracker Plus will not retain your settings when you leave this screen con Choose Columns and Reset Icons 1 Click the CHOOSE COLUMNS icon 2 Check the columns to include uncheck the columns to exclude Column selections wil not be visible for features which you have elected to disable in Tools Options Figure 245 Assignments Choose 3 Click Save to retain your selections click Cancel to exit without changing your column Columns Icon view 4 Things to remember ume You can change your selections at any time Excluding a column from view does not remove the data stored in that field 210 Columns Icon You can reset columns column widths and column order to their original settings by click the RESET icon in the Assignment Grid header The Drop Down Lists Filter Choose whether to view Active tems Archived items or Both The Search field Use the Search field to quickly find the Goal s you are looking for Search text will compare against the
395. signifying that they are long term assignments date given different from date due Deleting Assignments i Click on the Student tab then the Assignment tab 2 Locate the assignment you want to remove using the filters and date selector 3 Right click over the assignment and choose Delete from the context menu Alternatively you can click once on the assignment to select it and then press the Delete key on your keyboard 4 Click OK to confirm deletion click Cancel to exit without deleting Deleted Items cannot be retrieved Deleting Multiple Assignments Click on the Student tab then the Assignment tab Locate the assignments you want to remove using the fiters and date selector Use shift click or ctrl click to highlight the assignments to be removed Right click over the selection and choose Delete from the context menu Click OK to confirm deletion click Cancel to exit without deleting Deleted Items cannot be retrieved Archiving Assignments When you create a new school year the assignments from the previous school year will be hidden from Only the items with a date given date due or date complete that falls within the starting and ending dates of your Active School Year will be visible view assignments from a previous year use the Tools Switch School Year menu to select the year you want to work with Printing Assignments You can create a report far any group of assignments for one or more students
396. signments are the same they will have the same sequence Figure 102 Lesson Plan View of Copied Assignments Working with a Lesson Plan Copying to a New Plan This process allows you to copy items from one plan into another plan while maintaining the integrity of the original Lesson Plan To view the Lesson Plans grid click on the Teacher tab and the Lesson Plans tab Choose a Lesson Plan from the Plan drop down list Use shift click or ctrl click to select the items you wish to copy to a different Lesson Plan Right click over the selection and choose Copy Select a Lesson Plan from the Plan drap down list You may click the pencil icon button to add a new Lesson Plan name or to edit the visible plan 6 Choose whether you want any existing attachments to the selected items to be attached to the copies made as well 7 Click Copy 8 To view the copied items in their new Plan select the Plan name in the Plan drop down list at the top of the Lesson Plan grid 9 The copied items will retain all of their original information including their original sequence numbers You can now edit the items as desired 10 The original Lesson Plan items will remain in the original plan 53 Moving to a New Plan If you wish to extract Lesson Plan Items from one plan and move them to another use the Group Edit feature to select a different Lesson Plan Name To vie
397. sions This privilege allows the student to enter their own Time Spent andlor Sessions for any assignment Security Level Change Library Items This privilege allows the student to add new Reading Log items by adding a new item to the Library fram the Add Reading Log Item window 59 More Information about Your Database Restoring Your Database You might find you need to restore your database due to a complete computer failure to install Homeschool Tracker Plus on a new computer or to restore a previously backed up copy of the database after making changes to the existing database that are too numerous to delete individually The Process i Insert your flash drive or other device where the backup is stored into the appropriate drive 2 Copy the database file from the backup location to a location on your hard drive Be sure you make a note of the location where you copy the file 3 Open Homeschool Tracker Plus 4 Click on Database in the menu bar 5 Click on Utilities amp Click on Point Tracker to an existing database file 7 Click the Continue button 8 Point to the new location Click Open 9 The database in use will change to the one you have selected 10 Click OK Starting Over with a Fresh Database There may be a time when you want to start over with an emply database This will not overwrite the database file already use It simply creates a new blank file for you to use Click on Database
398. ssions You can set days present as full or half days Each Student has his own Attendance Calendar which shows the number of days Present for the Active School Year The Students Attendance Calendar view shows the initials of each student marked as present or absent on that date as well as Holiday Vacation Other days Full day and Half day Present options You can choose to mark a date as a full day or day Present When using Auto Attendance you ll set minimum limits for Time Spent or Sessions to be met before a day willbe marked as a Full day Anything less than those limits will cause a day to be marked as Ye present To use the day Present feature you must have ether Time Spent or Sessions enabled in Tools Options Assignments The All Students View When the All Students option is selected in the Student drop down list the calendar will display Figure 157 Attendance All Students View 45 Holiday Vacalion Other days along with their descriptions Present for any date on which at least one student is marked as Present or Present Ye day Initials will be displayed for each student who has been marked as present on that date Absent for any date on which at least one student is marked as absent The day will show the green Absent color but will also display the details for any student marked as present on that dale Time Entr
399. st Choose Archive from the context menu The Archive box will be checked 4 When you return to the Library grid or change the filter from Active to Archive Only the record will be removed from the Active view You can archive two or more items at the same time Use shift click or ctrl click to select the you wish to archive Right click over the selection and chose Archive from the context menu Un Archiving a Library Item At any time you can choose to move a Library item from the Archive list back to the Active list Click on the Maintenance tab then on the Library lab Right click over the Library item you wish to move to the inactive list Choose Unarchive from the context menu The Archive box will be unchecked When you return to the Library grid or change the filter from Active to Archive Only the record will be removed from the Archive Only view You can un archive two or more items at the same time Use shift click or ctrl click to select the items you wish to reactivate Right click over the selection and chose Unarchive from the context menu Printing Library Items You can create a printout of Library tems using any number of criteria See Reports Custom Library Report If you want to create a report for specific Library items you can select those items in the Library grid and send them directly to a report format 1 Click on the Maintenance tab and then the Library tab 2 Group and
400. t If there is no entry in the Library record for a selected field it will be ignored If you have selected a category in Grouping 1 Grouping 2 or Additional Sort it will not be available in this selection as that field will already be included in the report Report Style Choose the style you prefer single column or full page width Figure 301 Library Report Options Include Borrowed Items items that have been marked as Borrowed will be listed in the report Loaned Items items that have been marked as Loaned will be listed in the report Neither borrowed nor loaned items that are not designated as Borrowed nor as Loaned will be listed in the report Un used Items items that are not attached to any Assignment Lesson Plan or Weekly Planner item lt Used Items items that are attached to Reading Log or Resource entries Status Choose whether to include Active items Archived items or both check both boxes Filter Choose which Students Subjects Courses Activities and or Resources to include in the report For Subjects the All Subjects option wil only display those items which are attributed to the All Subjects selection in the Subject drop down list For Courses the All Courses option will only display those items which are attributed to the All Courses selection in the Course drop down list Sort Direction you have selected date type field f
401. t message You might also receive this based on your firewall settings or if the site Tracker is trying to reach is temporarily unavailable Unable ta connects hnp eceamatonnvscom This may be duete a rei rene ening a jour cempoler or nest tat Gertie pea ein tn ay ale wt vi Taan unmet J Figure 178 ISBN Unable to Connect Message 6 match is found you ll see a message to that effect Click OK to be returned to the ISBN download window and try again or cancel The ISBN Lookup tool connects with a database from Amazon com It wil only locate books or Amazon e books Some smaller publishers of homeschooling materials may not be available in this database resulting in the no matches found message Figure 179 ISBN No Matches Found Message 7 If a match is found the Confirm Fields to Update window will appear lt This window will show you the information found for the Title Author Publisher Call Number and Thumbnail fields Sng rte Eten The All fields are checked by default z Mey Fean You can uncheck the box for any field you wish to Pee Te exclude You can edit any of the fields at this time Click Save to add the item to your Library Click Cancel to exit the window without saving information Continue filing in the other fields of the form as needed Click SAVE to add the Library item 10 Thumbnail images themselves are not cached in the data
402. t you are looking for Sony signs Meer Figure 362 Help File Search i Enter a word or phrase in the keyword box 2 All documents containing your selected keyword or phrase will be listed in the Select Topic to Display window 3 Double click on any title to view that document 4 Your selected keyword or phrase will be highlighted in blue in the document window each time it appears 5 To clear the blue highlighting click the Options icon at the top of the window and then click Refresh or press the F5 key on your keyboard Favorites If you find yourself returning to the same Help page you may set it as a Favorite so that you do not need to search for this topic each time you open the Help File With the Help page displayed click on the Favorites tab The title will appear in the Current Topic box Click ADD to include this item in your list of Favorites When you have multiple items in your Favorites Topic window use the Display button to view the highlighted topic 5 Click once on a topic and click the Remove button to remove the item from your Favorites list e The Agenda Display Figure 363 Help File Favorites How do I Get Additional Assistance We want to provide the best customer service possible to our customers To that end there are a number of ways for you to get additional assistance with any questions you may have about the program Training Videos We ve made a number
403. t as desired Set the Course drop down list as desired Set the Filter drop down to Un Used Used or Both Use Shitt click or Gir click to highlight the items you want to submit to the Assignment grid Click the Submit button at the top of the grid or right click over the selection and choose Submit to Assignment Grid The Submit Lessons to Assignment Grid window will open 9 Enter a Starting date This is the first Date Given Date Due you want for the assignments created The default date is determined by your settings in Tools Options Assignments 10 Lesson Plan items with a of Days value greater than 1 willbe created with the appropriate number days between Date Given and Date Due 11 Select the student s who will receive the lessons in their Assignment grids 12 Choose which days you d like Homeschool Tracker Plus to skip over when creating assignments Scheduled Holidays Absent and or Non School days 18 Continue by selecting your submission method outlined below E Charge sequence Nures Starting date for first assignment Day options may 132000 07 uel ches Choose students to receive new Items Ute falanina dars and times Do you want ta skip over special days T SER pli o noo en Figure 107 Submit Lessons Option Window E Method 1 Use LP Schedules Supplemen
404. t exists an asterisk will appear in the field in grid view See Attachments Supplies Optional You may create a list of supplies needed to complete the assignment to be created from the lesson plan item When supplies have been added an asterisk will appear in the field in grid view See Supplies Points Possible Optional Grading is optional in Homeschool Tracker Plus If you do not wish to grade your student s work leave the Points Possible field set to zero To grade work enter the points possible There is no Points Earned field in a Lesson Plan item When the item is used to create an Assignment the Assignment itself will have the Points Earned field and you ll enter the points earned when the Assignment has been completed Time Spent Optional The Lesson Plan allows you to enter the total time in hours and minutes which you want the student to spend on the Assignment that will be created from the Lesson Plan item Sessions Optional If you have opted to use Sessions instead of the Time Spent field you can preset the number of Sessions that will be awarded for completing the Assigned created from this Lesson Plan item This value will be carried over when you submit the Lesson Plan item to the student s Assignment grid Page Lesson Chapter Optional 100 character limit In this field enter the actual work to be done Pages 6 10 Lesson 12 A Chapter 4 etc Homeschool Tracker Plus has a number of options fo
405. t is working on math speed drills you can set the timer for the maximum time allowed and have a sound play when time runs out TE Openinga Timer window You can open any number of Timer windows at the same time Open a Timer window in any of the following ways Click on Tools in the menu bar and then choose Timer Press the F4 key on your keyboard Right click over any assignment and choose Timer EES E Content tret Figure 77 Assignment Timer Ifyou open a timer via the Tools menu or the F4 key the title bar of the window will simply show Timer Ifyou open a timer by right clicking over an assignment the Student Subject Activity and Page Lesson Chapter information for that assignment will appear in the title bar When you have multiple timer windows open this will help you know which timer is counting for which assignment Fiero r Orione Cort peed ine dating 00 Figure 78 Assignment Timer Showing Assignment Details Counting Up To count elapsed time starting from zero simply choose that option in the Timer window and click Start The elapsed time will display in the lower part of the window When the task has been completed click the Stop button 2 Contaminata 000 erdt i 24 minutes 27 seconds 4 Elapsed Time Figure 79 Assignment Timer Counting Up You can use the same window to begin counti
406. t or export Lesson Plans Goals Library Items and or Holidays See The Import Export Tool Reschedule Use the Reschedule feature to move assignments forward or backward in time See Rescheduling Options Open the Program Options window You can also open the Program Options window by pressing the F3 key See Program Options F3 Security Access the program s security features and set up user passwords and limit access as desired for your students See Security School year Calculator This tool will walk you through the process of creating a school year selecting your School Days setting Terms and setting up Holiday Vacation Olher See Adding School Year using the School Year Calculator Borrowed Items Due Generate a list of borrowed Library items that are due to be returned within a specified date range See Borrowed Items Recalculate Present Clicking this button will create an audit of all completed assignments in Ihe current school year and update the attendance calendar with Present as appropriate You may run this option whenever you choose You may use it to update your attendance records even if you choose not to activate the Auto Attendance option See Attendance Recalculate Time Spent This option will audit the database for assignments which meet the parameters you set date range completion status students subjects courses activities and or resources See Using Time Spent
407. t the assignment Click SAVE to commit your changes Then click the Previous or Next icon to move to the next item PreviousNext icons P amt OW cy we EIS ET OW MA EF HS E E rent cam Figure 136 Weekly Planner Previous Next Icons 2 Group Edit You can edit almost any field in two or more Weekly Planner items at a time using the Homeschool Tracker Plus Group Edit feature The only fields you cannot edit via Group Edit are Student and Page Lesson Chapter i Use the grid filters to display the items you wish to edi 2 Use Shift click or Ctri click to select the items you wish to edit 3 Right click over the selection and choose Edit The Group Assignment Edit window will appear p Le MELLE he gl int imi Figure 137 Group Edit Weekly Planner Window 4 Puta check next to each field you want to change for the selected group of items As you check them the fields will become enabled Make a new selection for each checked field 6 any drop down list you can type directly in field to create a new item or you can use the pencil icon button next to any drop down list to add a new item to that drop down list orto edit the displayed item hex this box if vou wish to have the irks to 7 You add start end times by checking the Has Time box remove startlend times by removing the checkmark in the Has
408. t to remove and drag it out of the header bar A black X will appear on top of it 2 Release the mouse button and the group heading will disappear Sorting Sorting allows you to force an order of your displayed items in ascending or descending order by any one more fields You can sort by more than one column at time Sorting can be used independently of grouping Sort order is indicated by a triangle on the column heading being sorted A right side up triangle indicates an ascending sort an upside down triangle indicates a descending sort No triangle indicates the columns are sorted in the natural database sort order Figure 331 Sorting arrow How do I SORT 1 Decide whether you want to sort in an ascending or descending order 2 Click on a column heading until the proper arrow appears up arrow for ascending down arrow for descending 3 Ifyou are sorting a column that is also grouped the grouping label in the header bar and the column header itself will display the sort arrow indicator How do I SORT by more than one category Decide whether you want to sort in ascending or descending order 2 Click on the column heading for the primary sort until the proper arrow appear ascending down arrow for descending Hold the Shift key and click on the secondary column you wish to sort 4 Continue to hold the shift key while click on additional column headings until the appropriate arrow appears T
409. t your Report Dates as needed In the Printer drop down select your PDF printer Click the hyperlink to preview the report Click Print to create the PDF file You ll be asked to name the file and choose a location to save it to We recommend saving to your Desktop so you can find it easily but it s entirely up to you 9 Youcan view the document by double clicking on the desktop icon 10 To Print the report open the PDF file and then click the printer icon or click File Print to print out to your regular printer 11 To email the file attach it to an 12 You can also save the file to a CD flash drive external drive or any other media that you like Agenda Assignments The Agenda report allows you to print what you see under the Agenda tab The Agenda is not intended for printing it is a visual tool However if you wish you can print your student s information in this format Onscreen you have a scrollable window in printed form you re limited to the confines of an 8e x 11 sheet of paper Agenda Report Options Filler Choose a student Due to the complexity of the report you can only print an Agenda report for one student at a time Homeschool Tracker Plus will remember your selection from one session to the next Choose Agenda items Click the link to choose which items to include in the report Assignments Field Trips Memorization Items Reading Log Items Appointments Attendance Chores Holiday V
410. tab 2 Right click over a Term and click Edit 3 Make any changes needed to the name code start and end dates year affiliation or semester affiliation 4 Click Save to keep your changes click Cancel to exit without saving Deleting a School Year Click on the Maintenance tab and then the Years Terms tab Right click over the Year you wish to remove and click Delete Click YES in the Are you sure window The year and its related terms will be removed Deleting a School Year does remove any data from the database It simply removes this particular set of date parameters Deleting a Term 1 Click on the Maintenance tab and then the Years Terms tab 2 Right click over the Term you wish to remove and click Delete 3 Click YES in the Are you sure window 15 4 The term wil be removed Deleting a Term does not remove any data from the database It will affect your ability to report grades for that date range Terms are required for Overview Report Card and Transcripts Designating the Active School Year There are two ways to designate which School Year is active Using the Tools Menu 1 Click on Tools in the menu bar 2 Click on Switch School year All your school year names will be displayed A checkmark will designate the year which is currently active 3 Click on any school year name to make that the active year 4 The name of the Active School Year wil appear in the Homeschool Tracker Plus title bar
411. tal of all points earned for the completed assignments in the activity lt Avg Shows the average grade in percentage format for the completed assignments in the activity In the Total row the Avg shows the calculated average for non weighted courses based on your selected grading options 207 Grade The letter grade that will be awarded for the Subject Course based on the grading scale assigned Val For weighted courses this column shows the weighted value of the percentage in the Avg column In the Total row the Wid Val shows the sum of the values in the column This will be the percentage value that is used to determine the letter grade for the term See Grades Grading Scales and Weighted Grading for details on how weighted grades are calculated Time Spent The column will display the total Time Spent for completed assignments within the activity Sessions The column wil display the total Sessions for completed assignments within the activity Tomes seers ene Faa Taen Genie Parent sera Raw Tex e Figure 240 Overview Explained View Assignments You can right click on any activity to view the completed assignments used to generate the information shown You can right click on the Total line to view all assignments for all activities in a particular course i Right click on an Activity or Total and click View Assignments
412. tal video available on this topic When you submit items from the Lesson Plan you can choose o use a pre defined schedule to control how the items are placed in the Assignment grid Homeschool Tracker Plus will look for an item on the selected schedule that most closely matches the selected Lesson Plan item in Subject Course and Activity See LP Schedule above 1 Inthe Submit Lessons to Assignment Grid window choose Use LP Schedules 2 Click Preview 3 Selecta schedule to attribute to each student These Schedule selections wil be maintained until you change them You may choose a different schedule for each student selected or you may choose the same schedule for of students 4 Click OK to continue to the Confirm Lesson Assignments window 5 See The Preview Window below to continue Figure 108 Submit Using LP Schedules Method 2 Use the following days and times Supplemental video available on this topic You may not want to set up LP Schedules Or perhaps you want to manually set days and times for a specific set of Lesson Plan Items for whatever reason In that case the Use the following days and times submit option to give you more flexibility in the booking of your assignments from a Lesson Plan 1 Choose Use the following days and times The lower options of the window will be enabled 2 Choose the days of the week for this submission Selected days All school days w
413. tch found you will get a choice to Import New Item All of the information entered for the selected Library Item by the person who created the Lesson Plan will be imported as well lt Whether there is a match or not you may select any Resource from the drop down list lt Make a selection for each Library Item displayed Resource Types tab You need to select the Resource Types to be assigned to the Resources in this Lesson Plan lt The Import too will look for an exact match between Resource Types in the Lesson Plan and your Resource Types list If an exact match is found Homeschool Tracker Plus will suggest using it If there is no match found you will get a choice to Import New ltem Whelher there is a match or not you may select any Resource Type from the drop down list lt Make a selection for each Resource Type displayed Import tab This is where you will commit to the import of this Lesson Plan Destination Database File If you have more than one Homeschool Tracker Plus Database this display wil show you which database flle will be getting the Imported Lesson Plan Homeschool Tracker Plus wil always select the most recently opened database Ifthe displayed database file is not the one where you want to put the imported Lesson Plan cancel the process now Then reopen Tracker and point to the database you want to import into 12 Click the Finish Button at the bottom of the window to Import the plan click Can
414. te or press the Delete key on your keyboard If you have included an Activity that is in use in the program it will not be deleted during this process Archiving an Activity If you will not be using an Activity for the Active School Year but that Activity is tied to existing Assignments or Lesson Plans or if the Activity may be used again at a future date you may wish to Archive rather than delete the Activity Archiving allows you to retain all records associated with that Activity while removing the Activity from the related drop down lists You can reactivate the Activity at any time 1 Click on the Maintenance tab and then on the Other tab 2 Choose Activities from the drop down list 3 Right click over the Activity you wish to move to the inactive list and choose Archive from the context menu The Archive box will be checked You can archive two or more items at the same time Use shift click or ctrl click to select the items you wish to archive Right click over the selection and chase Archive from the context menu 4 When you return to the Activity list or change the filter from Active to Archive Only the record will be removed from the Active view Un Archiving an Activity At any time you can choose to move an Activity from the Archive list back to the Active lit Click on the Maintenance tab and then on the Other tab Choose Activities from the drop down list Change the Filter drop down from Ac
415. ted from that item Archiving a Weekly Planner Item If you will not be using a Weekly Planner item for the Active School Year but that item may be used again ata future date you may wish to Archive rather than delete the item Click on the Teacher tab and then on the Weekly Planner tab Right click over the Weekly Planner item you wish to move to the inactive list Choose Archive from the context menu The Archive box will be checked When you return to the Weekly Planner grid or change the filter from Active to Archive Only the record will be removed from the Active view Ben You can archive two or more items at the same time Use shift click or ctrl click to select the items you wish to archive Right click over the selection and chose Archive from the context menu Un Archiving a Weekly Planner Item At any time you can choose to move a Lesson Plan from the Archive list back to the Active list Click on the Teacher tab and then on the Weekly Planner tab Right click over the Weekly Planner item you wish to move to the inactive list Choose Unarchive from the context menu The Archive box will be unchecked When you retur to the Weekly Planner grid or change the filter from Active to Archive Only the record will be removed from the Archive Only view pepe You can un archive two or more items at the same time Use shift click or ctrl click to select the items you wish to reactivate Right click over the select
416. tem in Ihe Library grid or over multiple items using the Shift Click or procedures outlined above Add New brings up the Add Edit window Edit opens the edit window for the selected item Delete allows you to permanently remove the selected item s from the database You will have an opportunity to confirm your selection before deletion occurs Deleted items cannot be retrieved e Archive allows you to remove an item from the active view without having to delete it lt Unarchive allows you to return an archived item to the active view Reclassify is special kind of Group Edit that lets you change the Library item selection for linked items Used By shows you where the selected item is being used in the program pu eat Date Recast Used Be Figure 192 Resource Type amp Resource Location Right Click Menu 7 Reading Log The Reading Log is an area where you can list those books or other materials your child reads outside of the assigned curriculum generally library books and such You may choose to include Time Spent Sessions information for any all of your student s Reading Log items This can be captured on the Time Spent Sessions report You can choose to disable Ihe Reading Log tab in Tools Options General Anatomy ofa Reading Log Item You can track a number of details about the books your student is reading The only required item for Reading Log ltem is
417. tems with a sequence number equal to or higher than the number indicated This will default to the sequence number of your first selected item You can change that value if you wish This allows you to select just one row and have the changes applied to that item and all that follow without having to select them first 6 Click OK to make the changes Decrease Sequence Numbers Select one or more items in the Lesson Plan using shift click or ctrl click to highlight the items Right click over the selection and choose Change Sequence Numbers Choose the Decrease sequence numbers by option Enter the value you want to subtract to each of the existing sequence numbers For instance if you enter 1 and your existing sequence numbers are 1 2 and 3 the changedlincreased sequence numbers will be 0 1 and 2 If necessary Homeschool Tracker Plus will assign negative numbers to the sequence field in order to meet your specifications 5 Inthe lower half of the window you need to choose which items you want to change The first selection will cause Homeschool Tracker Plus to change only the items you have highlighted in the grid The second selection will cause Homeschool Tracker Plus to change all items with a sequence number equal to or higher than the number indicated This will default to the sequence number of your first selected item You can change that value if you wish This allows you to select just one row and have the changes applied t
418. th __ 1_ 100 72 Math Algebra i Test 100 78 Math Algebra i Test 100 a Math Algebra i Homework 50 50 Wath Algebra 1 Homework 50 48 Math Algebra i Homework 35 33 Math Algebra i Homework 10 g Math Algebra 1 Homework 10 16 Math Algebra i Homework 10 10 Total 815 50 6 Term 2 Math Algebra 1 506 615 82 28 Yearly Grade Math Algebra 1 118 80 01 82 28 2 Grading Scales Supplemental video available on this topic if you are using Courses you must select a grading scale to associate with the Course but that is as far as the grading need go Il you are not using Courses the Default Grading Scale will be applied to graded assignments Letter grades wil not appear in the Assignment grid or Overview grid They are visible however in the Add Edit window of the Assignment Ali changes and entries into the Grades grid are performed directly in the grid itself There is a Default Grading Scale already established You can change the scale to meet your awn needs Editing the Default Grading Scale 1 Click on the Maintenance tab and then the Other tab 2 Choose Grading Scales in the Select Table to Edit drop down list f LES 22 Sec reeves nasa wm La Grading Scale with Ridiculous numbers for esting New sc for testa purposes 60 rough ndi qo Testing for Length ef Grading Scale
419. th the flow Or somewhere in between lt What level of detail do you require for your own comfort level lt Do you intend to grade some or all of your student s work And if so you interested in weighted grading Once you have an idea of your goals it will be easier to choose which features of Homeschool Tracker Plus will best meet your needs You can always add other features as your needs change over the years It you like you can jump right in creating your records Go to the Maintenance area and set up your School Info enter Students and create a School Year and you can be on your way referring to this User Manual or the included Help File F1 as you move through the program Navigating the Program To move to any area in Homeschool Tracker Plus use the tabs located across the lop of the program window There are five major tabs Main Menu Student Teacher Maintenance and Reports The Student Teacher and Maintenance tabs each have a number of sub tabs Homeschool Tracker Plus will remember your sub tab selections as you move between major tabs For instance if you are viewing the Lesson Plans area under Teacher and then move to the Assignments area under Student when you click on the Teacher tab again you ll be taken directly to Lesson Plans In the Options window you can select which screen Tracker opens to each time you start the program The default start up screen is Main Menu See Program Optio
420. the mandatory report requirements of your local authorities Use of the program is restricted 10 single family homeschool Homeschool Tracker Plus can simplify your homeschooling with reusable Lesson Plans customized Grading Scales and copy functions which make it easy to assign work to your students and to create permanent records of that work Flexibility is the key Use Homeschool Tracker Plus in the way that works best for you There are many powerful features available to you However you only need to use the features that are an asset to your planning and schooling style For additional assistance you can lt Email us at support homeschooltracker com View the companion training videos on the Support page of our website www homeschooltracker com Post questions on our moderated Customer Discussion Group hilp lforum homeschoollracker com Chat online with a member of our support team using the link on our website Getting Started The best place to start is to decide what it is you want from your planning and record keeping efforts Here are some questions to ask Are you required to maintain attendance records Are you required to homeschoo for a specific number of hours per day and or per year Are there specific Subjects you are required to teach How many students are you schooling and what grade levels are you teaching Do you like to have things planned out at the beginning of the year Or are you more go wi
421. thers Importing a Lesson Plan i Click on Tools in the menu bar and then click on Import Export What would you like to do 9 Import a fle that someone has shared weh you Exporta fle to share with someone Choose File Type Figure 267 Import Export Tool 2 Click Continue 3 Choose the file you wish to import by double clicking on the LPX file or by clicking once on the file and then on the Open button Figure 268 Choose File to Import 4 The Import Export Preview window will appear Here you have a chance to review what you re about to import before committing changes to your database Use the Check Al Uncheck All buttons to quickly select or deselect all tems Click on an individual item to include It Use shift click to select multiple items at once lt You can use the grouping and sorting capabilities of the preview grid to arrange the way in which items are displayed When you ve selected the items you want to import click OK 5 Homeschool Tracker Plus will close and the Import Lesson Plan window will open Once you choose a name for the imported plan or choose an existing plan to import the new information into you can click on each of the other tabs in turn or click the Next button to move thraugh the tabs If you prefer you can skip to the Import tab and finish the process immediately Figure 269 Choose Items to Import 5 Plan Name tab In the first screen cr
422. tings well again choose to use Numbers Our separator of choice is a dot and well start with 1 increment by 1 and end with 2 Again we can add Trailing Text if needed 9 The Show Ending Page Range has no effect on our choice this time as we have incremented by 1 The Show Ending Page Range option only affects the range of the last part in use in this case the second par 10 The Example window at the bottom of the copy options window shows you what the PagelLesson Chapter field wil lok lke for the first assignment created Press OK to set the pattern or Cancel to exit the copy window See 7 11 Window and Grid Display to continue Window and Grid Display When you return to the Add Edit window alter setting your options the Example field in the Page Lesson Chapter PLC Text Options area will display the next PLC to be assigned based on your Pase Lesson Cheptr Tox Options selections above Same Page Lessen Chapter for Each Copy The next PLC to be assigned will also appear in the Atto ncrement Page Lesson Chapter Page Lesson Chapter fel ofthe Weekly Penner Gam grid and when the maximum PegetLesson Chapler has been assigned that status wil be noted inthe Westy Planner PLG Window Display Add Edit window field and the grid field as reached end of patter Page Lesson Chapter Tent Options Same Page Lesson Chapterfor Each Copy
423. tions Figure 296 Goals Progress Report Options Page Options Enter a title for your report You can leave this field blank if you prefer Sets and Topics Click on Choose Goals The Choose Goals window will appear You may select any goals to include in the report If you check the Goal Set name the entire goal set will be included If you check the Area Discipline name all goals under that area discipline will be included If you check an individual goal that item will be included to be included will be highlighted in yellow Include Choose whether to include goals in progress complete or both Fields to Display Choose which fields to include in the report Progress Notes the notes you have entered in the goal progress entry Assignment Detail assignments to which the goal has been linked Memorization Detall memorization items to which the goal has been linked Reading Log Detail reading log items to which the goal has been linked Page Break Options None The report will just keep moving page to page as more room is needed Goal Each new goal will start on a new page Filter Choose which Students Subjects Courses Activities and or Resources to include in the report The initial default selections are but your settings from previous reports will be carried over here Grading Scale Maintenance Lists You can print out any single grading scale in it
424. tions Chores Grading Scales Journal Categories Lesson Plan Names LP Schedule Names Resource Locations and Resource Types Adding Editing and Deleting any of these items is virtually identical Selecting a List i Click on the Maintenance tab and then the Other tab 2 Make your selection from the Select Table to Edit drop down list 55 rm Dor sti Sue Toners OR Fer x A grmert Locator actin Sheet Creer jA donsl Reading Lesson Pan Nares Assemble Lapboak L Schedule Nemes Rescue Locations pum Rescue Types Figure 337 Maintenance Other Lists Adding Maintenance Other Items i Click the Add button at the top of the Maintenance Other grid or right click over the grid and choose Add new 2 Enter your new ilem name It can be two or more words if you like 3 Click Save to add the new item to the list The Exceptions Four of the Maintenance Other lists have special entry fields or requirements Assignment Locations Chores Grading Scales and Lesson Plan Names Assignment Locations The default entry is Home You can edit this to display a specific name for your Home location if you like Assignment Location must be designated as the Home location When you enter your new Assignment Location you can designate it as Home by checking the box
425. tions in various reports Notes Optional The Notes field is place to put information for you the teacher Date Given Optional The date the task is assigned to be started Date Due Required This is the date on which the assignment is to be finished If your Date Due is different than the Date Given the assignment is considered Long Term LT Has Time Start End Times Optional Use these fields to set specific starting and ending times for your assignments Grades Points Possible and Points Earned Optional Grading is optional in Homeschool Tracker Plus To grade work enter the points possible for the assignment When the work is complete enter the points earned Homeschool Tracker Plus will automatically determine the percentage grade for that assignment by dividing the points earned by the points possible Mark the assignment as complete to have the grade calculated and displayed in the Grade column See Grades Grading Scales and Weighted Grading Time Spent Optional Enter the total number of time in hours and minutes that the student spent on the assignment Sessions Optional Instead of tracking actual hours and minutes some users prefer to track sessions with one session being awarded each time that a class is held I m Done Optional This checkbox lets the student indicate that work has been completed on the assignment The Done Completed box must still be checked in order for
426. tive to Archive Only or Both Right click over the Activity you wish to move to the active list and choose Unarchive from the context menu The Archive box will be unchecked lt You can un archive two or more items at the same time Use shift click or ctrl click to select the items you wish to reactivate Right click over the selection and chose Un Archive from the context menu 5 When you return to the Activity list or change the filter from Active to Archive Only the record wil be removed from the Archive Only view The Activity Right Click Menu 9 You can right click over an individual Activity or use shift click or ctrl click to select multiple activities and right click over the selection to perform various functions on the selected item Add New Add New allows you to add a new Activity to the list by opening the Add C Activity window Edit allows you to edit an existing Activity by opening the Edit Activity window Delete for that item Delete allows you to permanently remove the selected item from the database If the Activity is in use Homeschool Tracker Plus wil search the Unarchive database for any items that have been attached to the selected Activity You can then reclassify those items by choosing a different Activity so the original item can be deleted Deleted items cannot be retrieved For multi item eer selection any activities not in use will be removed Act
427. to move to the active list and choose Unarchive from the context menu The Archive box will be unchecked lt You can un archive two or more items at the same time Use shift click or ctrl click to select the items you wish to reactivate Right click over the selection and chose Un Archive from the context menu 4 When you return to the Subject Courses list or change the filler from Active to Archive Only the record will be removed from the Archive Only view Printing a List of Subjects If desired you can print out a list of your Subjects and their descriptions See the Reports section for details See Reports The Subject Right Click Menu You can right click over an individual Subject to perform various functions on the selected lt Add New allows you to add a new item to the grid Clicking this option will bring up Edit the Add Subject window Delete Edit opens the Edit Subject window for that item Delete allows you to permanently remove the selected item from the database If Archive the Subject is in use Homeschool Tracker Plus will search the database for any Unarehive items that have been attached to the selected Subject You can then reclassify those items by choosing a different Subject item so the original item can be deleted Deleted items cannot be retrieved Archive allows you to deactivate the selected item This wil remove the tem from the Active fitered view in th
428. to provide an optional way of scheduling work when Submitting items from your Lesson Plans You can create schedules per student term grade level or any other classification that meets your needs You can create as many Schedules as you like If you choose to use the schedule when submitting Lesson items you may elect to use a different schedule for each Student So if Student A s schedule has Math Algebra set up for Mon through Fri 8 30 9 30 and Student B s schedule has Math Algebra set up for Tue Wed 3 00 4 00 those are the days and limes that will be used for each student respectively f 103 Again the LP Schedule does not display actual assignments only a user defined schedule detailing which subjects are studied at which times on which days For a calendar style look at a student s assigned activities please see the section entitled Agenda Setting the Start Time for Schedule You can set the default start time for a new entry into the LP Schedule area in Program Options This will also determine the first visible time in the Schedule grid 1 Click on Tools then Options from the Homeschool Tracker Plus menu bar or press F3 2 Choose a Start Time for Schedule from the drop down list any hourly increment from 12 00 AM to 11 00 PM 8 Click Save to keep your changes click Cancel to exit without saving The LP Schedule Display
429. to view Reading Log items for a specific student or All Students 173 The Search field You can search among your assignments within the parameters of your drop down settings Hidden fields will be included in the search parameters This search field is tied to the search fields in the other Student tab areas Assignments Field Trip and Memorization Grouping and Sorting Just as in the Assignment grid you may choose to group and sort the displayed information in the Library grid according to any column heading See 174 Using the Grids What Items appear in the Reading Log Grid The Reading Log wil display items for your students based on the following parameters The item has a Start date that is on or before the end date of your Active School Year and has Finish date The item has a Start date that is on or before the end date of your Active School Year and a Finish date that is between the start and end dates of your Active School Year The item has no Start date and no Finish date The item has no Start date and has a Finish date between the start and end dates of your Active School Year The Reading Log will not display items for your students that fall within these parameters The has no Start date and the Finish date is prior to the start of the Active School Year The item has no Start date and a Finish date that falls after the end of the Active School Year Adding a Reading Log En
430. try You can open the Add Reading Log window in three ways From Student Reading Log screen click Add From anywhere in Homeschool Tracker Plus press F6 Click on New in the menu bar then Reading Log See The Anatomy of a Reading Log lem above for a description of each field Manually Adding a Reading Lot Item i Open an Add Reading Log Item window using one of the methods above 2 The top part of the form will show Library information 3 Choose a title from the Library ltem drop down list If the tile you want is not listed click the pencil icon and choose add new to create a new library item 4 Inthe lower half of the window fillin each field as desired The only required field is Student 5 Click SAVE ig Reading Log Item from the Library 1 Click on the Maintenance tab and then click on the Library tab Right click over any Library item and choose Create Reading Log Item 3 The Add Edit Reading Log window will appear showing the Title and other information fram the Library item selected Choose a Student name from the drop down list Enter whatever other information you would like 6 Click Save Adding Multiple Reading Log Items from the Library 175 Click on the Maintenance tab and then click on the Library tab Use Shifl lick or Ctri cick to select two or more items to work with Right click over the selection and choose Create Reading Log Item A Create Reading Log Item win
431. tudents if you wish see below program ships without a Master Password and with security options turned off Setting the Master Password 1 Click on Tools Security With the Use Security Options box checked click on the Change Master button 3 Enter the new Master Password The actual symbols you type will appear as opposed to asterisks 4 Re enter the new password Write it down somewhere safe or commit it to memory 5 Click OK to keep the new password click Cancel to exit without changing the password 6 When you ve set the Master Password option the Choose User splash screen will appear with Teacher and any other students who have been allowed access Click on Teacher and enter the password when prompted Figure 353 Change 8 Passwords are not case sensitive Master Password Security Level Allow Student Login You can allow access or deny it to any of your students By default all students are denied access Allowing access gives the student the ability to log in 1o the Homeschool Tracker Plus program For any student to whom you have granted access the following privilages can also be granted independently of each other User Passwords Change Any Assignment Field Change Dates and or Change Points Earned When a student is logged in to Homeschool Tracker Plus the Teacher and Maintenance tabs are removed from view The Tools Database and Help menus are disabled T
432. ture Line Choose to include exclude a place to sign the Transcript certifying it as accurate Removal of the signature line will also remove the Title option below Including a signature line will also generate a line to print the name of the signatory Title Choose to exclude include a place to indicate the title of the signatory Notary Line A generic notary witness line is printed Transcript Options for Full Page Style Page Oplions Title Enter a title for your report Graduation Date Label If you include a Graduation Date on your Transcript you have the option here to customize the title of the entry The default tile is Projected Graduation Date Your entry will be maintained until you change it Report Style Only the Yearly format is available in the Full Page Transcript School Years Only years which have at least one term defined will appear as selections lt You may include as many or as few years as you wish Filter Due to the complexity of the report you can only create a Transcript for one student at a time Choose which Subjects Courses and or Activities you want to include in your Transcript Previously archived Subjects and Courses will appear on the list followed by an asterisk to signify their status Header Items Choose which of the listed items you want to display in the header area of the Transcript F DOB SSN Guten Due Figure 319
433. u You can right click over a single item or over multiple items using Shif Click or Ctrl Click 23 View Assignments Edit one or more Goals to mark as complete or add to the Notes fields View Racing Log Rares View Assignments shows you the assignments attached to the 7 selected goals View Memorization tems View Reading Log Items shows you the Reading Log items attached to Figure 256 Goals Progress the selected goals View Memorization Items shows you the Memorization items attached to the selected goal s Printing Goals You can print out a list of the goals you have entered in whole or in part using the Goals report The Goals Progress report allows you to print a list of goals their status of In Progress or Completed You may also choose to include the Notes field and supporting information for the Assignments Reading Log and Memorization items the student completed in working towards the Goals See Reports Journal The Journal is an area where you or your student can make notes about progress ideas really anything at all that you d like There is a Journal tab under both the Student and the Teacher tab You can type anything you like in a journal entry Your notes may be printed into report format for any range of dates within the Active School Year Notes may be entered in rich text format which means you can change font font size and font color and or use bold italic or u
434. u from marking an item as completed a date outside of the Term which would cause them to be excluded from grade calculations for the Report Card or Transcript 20 Click the Next button or click the Review tab to see a snapshot of the year you have created 21 Check the box to make this the Active School Year The date range of the Active School Year determines which items will be viewable in the Assignments Field Trips Journal Memorization Overview and Reading Log areas 22 Click SAVE to add the year terms and holidays to the database You can view the Year and Terms you ve created under the Maintenance Years Terms tab 23 You can edit or delete these items at any time Deleting the school year or term does not delete assignments or other items within the date range Deleting the school year or term does not remove HVO days you have created Review for 2000 2010 pd Te Ner Dane Heb Figure 17 Maintenance Years Terms Editing a School Year using the School Year Calculator i Click on the Maintenance tab and then the Years Terms tab 2 Right click over a School Year and click on Edit using School year Calculator 3 Change any details of your School year as needed using the tabs or Next button to move to the different areas of the calculator tool 4 Click SAVE to keep your changes Figure 18 Years Terms Edit with School Year Cal
435. umber of days prior to the return date for an item to be included in the list See Borrowed Items Due See Borrowed Items Using the Grids Supplemental video avallable on this topic The Homeschool Tracker Plus grids provide you with the flexibility to arrange the data in a way that works for you Grouping Grouping allows you to select one or more column headers and use them to group the items For example if you group by Subject you ll see all the Art items grouped together then all the English items then the Math etc Grids that can be grouped are easily identified by the header area that displays Drag column header here to group by that column or showing a column name that has been dragged into that area Drag a column header here ts group by that cla Figure 326 Grouping Header H Date Due Sunday December 14 2008 1 tem Date Due Monday December 15 2008 8 tems Figure 327 Grouped by Date Due Many of the Homeschool Tracker Plus grids have default grouping settings You can change the groupings to anything you like and the program will remember those settings when you exit the program How do I Group The grouping process works in the same manner on all grids that have that capacity 1 Go the grid of your choice 2 Glick on any column heading Drag it into the gray header bar and release the mouse button to group by that category The column header name will n
436. ur selections click Cancel to exit without changing your column view Choose 4 Things to remember Columns Icon You can change your selections at any time Excluding a column from view does not remove the data stored in that field You can reset columns column widths and column order to their original settings by click the Reset Columns ican in the Assignment Grid header The Drop Down Lists Columns Icon Plan Choose which Lesson Plan you want to work with Only one plan can be viewed at a time Subject Choose All Subjects or one particular subject within the selected Lesson Plan 559 Course Choose All Courses or one particular course within the selected Lesson Plan Filter There are three options Un Used will show all the lesson plan items which have not yet been used to create assignments This is the default setting Used will show you all the lesson plan items that have already been used to create assignments Each of these items will also show you the Date Due for the last assignment created from that item Used items can be reused as many times as you like You can reset the lesson plan item status from Used to Un used at any time c Both will show both used and un used items for the selected Lesson Plan The Search Field You can search among your Lesson Plan items within the parameters of your drop down settings Search text will compare against Subject Course Activity Resource Page L
437. urses per Subject in a given year depending on the area For a Subject of Science you may choose to have Courses for Biology Chemistry Physics etc You will use the Course area to award credit hours for your high school student which will appear on the Transcript Course Code any 1 7 characters of your choosing which serve as an abbreviation of the full Course name You may choose to display the Course Code column along with or instead of the Course Title column in any of the program grids Directions instructions you want the student to have access to when completing an assignment The Directions field can be included on any of the reports listing assignments with the exception of the Agenda report Field Trips any outing attended for which you wish to give schooling credit Field trips can be attributed 1o a specific subject and course There is a place for notes on the success or goals of the trip Goals learning achievements or other mileposts that you set for your student which can be designated by grade level school year discipline etc Goals can be attached to specific assignments in order to track your student s progress in that area Goals Progress this area allows you to view your student s status on working towards the learning goals which you have set Holiday a Holiday Vacation or Other day is a school wide day off meaning that it will apply to each student in your homeschool To Tracker these des
438. utomatically marked complete the first time you open Homeschool Tracker Plus after the trip date has passed All Field Trips have an activity of Field Trip which cannot be edited or deleted 6 Anatomy ofa Field Trip All Field Trips are required to have a Trip Description Trip Date Subject and at least one Student The data entry of field trip appears on the Assignment grid in a special pattern The Trip Description is displayed in the Page Lesson Chapler column The Notes will be displayed in the Directions column Figure 163 Field Trip Add Edit Window Students Required Students are selected when you click SAVE on the Add Field Trip window This allows you to create one set of trip information for multiple students at one time Description Required 100 character limit Enter a short description of the trip perhaps your destination Trip Date Required Defaults to your current system date If Today falls outside the Active School Year the school year start date will show here This date wil dictate where the Field Trip assignment appears in the Assignment grid Goals Optional You may elect to attribute goals to any assignment or group of assignments Goals can be created based on a grade level subject or any classification you like See Goals Subject Required Choose a Subject for the Field Trip Course Optional Choose a Course or leave this field blank if you prefer Location Option
439. ver non school days This allows you to mark more than one week at a time without including weekends Holiday Vacation Other days are not be skipped Click Absent 7 Enter a reason explanation in the box provided If you leave the box blank Sick will appear on the attendance calendar 8 Click OK to mark the calendars as noted Click Cancel or close the window to quit without making changes to Attendance Calendar Removing Present or Absent Entry Click the Student tab then Attendance tab Click on any calendar day to bring up the Attendance window Click None changes to the Attendance Calendar Recalculate Present Click All Students or click Selected Students and check names as appropriate Click on the date you wish to mark or click and drag over a range of dates Click OK to mark the calendars as noted Click Cancel or close the window to quit without making You can use this tool to have Homeschool Tracker Plus audit your records and update your Attendance Calendar based on your completed assignments You can use this tool whether or not you choose lo make use of the Auto Attendance function i Click Tools in the Homeschool Tracker Plus menu and choose Recalculate Present or click the Auto Attendance link at the top of the Attendance grid 0 D 28 Ree Fe rt ris oe Figure 160 Attendance Activate Recalculate Present 2 Inthe Recalculate Present
440. vious Next Icons mp 2 fete E Figure 90 Edit Lesson Plan Provious Next Buttons 4 Make your changes to the Lesson Plan item 2 Click Save to commit your changes 3 Then click the Previous or Next icon to move to the next item as displayed in the grid Group Edit You can edit almost any field in two or more Lesson Plan items at a time using the Homeschool Tracker Plus Group Edit feature 1 Use the Lesson Plan grid filters to display the items you wish to edit Use Shift click or Ctr click to select the items you wish to edit 3 Right click over the selection and choose Edit The Group Lesson Edit window will appear po TL bcr fugam on adt pat E ony on Asmat Corea Figure 91 Group Edit Lesson Plan Items Window 4 Puta check next to each field you want to change for the selected group of items As you check them the fields will become enabled 5 Make a new selection for each checked field 6 Click Save to keep your changes click Cancel to exit without saving Remember whatever choices you make here wil be assigned to all the items you have highlighted Creating Multiple Lesson Plan Items Creating Lesson Plan Items with the Copy Sume Pape for Each oy Function Supplemental video avallable on this topic d To view the Lesson Plans grid click on the Teacher tab and then the Lesson Plans tab Soko S 2 Ifyou have already set up your Lesson
441. w the Lesson Plans grid click on the Teacher tab and the Lesson Plans tab Choose a Lesson Plan from the Plan drop down list Use Shift clck or ctrl click to select the items you wish to copy to a different Lesson Plan Right click over the selection and choose Edit Put a check next to Plan in the Group Edit window se Im 1 1 ron T p nas debt mgmt rev Figure 103 Lesson Plan Moving to a New Plan 6 Selecta new Lesson Plan Name from the drop down list or add new plan name using the techniques outlined above 7 Click SAVE to move the selected items to the new plan Resetting Used Status The Lesson Plan fiter drop down list has three settings Used Un Used and Both This controls which items you see in the grid When you add an item to a Lesson Plan its status is always set to Un Used The Use box will be unchecked and the On field will be empty As you submit items to the Assignment grid the status of the item is automatically set to Used and the On field is filled with the Date Due attributed to the created Assignment If you have your filler set to show Un Used items only the Used items will be removed from the grid view as soon as you finish the Submit process although they are still part of the Lesson Plan 5 This feature allows you to manually set the status of one or more items marking them eilher as Used Un Used
442. w without having to delete it Unarchive allows you to return an archived item to the active view Attachments Supplemental video available on this topic Homeschool Tracker Plus allows you to link documents images or websites to your Assignments Field Trips Journal entries Resources Reading Log Lesson Plan or Weekly Planner items These can alternative resources for your student to use such as a website they can visit for more information or it can be files created of their work Word documents image files scanned items etc Enabling Attachments If you wish to use the Attachments feature you ll need to enable it in Program Options Turning on this option enables the Attachment field in the Assignments Field Trips Teacher and Student Journal Resources Reading Log Lesson Plan and Weekly Planner grids 1 To open the Program Options window click on Tools in the Tracker menu bar and then choose Options or press the key 2 Click the Assignments tab 3 Check the box next to Attachments in the Optional Fields list 4 Click Save to keep your changes Creating an Attachment The process for adding an attachment is the same for all areas of the program so welll look at an assignment here 1 Edit an assignment and click on the hyperlink in the Attachment field to view edit Attachments 2 Click the Add Attachment button to open the Attachment window f 126 mame
443. we recommend that you set your Date Complete Default to Dale Due in Tools Options Assignments This will allow you to mark multiple items as complete and have the correct date marked as Present the Attendance Calendar How Do I Turn On Off Auto Attendance Click Tools in the Homeschool Tracker Plus menu bar and then click Options or press F3 Click on the Attendance tab Check the box to automatically set present on date complete It desired select the option to allow present Y2 day and set the minimum amount of Time Spent and or Sessions to be met before a dale is marked as a full day present Anything less than that minimum will be marked as when there are completed items on that date 5 Click Save lt Each lime you mark at least one assignment complete for a particular date that date will be automatically marked present or present Ye day on the attendance calendar Ifyou are tracking Time Spent or Sessions the total will automatically appear in parentheses following the word present based on the completed assignments for that date Manually Marking day as Present or Present day You can manually enter present for one or more students at a time If you are manually tracking hours in the Attendance calendar enter them at this time If you are tracking Time Spent or Sessions the total will automatically appear in parentheses following the word present based on the complete
444. will be returned to its original position as soon as the Agenda screen is refreshed 6 Terms Attendance and Holiday items cannot be made into multi day events To change the start end times Click once on the item Click and drag the top or bottom edge to set the new start or end time To remove start end times click and drag the item into the dark blue area To add start end times to an all day item click and drag the item into the main Agenda area Then click and drag the top botlom edges to set the times you want T 5 Terms Attendance Holiday Memorization and Reading Log items cannot be given startend items bere Start End Times Option Ifyou have the Start End Times feature turned on in Tools Options Assignments you can change the start end times of Agenda items using the steps above lt Ifyou have the Start End Times option turned off you can move items from the all day area at the top of the date into the timed area to arrange your items but no start end times will be attributed to the Assignments and Field Trips unless and until you enable the Start End times feature Copying Items to another Agenda You can copy any Appointment Assignment Chore Field Trip Memorization or Reading Log item to any other student s Agenda You cannot copy Attendance Holidays or Terms Click on the Student tab and then the Agenda tab Choose a Schedule from the grid filter Choose the item you want to copy to another stude
445. wing Ctri Shifi Home Highlights all the rows from the row you start on up through and including the first row in the grid you are viewing Ciri Shift PageUp An alternative method to highlight all the rows from the row you start on up through and including the first row in the grid you are viewing C Ctrl Click This is a method for selecting multiple non contiguous items in a grid This process allows you to highlight items to be edited or deleted i Click the first item you wish to highlight 2 Press and hold the Ctrl key 3 Click on the each individual record you wish to include in your selection You may include as many records as you like 4 Release the key 5 You can now right click over the selection to perform your desired action Shift Click This is a method for selecting multiple contiguous items in a grid This process allows you to highlight items to be edited or deleted Click the first item you wish to highlight Scrol if necessary so that you can see the last item you wish to highlight Press and hold the Shift key Click on the last record to be included All the records between the first you chose to the last will be highlighted Release the Shift key amp You can now right click over the selection to perform your desired action Maintenance Lists The Maintenance Other Lists There are nine lists found under the Maintenance Other tab They are Activities Assignment Loca
446. wn list to add a new item to that drop down list or to edit the displayed item 7 Remember whatever choices you make here will be assigned to all the items you have highlighted 8 Save to keep your changes click Cancel to exit without saving Duplicating a Library Item In general you should only need one entry for each library item but this option exists in case you need it 1 Selectthe item you wish to copy 2 Right click over the item and choose Use As New 8 Glick OK on the Use as New message A duplicate of the original item will appear in an Add Edit Lesson window Change any information as needed 5 Click Save to add the item to the Library e 6 Ifthe title of your new item is identical to an existing library item you will receive a warning about adding a duplicate item If you want to add it anyway click Yes if click No Creating Resources or Reading Log Items from the Library The Library is the central repository for all your books textbooks and other schooling materials As needed you will copy selected items to the Resource or Reading Log lists With the Library you will have only one listed in the database but that item can be used over and over again in Reading Logs entries or as Resources for one or more Subjects or Courses Create Resource i Click on the Maintenance tab and then the Library tab 2 Locate the Library item you want to use as a Resource Right click over the
447. y Planner Same PLC Text Auto Increment Page Lesson Chapter The second option allows you to set an incrementing pattern for pages lessons numbers or chapters for the duration of the series You can set up one two or three levels of incrementing Creating a one level increment A one level increment might be Page s 1 Chapter 3 etc Page s 6 10 Page s 11 15 or Chapter 1 Chapter 1 Tocrene this ype of erement chaose the Autrement Pagesson Chaplr 2 Satthe Number Pare sane t Choose wheter joe o uae eters or numbers you cement bal The default option is set to use numbers Useletters Use Numbers 4 Set your Leading Text from the drop down f apo Fat Choose fo one of th preset toes st chone Joe Dun e Inthe Sta Wi box enter he tet page lesson o chap number yu abe alois youto speedy how many uns pass by bore the beglming ofthe nex For example each is two pages long assignment would med a gt Lm Cem iiec WEM wis ae iano e E Dareia E HE asslgrmert sedes For example holes page In ou workbooks page 0 we wold enter 90 nthe End Wit box a Zeros defit t zero You ean addup to ire lending zeros ta he Fst paro your eremert The purpose of his Reid rj allow you to aan assignment aby te Faget
448. y in the Attendance Calendar Homeschool Tracker Plus gives you the option of tracking time as well as days in the Attendance calendar If you choose to track one of these values you can also choose to include the value in the Attendance Report There are four options available to you None no time entry will be made Manual HH MM manual entry of total time spent schooling per day in an HH MM format Sessions from Completed Assignments The total Sessions entered for all assignments marked as completed on that date will be displayed Time Spent from Completed Assignments The total Time Spent entered for all assignments marked as completed on that date will be displayed To Select a Time Entry Option Click Tools in the Homeschool Tracker Plus menu bar and then click Options or press F3 Click on the Attendance tab 3 Choose a Time Entry Option from the drop down list Sessions and Time Spent will only appear as options when you have elected to include those fields in Tools Options Assignments g Manual Hours in the Attendance Calendar 1 Click on the Student tab and then the Attendance tab 2 Click on any date to bring up the Attendance window Check he you want to mark as present or choose Al Students Jus 4 Click on a single date or click and drag over a range of dates to be marked as present with the hours you enter 5 Choose whether to skip over non
449. you have chosen Warning Be careful you do not move an assignment to a vacation or other non school day The program has already checked for this but will not override your changes here 7 Once you are content with the confirmation page click the Submit button If you decide not to perform this reschedule click Cancel to be returned to the Reschedule Assignments menu 8 A pop up will appear when rescheduling is complete If you are moving a large number of assignments it may take a minute or two The green progress bar will let you you re your changes are being processed 9 Click OK Rescheduling from the Student Assignment Grid Supplemental video available on this topi Homeschool Tracker Plus allows you to select your items to be rescheduled directly in the Assignment grid area 1 Click on the Student tab and then on the Assignments tab 2 Set the Student Subjects Courses and Filter drop downs as desired 3 Choose a dale on the calendar click and drag over a range of dates or choose All Dates 4 Use Shificlick or Ctri click to select the items you wish to reschedule 5 Right click over the selection and choose Reschedule 6 The Reschedule Options window will appear with the Starting Ending date fields and the Additional filter options disabled These options have been set based on the items you selected in the grid 7 Select which types of days you would like to skip over 8 Set your First New Date Due 9 Choose
450. your Reschedule method 10 Click Preview and continue as above Topics Topics are an optional feature Some facts about Topics Topic is a short description of the material covered in the lesson The Topic field can hold up to 100 characters Topic can be edited directly any grid in which it appears Topic can be displayed or hidden on any grid using the Choose Columns icon A Topic can be edited in the Group Edit window for any grid in which it appears When included in the Assignments Report Topics give your student an insight into the subject matter to be covered in the day s lessons lt Inthe Scope amp Sequence report Topics allow you to show some detail of what was studied in each discipline You can generate Scope amp Sequence for assignments complete or incomplete or both or from a Lesson Plan See Reports Scope amp Sequence for more details 59 Security Homeschool Tracker Plus allows you to set up Access Privileges for multiple users You can use the Security feature to give program access to some or of your Students while limiting the items they can and edit This is an optional feature of Homeschool Tracker Plus Enabling the Security Feature 1 Click on Tools in the Homeschool Tracker Plus menu bar 2 Choose Security from the list The Security Options window will appear showing the current settings lor all Students 3 Check the Use Security Options box to turn on t
451. ything you like When exporting Goals Library items of Holidays Tracker will supply a dummy file name You change it to anything you like Choose a location for your export file The default location is your computer desktop for easy access Click Begin Export to create the export file Click OK on the Export Complete message You can then import or export another file or click Close on the Import Export menu window Reports The Reports in Homeschool Tracker Plus allow you to create a record of the work you have accomplished during the year Most reports have customizing options It is a good idea to become familiar with these options and even preview the report with different options selected Disabling features of the program in Tools Options will disable the reports associated with those features as well Maintenance Lists Gate tg Se feces Planning 99 Rave Figure 274 Reports List e Each Report is grouped into one of the categories Assignments Forms Grades Maintenance Lists Planning and Other The reports below are outlined in alphabetical order to make it easier to find what you re looking for Preview Pane options When you select a report you will be taken to the Preview screen Here you will set some of the universal options for your reports You can change these options at any time Homeschool Tracker Plus will remember your selections until you change them

User Manual PDF

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents